In this article, I’ll guide you through a step-by-step process to harness the power of Canva for quickly and easily making quality, effective worksheets. Whether you’re new to this platform or looking to refine your skills, you’ll learn how to design worksheets that are not only visually appealing but also pedagogically sound, enhancing the learning experience for your students. Don’t worry, you don’t need any technical knowledge because Canva does the hard work for you.

Don’t Have a Canva Account Yet?

The first thing to do, if you don’t already have a Canva account is to make one. This will allow you to make and save your projects.

Canva Pro

Canva makes it easy for anybody to create stunning visuals for a wide range of applications, including marketing materials, worksheets, presentations, social media posts, banners, and more -- no design experience required.

Try Canva Pro Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

It’s free to create a Canva account, but I do want to point out that with an upgraded Canva Pro account, you can take your creations to a whole new level with its unlimited features and premium content.

Once you’ve created your Canva account, the worksheet creation can begin!

You’ll sign into your account, and you’ll see a left sidebar that includes tools and options to use in your account. One of those options is projects. Clicking that will allow you to find projects you’ve made and that others have shared with you, in a neat and organized folder. Choosing “Create a Project” will allow you to create a class or even a worksheets folder, so you can begin the design process.

Step #1 – Create a Canva Design

When you’re in your Canva account you just need to find the button that says, “Create a Design.” From there, since you’re making a new worksheet, you’ll pick the worksheet option from a list of designs that are offered.

If you don’t initially see “Worksheet” in the drop-down menu, don’t worry. The list you initially see are some suggestions of things you might make from Canva. Just type “Worksheet” into the search bar at the top of the drop-down box, and you’ll receive the worksheet options instantly. There is more than one worksheet option, but the standard “Worksheet” is the standard size you’d likely use for class. Alternatively, you can choose the US Letter option, which would be the same size.

Tip – When you’re choosing the worksheet template you want to use you can use your mouse pointer to hover over the options to see the size for each option.

Step #2 – Choose Your Design Elements

Once you opt to create your new worksheets, you are going to have two options. You’ll be able to start your worksheet on a blank page to create the design you want, or you can choose from a set of Canva templates that are designed for you and ready to go.

There is no wrong answer here. It comes down to a matter of preference. The good news is that if you don’t have a design in mind, Canva has a wide selection of professional-looking templates that will be suitable for all kinds of worksheets.

Step #3 – Add the Text

Now that you have chosen a template or designed something on your own, it’s time to add the text that the students will be reading and/or the questions they will be answering. To do this, you’ll just choose the “Text” option on the sidebar. You’ll type your worksheet content right there. If you need to add headings, you can do that by choosing the “Heading” option that appears in the drop-down options.

All of your text ends up in handy boxes, which allows you to stretch or shrink text, as needed. You’ll also be able to move the text around the page so that your worksheet has all the elements you want, in the places you want them. You can change the font, font size, font color, and text elements using the bar above the design space.

If you want to change the text for example, you’d click the font drop-down to get started. This will bring up a section of the left sidebar that shows you all of the available fonts with a small preview. While some fonts are only available for Canva Pro users, there are many free options available.

After you have your font chosen, you can click the Effects button if you want to give your headers (or other text sections) some flare. Some options include turning text neon, curving your text, or creating a shadow or echo effect.

Step #4 – Add Images

If you want to add any images to your worksheet, now is the perfect time to do that. You just need to choose one of the image options (e.g. photos, charts, etc.) from the left sidebar. With Canva, you’ll have the option of adding your own images to your worksheets or you can choose from the Canva library, which currently includes more than one million stock images.

Whether you have something lesson-specific in mind or want to add something fun to your worksheets, you’ll have the chance to do that with images. If you don’t have your own, the Canva library is sure to have what you need.

At this point you’re almost done. In fact, depending on the worksheet you’ve created, you might be ready to save and begin the printing process. If it’s not perfect just yet you still have a few more options of things that you can do.

Step #5 – Add Shapes

Depending on the class, the addition of shapes could be helpful. You don’t have to worry about creating your own images – Canva has them ready to go.

So, whether this is a geometry worksheet or you’re having your class color worksheets adorned with Christmas ornaments, you’ll have what you need for your worksheet!

You’ll just need to search “Shapes” option in the left sidebar. From there, it’s as easy as choosing the shape you want to add to the worksheet and dragging it to where you want it.

Step #6 – Download and/or Print

If you’re making a standard non-interactive worksheet, it should be ready to go at this point. Keep in mind, that if something doesn’t look right you can adjust the elements so that it looks perfect. Once you’re happy with the results, you’re finished! You can download and print your worksheets and you’ll be grading them in no time!

Things to Keep in Mind

This was just a simple tutorial on how to make standard worksheets with Canva, but you can do so much more. You can make fillable or interactive worksheets if you want to share your worksheets online or virtually, as opposed to traditional in-class worksheets.

With interactive worksheets, you can go as far as adding video elements and other fun features.

If you’re adding your own pictures (on any of the worksheets) keep in mind that the final, printable product will be affected by the quality of images that you use.

In other words, if you add an image that is grainy or unclear for some reason it may be reflected in the final product.

For that reason, if you have an image you want to use that’s not good quality, you might want to consider a quick image search through the Canva library as you might find something that will work. This will help to ensure that your worksheets are the highest quality.

With Canva, you can create worksheets with anyone you want. So, if you share a classroom with another teacher or you have a teacher’s assistant, you can click the “Share” button in the top right corner to get a variety of options. You can add people or groups to share the worksheet with. You can also restrict the link so only those you want to see the worksheet or project, can see it. You can even share your worksheet on social media through the share section.

If you’re a Canva Pro user, you’ll have even more options for designing your projects.

One of the coolest features is the ability to resize your project even after you’re done. If you need a custom size or things don’t look quite right in the size you designed, you can just choose this option and put in the dimensions you want for most of the available project types.

As you can see, creating worksheets on Canva for free is simple. You only need a basic amount of knowledge and to know what you want, and you’re ready to design.

The kids in class will be sure to love the new worksheets and you can rest easy knowing you made them without spending too much time or money.

Once you make your first worksheet, you’ll see how easy it is. And once you do, you’ll see it’s so easy, you’ll be making more in no time!

Click here to try Canva Pro for free today.

Canva Pro

Canva makes it easy for anybody to create stunning visuals for a wide range of applications, including marketing materials, worksheets, presentations, social media posts, banners, and more -- no design experience required.

Try Canva Pro Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

The post How to Create Worksheets in Canva for Your Students appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

I don’t know about you, but I like to learn things fast. I might not be the smartest person out there, but I can learn faster than most people – maybe it’s my 20+ years of working with eLearning platforms. And if you’re reading this right now, chances are you feel the the same way.

I got some tips from Reddit on how to watch training videos, virtual conferences, online courses, and webinars faster, and that lead me to some cool hacks that I will explain. These tricks can even be used to speed up videos on streaming services like Netflix, Amazon Prime, YouTube, or anywhere else.

Here’s a quick overview of what I will cover in this article, if you want to skip ahead to the sections that most interest you:

• How Slow Videos Negatively Affect Learning
• The Advantages of Speeding Up and Skipping Through Videos
• The Simplicity of Speeding Up on Some Websites
• The Problem of “Chipmunk Voice”
• How to Speed Up and Skip Through Downloaded Videos
• How to Use Coding, Apps, or Plugins to Speed Up and Skip Through Videos
• Extra: Popular Video Players that Let You Speed Up The Video

How Slow Videos Negatively Affect Learning

Many videos are so slow-paced that viewers get bored. The viewers are easily distracted and are really just wasting time watching training videos while getting nothing out of it. The video may play all the way through, and they do not learn the content because they were not engaged.

A video with a droning, monotonous narration can put students to sleep. This is something to remember if you’re ever putting together your own videos for your training programs (check out our guide to the best video presentation software for doing this).

Remember, we’re living in the age of TikTok and Instagram, where people are used to quick, short, engaging videos. That’s not to say that your training video content needs to be the length of a TikTok, but you do have to remember that attention spans are shrinking and it’s harder than ever to keep viewers engaged for long periods of time.

Luckily, there are technology solutions that are easy to use to speed things up and save time watching videos.

The Advantages of Speeding Up and Skipping Through Videos

The one thing that a person’s most limited resource is time. Speeding up training videos increases retention because watching the faster video speed requires more focus.

Faster material is easier to concentrate on because a viewer feels more like he or she has to pay attention or they might miss something. If they do miss something, it is easy to go back to replay any part. This results in better retention overall from your online videos.

It’s possible to save about 30% of the time watching training videos while better comprehending the material.

That’s right, watching an hour video will only take 40 minutes. Thus, you can create 20 minutes of free time for every hour of video you previously watched at normal speed.

One of the best uses of these methods is to get through any mandatory video training as fast as possible to be able to take the quizzes and finish more quickly.

I used this method when I watched the training videos for how to use a document camera with Google Meet that I wrote about in this article.

The Simplicity of Speeding Up on Some Websites

Video streaming services and popular websites allow the training video playback to be adjusted. You will find the playback speed adjustment on YouTube by clicking on the tools icon at the bottom right screen of a playing video window.

YouTube allows the video playback speed to be adjusted increments of 1.25, 1.5, 1.75, and 2.0 to make it go faster and 0.75, 0.5, and 0.25 to make the video play slower.

The Problem of “Chipmunk Voice”

If you speed up the video, you may also speed up the audio, resulting in the voices sounding like a chipmunk. One solution for this problem I have found works well is a paid software program (with a free 7-day trial) called Enounce MySpeed.

The MySpeed tool can be used on websites with video playback without any built-in speed adjustment. MySpeed does not make a chipmunk sound for the voices. It just speeds up everything.

It also has a nice feature that shows how much time you saved from speeding up the videos you watched. For example, I ran it for about six months, and it showed that I saved over 100 hours watching training materials and other online videos.

This was helpful when in this article I reviewed the video presentations in the courses for those seeking a masters in instructional design.

How to Speed Up and Skip Through Downloaded Videos

Before you can speed up a pre-recorded webinar, first, you have to know how to download a webinar using a hack. Webinars may expire, and it is helpful to download a copy of the online video for personal use to watch it later or at a faster speed.

In this video, produced by KamuGenius, if the webinar was made using the Webinarjam system, you can see the steps to take to find the webinar file and download it,

Once you get the webinar downloaded, then you can speed things up.

Here is another way to do this hack using Brave, a browser that works like Chrome, but you are paid to use it. He uses the plug-in called Video Download Helper.

This method works with Webinarjam and some other webinar systems.

How to Use Coding, Apps, or Plugins to Speed Up and Skip Through Videos

There are many ways to speed up a video and even automatically fast forward a video that won’t let you with their regular video controls.

Coding

If you are comfortable using coding, you can run the developer tools of YouTube and find the video, then run it using JavaScript in the console by using this method.

Apps

Here are some free smartphone apps you can use to edit videos. You can skip the boring parts, speed up the playback, and fast forward video easily to watch at your own pace. You can download them for Android devices at Google Play or for iOS devices at the Apple App Store.

For Android and iOS devices:

• FilmoraGo
• Vlogit
• Quik
• Vizmato
• KineMaster

For iOS devices only:

• Slow Fast Slow
• SpeedPro Slow
• iMovie

Plug-Ins

For Chrome and Firefox users, in this video produced by Ryan Moran, you will see him show you how to get an extension called Video Speed Controller to speed up video playback of pre-recorded video.

You can use this hack for webinars that are pre-recorded and also for videos on YouTube.

Another Chrome plug-in to consider is SpeedUp. There are so many ways to do this, just search for “speed up video playback” to find a solution that fits your circumstances.

Extra: Popular Video Players that Let You Speed Up The Video

As a PC user, here’s a hack I’ve found especially useful. To speed up a video, you are watching on a PC using Window Media Player, you can hit CTRL+SHIFT+G while the video is playing. This shortcut key makes the video play about 1.5 times the normal speed.

Using the popular VLC Media Player, the shortcut key used to speed up the video is simply to hit the plus key. Hit it once to speed up the video a little and twice to speed it up more.

In Quicktime, you can use CTRL+K and then set the playback speed to the speed you desire. However, many people prefer to use 1.5 to make the video playback faster and still be watchable.

Useful Resources

• Edit video playback speed on iPhone
• 50 shortcuts for Windows Media Player 11
• Adjust video speed in iMovie on iPhone
• Build a custom HTML5 video player

Conclusion

Once you start to enjoy the benefits of watching videos at faster speeds, you will understand the psychological benefits of this process. If you make training videos, you can keep an audience’s attention more focused by teaching them how to save time.

If you are interested in learning more about how does virtual learning work to engage students, read my article here. In the meantime, you can have your viewers more engaged with the material if you simply suggest they speed things up while watching your training videos.

Have any questions about how to skip through online training videos and fast forward videos that won’t let you? Comment below for help.

The post How to Skip Through Online Training Videos & Fast Forward Videos That Won’t Let You appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Using games, puzzles, the alphabet, phonics, and sight words, Reading Eggs increases reading proficiency, comprehension, fluency, and pronunciation. But while Reading Eggs is primarily an innovative reading app that is split into levels to keep children engaged and enriched constantly, there’s also a math program available in the app called Mathseeds that’s adds math into the learning equation.

I know there’s a lot going on with the app and its offerings, which is why this guide will take you on a deep dive into Reading Eggs pricing and plans, and we’ll discuss whether or not I believe it’s a worthwhile program. This guide has been fully updated for 2024 to include the latest details so you can be confident you’re getting current, accurate info to help you make an informed buying decision.

How Much Does Reading Eggs Cost in 2024?

When it comes to pricing, Reading Eggs is admittedly one of the more complex apps out there.

If you’re just interested in accessing their reading program, you can subscribe to Reading Eggs for either $9.99 a month or $69.99 a year (works out to $5.83 a month when billed annually, a 41% savings).

Where things get unique and a bit confusing for some is you also have the option to combine your Reading Eggs subscription with access to Mathseeds (the brand’s terrific math program) for $13.99 a month or $99.99 a year (works out to $8.33 a month when billed annually, a 40% savings). This subscription gives you access to two different programs, covering a full range of curriculum for young kids.

You can try Reading Eggs free for 30 days.

Reading Eggs App Subscription – $9.99/monthly or $69.99 a year

If you’re only interested in subscribing to the Reading Eggs app, this is the plan for you. The annual subscription option will cost more upfront, but with a savings of 41%, it’s definitely worth it for the long-term savings.

Both plans give complete access to the app for teaching kids to read. The only difference is just in how much and how often you pay.

Some of the features of a Reading Eggs subscription include:

• Access for up to 4 kids
• Lessons match each child’s reading ability
• Fun rewards to keep kids motivated and engaged
• Reports to track progress
• Thousands of interactive lessons, printable worksheets, and children’s books to help your kid become a confident and fluent reader
• Available on mobile devices and desktops

Click here to try this plan free for 30 days.

Reading Eggs & Mathseeds – $13.99/monthly or $99.99 a year

If you’re also looking for a math app for your kids, Reading Eggs has a plan that includes access to the Mathseeds program which is also highly effective.

I was impressed by how Mathseeds combines solid pedagogical principles with engaging, interactive content to make learning math both fun and effective for children. The app’s strength lies in its ability to tailor the learning experience to each child’s individual level, ensuring that concepts are neither too challenging nor too simplistic. The lessons are thoughtfully structured, progressively building mathematical skills through interactive activities, games, and rewards that keep children motivated.

What sets Mathseeds apart in my experience is its ability to make abstract mathematical concepts tangible and understandable for young learners.

The app also provides valuable feedback and progress tracking, which is incredibly useful for parents and educators in monitoring a child’s development and identifying areas for further support.

The annual plan for the combined apps is the far better value as it offers a 40% savings, but it does require a larger payment up front.

Both plans give complete access to the two apps. The only difference is just in how much and how often you pay.

A Reading Eggs + Mathseeds subscription allows parents/caregivers to set up profiles for up to four children.

• Create profiles for up to 4 children
• Access all award-winning learning programs
• Access Mathseeds
• Lessons match each child’s skill level
• Detailed reports are sent to parents weekly
• Access to a library of 3000 e-books
• More than 500 printable activity sheets

Click here to try this plan free for 30 days.

All About Reading Eggs Award-Winning Programs

As someone passionate about eLearning technology, I’ve had the opportunity to thoroughly explore Reading Eggs, and I can confidently say it’s a remarkable resource for both parents and educators.

The app stands out for its engaging, interactive approach to teaching reading skills. Its intuitive design caters to children’s diverse learning styles, making it an effective tool for fostering literacy from a young age. The lessons are thoughtfully structured, progressively building on each skill in a way that’s both challenging and accessible.

What really impresses me is how Reading Eggs makes learning to read a fun and effective experience for kids, incorporating games, songs, and colorful animations that keep them motivated and engaged. A lot of apps lean so much into the fun side of things that they end up not being very effective, but that’s not the case here.

The app also offers excellent tracking features, allowing parents and educators to monitor progress and identify areas where a child might need additional support. I like that they send email updates when your child reaches new levels in the program, offering insights into how they’re doing.

The Reading Eggs programs are split into levels to ensure children are constantly challenged and thriving. This way encourages curiosity, growth, exploration, and the desire to learn. Reading Eggs programs have earned many awards and improved children’s academic performance and confidence.

Reading Eggs Junior (suitable for ages 2-4)

The beginning Reading Eggs program is an excellent introduction to pre-reading. The program encourages phonemic and alphabet awareness using fun games, interactive activities, and read-aloud books. In addition, the Reading Eggs Junior program is ideal for building strong pre-reading skills.

Reading Eggs (ages 3-7)

This program sets the core foundation for children to start understanding Phonics, exposes them to sight words, builds strong spelling skills, and widens their vocabulary.

Fast Phonics (ages 5-10)

The Fast Phonics program gives children everything they need to build critical and essential phonics skills.

Reading Eggspress (ages 7-13)

The Reading Eggspress program encourages and fosters a true love of reading. It teaches the true joy of reading and how to incorporate it into daily living and so much more.

Mathseeds (ages 3-9)

The Mathseeds program is a strong, academic program with a mix of strictly structured lessons, motivation, rewards, and more. In addition, it teaches core math skills that are integral to children’s success. Mathseeds is engaging and fun. Children will enjoy playing and learning without even realizing it.

How Does Reading Eggs Pricing Compare to Its Competitors?

I’ve tested a lot of different reading apps, and here are the prices of some of the other ones I feel are best:

• ABCmouse pricing – $12.99/month
• Epic pricing – $11.99/month or $79.99 annually
• Homer pricing – $12.99/mo or $79.99 annual plan
• Noggin pricing — $7.99/mo or $69.99/year
• Starfall pricing – $35/year

Reading Eggs, in comparison, offers competitive pricing that aligns well with its comprehensive, engaging content and user-friendly experience. Its cost-effectiveness is even more apparent when you factor in the depth of its curriculum and the breadth of its interactive activities.

From a personal and professional standpoint, I believe that Reading Eggs strikes a good balance between quality and affordability, making it an attractive option for parents and educators seeking a robust, engaging learning tool for their children.

Reading Eggs Cost Q&A

Does Reading Eggs offer a free trial?

Yes, Reading Eggs does offer a 30-day free trial that unlocks everything.

Can Reading Eggs be used on more than one device?

Reading Eggs can be enjoyed on a desktop browser, iOS, and Android devices. The app is award-winning and uses proven methods to teach.

How many children can be registered with one membership?

With one Reading Eggs membership, parents/caregivers can set up four children’s profiles and track each of their learning journeys.

Does a child require reading skills to use Reading Eggs?

No, not at all. Reading Eggs begins right at the start. It sets strong pillars for confident readers. Lessons are well structured and can be replayed repeatedly to further learning. The lessons match your child’s current skill level. The best part? Reading Eggs is fun, engaging, and fantastic! Children will have a simple time navigating the app and enjoy earning rewards.

Are there supplemental worksheets/books that can be purchased to extend the Reading Eggs program?

Reading Eggs offers many different workbooks to extend and enhance reading and comprehension. The Reading Eggs books can be purchased in a 10-pack in levels 1 and 2. In addition, the essential reading skills workbooks can be purchased for grades Kindergarten through grade 5. Finally, for additional math support, caregivers can purchase Essential Math Skills Workbooks for levels Kindergarten through grade 2. The Reading Eggs program is unlike any other!

What is it about Reading Eggs that children love?

There are many things about Reading Eggs that children fall in love with. It’s a simple, easy-to-use platform that has everything needed for fun. Reading Eggs offers games, music, songs, activities, read along, and an enormous library of captivating books.

Is Reading Eggs Worth It?

With Reading Eggs’ success rate, I definitely think it’s a great program for all kids ages 2-13. Personally, I’ve tried a number of different reading programs with my own kids, and Reading Eggs got some of the best results in the shortest amount of time.

The app is very accessible and affordable. It features well-structured lessons that can be watched as many times as needed, a user-friendly app, and games and activities to teach the core literacy skills needed for academic success.

Don’t forget that Reading Eggs has a 30-day free trial. The platform gives children all the tools to learn how to read and develop terrific comprehension skills. Reading Eggs is compatible with iOS, browser, and Android. It is an award-winning program that sets children up to be confident and successful readers.

Click here to learn more about Reading Eggs.

The post Reading Eggs Pricing: Plans, Free Trial Info, More (2024 Guide) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

ABCmouse’s fun, gamified curriculum was designed in collaboration with experts in the early childhood education field, and I can tell you firsthand, every kid I’ve seen who tries ABCmouse is immediately hooked. It’s a great tool for parents with busy preschoolers at home and is trusted by countless teachers for in-class learning as well. In fact,  of over 14,000 young children found that using ABCmouse helped close educational gaps between peers, improve learning motivation, and increase overall educational outcomes.

The guide below takes a detailed look into ABCmouse’s pricing and payment terms in 2024. It will give all the info you require to decide which membership plan (if any) is best for you. It’s also worth noting that ABCmouse offers a one-month free trial for new customers if you want to check it out before paying.

How Much Does ABCmouse Cost?

ABCmouse currently offers two different payment plans for their educational program, making it as accessible as possible for all budgets. Plans include an Annual Membership at $59.99 (often on sale for as little as $45) and a Monthly Plan at $12.99 a month. All plans automatically renew at the end of their term unless you cancel it.

In the past, ABCmouse has also offered a Short-Term Plan at 2 payments of $29.99 (one payment every 6 months), but at the time of this article’s publication, that plan is no longer available.

The biggest savings come with the Annual Plan where you can save 60% off the regular price and have access to an ABCmouse account for an entire year.

It’s also worth noting that if you’re a qualifying teacher in a school, you can get an ABCmouse membership for free to use on site in your classroom. As stated on the website, “Free teacher accounts are for individual teachers and educators of public schools, private schools, and Head Start programs in the U.S. and Canada and are to be used for classroom and in-school purposes only. Homeschooling and all other uses do not qualify.”

The only difference between the plans is simply the payment terms. In addition, some of the payment plans offer savings. All that is required to access ABCmouse is a membership.

ABCmouse also offers a 30-day free trial for new members where you can test out the app at no cost for one month.

Check out the key features and prices in the table below and continue reading to learn more details about ABCmouse’s subscription options.

	Monthly – $12.99 per month	Annual Subscription – One payment of $59.99/year, save up to 60%
Access to award-winning and curriculum from education experts
Age-appropriate learning that always engages and entertains children
Access to more than 10,000 learning activities
Ad-free
Parental Controls and insight

You may find other savings opportunities throughout the year, such as Black Friday and Cyber Monday.

Curious how this stacks up to the HOMER app? Check out our HOMER pricing guide.

ABCmouse Key Features

As detailed in our ABCMouse review, the benefits the app offers are enormous.

With an ABCmouse membership, little learners have access to a broad range of learning all in one place.

In addition, ABCmouse is a safe online learning platform for children and does not have any advertisements at all.

A unique feature of ABCmouse is that the child makes their own unique avatar. This can be a very entertaining experience for children filled with laughter.

Their avatar then works through a classroom-like setting down a personalized learning path tailored to their academic needs and interest. This makes it easy to track your child’s progress as they go down the path.

Another cool thing I’ve noticed is that ABCmouse keeps its’ platform up to date and you’ll often find Holiday decorations throughout the season or pumpkins at Halloween. This is a great way to keep children engaged in the world and understand calendars and timelines.

ABCmouse is great for many learning styles as well.

It is bright, musical, bold, and clearly explains the steps to children. Learning takes place through fun games and interactive opportunities, making it exciting for kids.

I like that ABCmouse is divided into leveled learning. Each time a new level is unlocked, the child has access to new games and activities. Children are always learning with ABCmouse, and more importantly, they’re having fun while doing it.

In my experience letting multiple kids test it out, ABCmouse is easy to navigate, even for children. It’s a great tool to use to practice independence. Children use their avatars to complete activities and earn tickets. Their tickets are then used to purchase things for their virtual room. Don’t worry though. There is not ever real money involved.

Who is ABCmouse Best Suited For?

ABCmouse is a fantastic learning platform for kids ages 2-8. There are many educational games and activities at appropriate levels to encourage and continue enriching learning for this age group.

How does ABCmouse pricing compare to its competitors?

Here are some competitors of ABCmouse with their price ranges:

• Epic pricing – $11.99/month or $79.99 annually
• Homer pricing – $12.99/mo or $79.99 annual plan
• Noggin pricing — $7.99/mo or $69.99/year
• Reading Eggs pricing – $9.99/mo or $69.99/year
• Starfall pricing – $35/year

As someone who’s tested dozens of learning apps, I found that the cost of Epic is basically on par with most other popular kids educational apps.

ABCmouse Pricing FAQ

Does ABCmouse offer a free trial?

ABCmouse offers a one-month free trial for new customers. Your child will have access to everything ABCmouse offers during the trial.

How many learning activities are on ABCmouse?

ABCmouse has over 2,000 printables, more than 450 lesson plans, and over 10,000 engaging educational games and activities. There isn’t a chance for children to get bored with ABCmouse!

How many children can register with one membership?

You can register up to 3 children per account with ABCmouse. Each child has their own avatar and the parent can obtain academic insights into each one. Users can access their ABCMouse work across all different devices they’re logged into.

What kind of activities can be expected on ABCmouse?

You can expect a huge variety of activities. ABCmouse never wants children to be bored of learning! Some examples of activities are:

• Puzzles
• Dot to dots
• Paint by number
• Tracing
• Coloring pages
• Readalong books
• Learning videos
• Writing activities
• Songs
• And much more!

What academic subjects does ABCmouse cover?

ABCmouse tries to cover everything children need while keeping it interesting, vibrant, and engaging. Some subjects the platform covers are:

• Reading
• Writing
• Math
• Colors
• Shapes
• Art
• Music
• And more!

Do teachers get a discount on ABCmouse?

Yes, qualifying teachers at public, private, and Head Start schools in the US & Canada can get ABCmouse for free as long as it’s used on site in their classrooms. Homeschool educators do not qualify for this discount.

Is ABCmouse free with Amazon Prime?

No, ABCmouse isn’t free for Amazon Prime members.

Is ABCmouse Worth It?

I definitely think ABCmouse is worth it, especially if you opt for the savings of the Annual Plan. At just $60 for a yearly subscription (often on sale for $45 many times throughout the year), the cost of ABCmouse is definitely a fair value for all of its educational value. I will say, the month-to-month price is a bit steep at $12.99, so I’d definitely stick with the annual subscription as it’s by far the best value.

ABCmouse helps children learn and maintain interest in learning by making it fun and engaging. It’s a great way to promote independent learning and easy for parents to stay on top of childrens’ progress.

In addition, ABCmouse offers multiple payment plans and an outstanding customer support team!

Interested in trying something else? There are some ABCmouse alternatives out there that also offer some good features and value.

Click here to get started with ABCmouse.

Have questions about ABCmouse pricing? Comment below to let us know!

The post ABCmouse Pricing: Plans, Free Trial Info, & More (2024 Guide) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Whether you’re introducing eLearning into your institution or kickstarting a personal eLearning project, the key to success lies in a solid, high-level plan.

In this article, I’m excited to share with you a practical eLearning implementation plan checklist drawn from my own experiences. These steps aren’t just theoretical, they’re tried and tested in the real world of online education. I’ll explore the essential challenges and strategies to consider, ensuring you’re equipped to embrace the vibrant and ever-evolving landscape of eLearning.

eLearning Implementation Plan Tips

Step 1. Define your objectives

The first step to creating an eLearning implementation is asking yourself why you think eLearning is a great option for your particular environment. Are you reaching out to a wider audience? Or improving knowledge retention with engaging interactive materials?

Web-based training totally makes sense but this sense is different to different instructors, audiences and institutions. If you are introducing eLearning into an organization or bringing innovations into a traditional school, see to it that every department and stakeholder is on the same page with your concept and vision.

Faculty may disagree with your goals, so you’ll have to go the extra mile ‘selling’ your idea to a pretty tough buyer.

Corporate environments may be even more reluctant to change since training needs vary widely across an average company. Indeed, Accounting, Human Resources and IT usually end up having opposite views of the learning and knowledge transfer processes.

It’s your job to harmonize and orchestrate different outlooks and business directions to ensure a smooth kickoff.

Tip! Make sure you as instructional designer and your colleagues/peers understand how they benefit from the new learning model.

Checkpoints:

• Are you planning to switch to pure web-based teaching or considering blended options?
• How do you expect to boost recall and retention using eLearning?
• Is your audience ready for the change? Do they have the right tech infrastructure?
• Is your faculty okay with the initiative? Are they showing any active support?

Step 2. What’s your scope?

Now that you know why eLearning is better than brick and mortar in your particular case, it’s time to define the scope of your new ecosystem. How far are you taking web-based instruction in your curriculum? Don’t try to overdeliver on day one. You can’t just wave a magic wand and automate routine tasks such as grading – or turn paper lectures into beautifully crafted digital content – overnight.

Tip! Start small and expand your scope as you advance technically.

Checkpoints:

• Are you planning to automate assessment?
• Will you employ old and new tools concurrently on the primary stages?
• What educational units are you thinking of? Entire courses, particular lessons, practical jobs, seminars?
• Will online exams be equivalent to offline exams and credits?

Step 3. Choose the right software

Sadly, one-size-fits-all never works in this field, so you should start mining for your eLearning software as soon as you can, and make compromises since nothing is perfect. Some lunatics like myself keep on digging for their entire lives.

Anyway, go through the list of major authoring programs like Lectora, Articulate or Captivate, then look into the second echelon and try compiling one or two mini-courses before you settle down. Never trust your first impression – the notions of easy and sophisticated, user friendly and cluttered, basic and feature-loaded get very blurry here.

Tip! Jot down your key requirements and expectations of a decent content delivery platform. Add the budget. See what matches your criteria.

Checkpoints:

• How do you plan to publish the courses? Does the software in question support SCORM or xAPI?
• Are you going to keep things plain, or are you after the bells and whistles modern software can offer?
• Are you wary of a steep learning curve? How much time do you have to get started?
• Is mobile support one of the prerequisites? Will your audience be using their smartphones and tablets to go through your content?

Step 4. Do quality assurance

Once the course is shaped and poised for delivery, ensure there are no glitches that could pop up when you least expect. Play and replay your embedded videos, check wording, grammar and spelling. (Yes, spellcheckers may be disgustingly negligent.) Ask your friends, family or a select group of students for their judgment and fix detected inconsistencies before going live.

Tip! When converting your deck into other formats (video, PDF, LMS packages, etc.), bear in mind that some effects and transitions may be lost. Confirm the limitations with your software provider in advance before jeopardizing critical data.

Checkpoints:

• Are your ideas conveyed in a concise and clear fashion?
• Is there any misleading jargon or ‘gotcha’ questions?
• Does the content play well on all required devices?
• Is there an excess of multimedia or other data-intensive content?

Step 5. Do your marketing or end up alone

Everything is fine-tuned and off to a great start, or so it seems. However, keep in mind that students will not necessarily sign up for your course just because it’s well-built and useful. You need to raise awareness of the content, keep your target audience nurtured with updates and onboarding information, and stay social and in permanent contact with the learners.

Of course, students may just have to take your class to get credit if that’s how it works in your system – and this is perfectly fine. Otherwise, you may need to do extra research, marketing and even advertising to recruit more participants to your educational program.

Tip! Use collaboration tools in your e-Learning software and/or maintain visibility in social networks to show there is a personality behind the facts, figures and slides.

Checkpoints:

• How do your learners get to know about the course?
• Do you send out any newsletters, reminders or personal invitations?
• Do you place ads and announcements in the right place where your target audience can see them?
• Do you keep in touch with your ‘alumni’ and provide timely responses to their queries?

Final Thoughts

It’s clear that implementing an eLearning program involves careful planning and consideration. The journey, while challenging, is incredibly rewarding, and the steps outlined in this article are among the most effective strategies I’ve honed during my years in the eLearning industry. They are designed to guide you through the complexities of eLearning implementation, ensuring a smooth and successful integration into your educational framework.

If you have any additional tips from your experiences or questions about creating an eLearning implementation plan, please share them in the comments.

The post 5 Steps for an Effective eLearning Implementation Plan appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Over the years, I’ve developed a toolkit of strategies and approaches, yet I’ve found that certain foundational elements are essential in crafting high-quality eLearning content. These elements are the cornerstones of effective eLearning, regardless of the subject matter or audience.

In this article, I’ll share these key fundamentals, drawing from my extensive experience in the field, to guide you in creating successful eLearning courses.

5 Features to Consider When Building an eLearning Course

1. Navigation

Over the years, I’ve come to understand the importance of viewing your course not just as a live instructional tool but also as a valuable reference resource. To achieve this dual purpose, it’s crucial to incorporate user-friendly navigation within your course. This means integrating menus, links, and pathways that allow learners to either follow the course linearly or navigate freely to revisit sections for better comprehension.

When designing your course’s navigation, consider the following key questions to ensure clarity and ease of use:

• Logical Structure: Are the concepts and ideas presented in a logical sequence that facilitates understanding?
• Review Accessibility: Have you provided backlinks or other means for learners to easily review previous content?
• Clarity of Navigation Aids: Are your navigation tools, such as infographics or menus, intuitive and easy to understand?
• Multimedia Accessibility: Have you included captions for all multimedia elements to enhance understanding and accessibility?
• Descriptive Elements: For all non-textual elements, have you provided descriptive text to ensure that all learners, regardless of their learning style or potential disabilities, can access the information?

Remember, the goal is to create a course that is not only informative but also navigable and accessible, allowing learners to engage with the content in the most effective way possible.

2. Multimedia

Every time you ask for instructional design tips on the web, all you hear about video is pure praise. There are so many ways instructional designers can use video effectively.

Indeed, a picture is worth a thousand words, and text-based content is becoming boring. Yet you always need to understand the goals of embedding a video into your course and the expected outcome.

Needless to say, multimedia is a great way to bring home your key points in an engaging manner. Depending on the objectives, you may want to give your material a professional ‘academic’ look and feel, or keep it informal and lively to motivate a younger audience.

For a comprehensive user experience, try a mix of media elements in the right proportion and see how it works for your learners.

Audio narrations can be used as the baseline method of content delivery, or as excerpts and quotations to highlight a specific point. The role of animations is hard to overestimate – it’s one of the best options to illustrate processes and logical sequences in a multitude of educational and business disciplines. Naturally, your course will look lifeless without relevant photos, imagery and diagrams, so make sure you throw a little bit of everything into the mix.

Check a few important things before you publish the course:

• Are all your pictures/videos legally owned?
• Is it still easy to play your content on an average PC/mobile device, given the volume of multimedia content involved?
• Are your multimedia items of good quality? Do they match each other by dimensions and definition?
• Are you sure the audio and video can be managed by the learner, i.e. paused, muted, etc.?
• Can the viewer speed up the video playback if they wish?

3. Interactions

Capture your learners’ attention by introducing interactions. Modern authoring tools provide a plethora of options in this field, including live characters, animations, social elements and even games.

“Live” human characters are just fun. They help to emphasize the key concepts and add a certain undertone to your narrative, based on their personal patterns and voices. Make sure your course goes hand in hand with the latest trends and sync up the material with social networks. Provide links to Facebook, LinkedIn, Twitter, etc. so your content can go viral. Flash animations are easy to implement and extremely efficient – this is true for various ages and learner groups. Unravelling your mysteries in animated form is a witty way for your course to pick up good karma.

Some creators will probably frown at this, but games are also a great eLearning motivator. Hot stuff to include in your training material, games not only entertain but help the students understand key objectives, roles and structures associated with your particular field of studies. I absolutely love gamification in eLearning.

My personal checklist on interactions:

• Are the animations in line with your general style?
• Is the chosen live character suitable for the audience you are addressing?
• Does each interactive element have an easy-to-formulate objective? If not, don’t hesitate to wipe out the redundant bells and whistles.

4. Tests and Assessments

Intersperse your course with quick tests to measure the audience’s performance and see if you are heading the right way. Authoring tools and online quiz makers allow you to use versatile question types such as true/false, multiple choice, fill the blank, drag and drop, essay, etc. By way of formative assessment, you may throw in short quizzes in the middle of your course and gauge interim results. For knowledge summaries, add a slide or two at the end of the material.

Before you move on to some other course module, check if everything is right:

• Are the tests coherent with the layout?
• Are all questions clear and logical?
• Do you have you have robust assessment metrics in mind?
• Do the quizzes include familiar subjects only, or go beyond the studied agenda?
• Is it easy to provide feedback on the course?

5. Tracking

Though not part of the course itself, tracking is of utmost importance to instructional designers. Sending your message into a black box just won’t fly. You need meaningful insights into your course performance, and the more criteria the better. Picking up on certain learner behaviors and defining obscure notions and bottlenecks in your narrative, you can eventually target the content to specific student groups and foresee and cater to their particular needs.

See to it that you have the right data handy:

• What’s the share of learners who completed the course?
• How did they respond to triggers and animations, what was the hit ratio?
• What time did it take the students to go through this eLearning material? Are they progressing at a comfortable pace?

Final Thoughts

Creating an eLearning course involves a ton of different considerations, and over my extensive time in the field, I’ve learned that while the process can be complex, certain strategies consistently stand out for their effectiveness. The tips shared in this article are among the most impactful I’ve discovered in my career, each playing a crucial role in developing successful eLearning content.

Remember, the journey of creating an engaging and effective eLearning course is an evolving one, and these tips are just the starting point. There’s always more to learn and new techniques to explore. I encourage you to share your own experiences and strategies in the comments below.

If you have any questions or additional tips that have worked for you, please feel free to contribute to the conversation by commenting below.

The post 5 Basic Elements Every eLearning Course Must Have appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As someone with nearly two decades in instructional design, these stats paint a vivid picture of how deeply integrated LMS has become in the fabric of contemporary education.

Below, I’m going to explore this topic from a balanced and experienced perspective. I’ll talk all about the pros and cons, examining how colleges functioned before the digital era and whether LMS adoption is now a critical component in education.

Objectives are key

A key part of any eLearning implementation plan is having a clear objective.

What are your goals for using an LMS? Managing syllabus and homework? Blended learning? Pure online learning? Answer these questions honestly and you’ll probably know if an  LMS is a good fit for your needs.

Some might argue expense is a critical factor to consider. Well, it’s not. It’s all about creating an ecosystem accepted by teachers, students, administration, technical staff and other stakeholders. Everyone is supposed to use the LMS as a lifestyle or at least as a feasible convention.

Apparently, higher education faculty will be more inclined to try online courses or blended learning when they do have an LMS in place. Is it a cure-all? Probably not. The question is, how much are the teachers willing to delegate to technology? Needless to say, every college has its opinion-makers, so there is hardly a comprehensive solution for the entire field.

Good for simple assessments, good for big institutions

eLearning is a fantastic tool, but like anything, it has its limitations. Take assessments, for example. In my years of designing eLearning courses, I’ve noticed they often rely heavily on multiple-choice questions, missing out on the diverse testing techniques we use in traditional classrooms. You’re often left with a choice: settle for this standard format or invest in costly customizations to tailor the experience.

Combining LMS-based courses with in-person sessions, however, strikes a balance that’s both efficient and cost-effective. It’s a blend I’ve seen work wonders in terms of enhancing learning outcomes.

Speaking of cost-effectiveness, it’s crucial for an LMS to onboard a sufficient number of users to make the investment worthwhile. This is especially true in larger institutions, where the administrative workload can increase significantly. It’s not just about setting up the system, it involves integrating it with existing databases, updating student IDs, and keeping track of new enrollments and dropouts.

From an organizational standpoint, this can be quite a task. Each college needs to weigh whether the benefits of an LMS justify this effort. In my experience, while some institutions find it a valuable addition, others may opt for different approaches. It’s a decision that requires careful consideration of both the educational and administrative aspects.

Need authoring, performance, and attendance tracking? Get an LMS

A learning management system includes three core features:

• Online course delivery
• Tracking of students’ individual accomplishments
• Attendance tracking, course popularity evaluation.

So, basically, it all boils down to three key benefits:

• Convenient publishing and management of e-Learning materials, live interaction between students and educators
• Granular statistics on performance and instant feedback
• Running a college with minimal administrative overhead and bureaucracy.

That’s roughly the main idea and the essence of the subject. Is your college ready to jump on the bandwagon? Three checks out of three mean it might be on the right track.

Great option for tech-savvy schools

LMSs support teachers in managing tasks, creating engaging courses, implementing gamification elements, and much more.

However, as with any sophisticated solution, it needs constant professional care. A weak technological infrastructure may be an unsurpassable barrier for introducing a learning management system. Another looming danger is students’ attitude. Even in higher education, teachers still need to disassociate computers and web-based courses with pure entertainment.

Final Thoughts

The decision to implement an LMS in a college setting is multifaceted, balancing educational benefits with logistical considerations. From my years as an instructional designer, I’ve seen how eLearning, particularly when integrated with traditional classroom methods, can really enhance the learning experience. But it’s still important to acknowledge the challenges, especially in terms of the administrative effort and cost involved in adopting and maintaining an LMS.

Each institution must weigh these factors against its specific needs and capabilities. While an LMS can offer streamlined, scalable, and diverse learning opportunities, it also demands a substantial commitment to setup and ongoing management.

As we move forward in the ever-evolving landscape of education, it’s crucial for colleges to continually assess and adapt their teaching methods to best serve their students. Whether an LMS is part of that equation will depend on a variety of factors, unique to each educational environment.

The post Should Every College Use a Learning Management System? appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As someone with an extensive background in the eLearning industry, I’ve spent countless hours tearing apart instructional design portfolios to understand what makes them tick, click, and stick in the minds of those who see them.

In the article below, I’ll share everything you need to know to build a killer instructional design portfolio that gets noticed and gives you the best chance possible of landing your dream job. And if you need inspiration on how to create your own, I’ve also pulled together a collection of great ID portfolio examples and ideas from other pros working in the industry right now in 2024.

If you’re new to the field and need a little help finding your way, I also highly recommend downloading your free copy of An Instructional Designer’s Notebook from our friends at iSpring as it’s a great companion to this guide for those starting a career in ID.

An Instructional Designer's Notebook

Instructional Designer’s Notebook is a free collection of the most useful guides on becoming an instructional designer and creating eLearning content to facilitate every step on your eLearning trajectory. It includes lists of ebooks, YouTube channels, blogs, tips from top experts, interactive checklists, and more.

Free Download

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Examples of Great Instructional Design Portfolios

Here are a few picks from tons of instructors’ websites I found. With these examples below, I’m trying to demonstrate a multitude of styles, layouts, and approaches to building instructional design portfolios.

1. Lila Azouz →

The thing I really like about this portfolio is that all projects are conveniently grouped and labeled, drawing the line between eLearning projects, games, performance interventions, and evaluations. This instructional design portfolio includes password-protected content available upon request. Viewers have access to additional resources in PDF nicely placed under the description.

2. Corinne Fisketjon →

This is a great example of a simpler minimalistic layout, though neatly structured and logical. The content is split into multiple categories for better navigation. Embedded multimedia works fine with no broken links or outdated scripts.

3. Jackie Van Nice →

Jackie’s website is a classy representation of an eLearning professional. Every case includes the following elements: project background, course features, published sample, solution, and role description. Another thing I like is that the site employs a cloud of tags to make searching for specific topics easier.

4. Christy Tucker →

This is a well-written practical eLearning portfolio featuring this expert’s stand-outs since 2004. A simple and clear WordPress layout ensures easy reading and neatly integrated multimedia. The content is granularly organized, with large thumbnails to give you a basic idea of the contents.

5. Michael Zielinskie →

This is a really clean, easy-to-navigate instructional designer portfolio that showcases Mike’s work. It also showcases a good variety of projects to give visitors a solid overview of his capabilities.

6. Beth Myers →

Beth’s website and portfolio are a whole lot of fun. Because she’s both a game developer and learning products designer, she gave her website a video game aesthetic that’s really unique and memorable. Additionally, her portfolio page doesn’t just have pictures/screenshots of her work, it often also includes good descriptions and context to better explain the project.

7. Shalini Mathias →

This portfolio was performed in Prezi, a visual non-linear presentation service. It’s a great way to showcase one’s experience as a multi-dimensional story with a wealth of user-friendly tools. Prezi maps all key accomplishments and projects of interest, preserving timeline and logical ties. A format well worthy of attention!

8. Britt Arechiga →

A collection of eLearning courses, storyboards, and videos, this portfolio provides a smooth browsing experience and quick access to the projects. Some works are presented as screenshots, others are packed into multimedia formats. The author uses Dropbox as cloud storage.

9. Tom Washam →

This gallery features categories for the different types of instructional design work Tom has done, like Gamification, Explainer Videos, and basic eLearning. All  of thecase studies provide a project description, customer name, and details on the technology used which can be very useful information for a potential employer. More information is available in .swf format.

10. Chris Friend →

This is another ID portfolio that is both clean and includes great descriptive content. Chris does a really excellent job of showcasing his instructional designer skills across a diverse range of projects.

11. Candice Bowes →

While this is a no-frills portfolio that’s not necessarily visually stunning, it does a good job of quickly providing access to projects in PDF and PowerPoint format. Simple, clear, and to the point.

12. Jackie Throngard →

Jackie’s page displays samples of instructional designs developed for a host of educational, business, and non-profit organizations. Remember, showing diversity in who you’ve worked for and the kinds of projects you’ve done can go a long way to helping you get more jobs. The formula here is a basic test description plus a PDF to learn more. At the bottom of the page, you can find the author’s latest publications, separate CVs for academia and business, as well as links to social networks.

13. Ginger Nichols →

Ginger’s portfolio is a mix of eLearning, instructor-led training, job aids, etc. What’s peculiar in this project gallery is a category dubbed “Clicky-clicky bling-bling” where the author places experimental and incomplete jobs. For all projects, Ginger indicates the date and the technology used. The full content opens up as HTML5. Some case studies are password-protected for confidentiality purposes.

14. Chad L Smith →

When you land on this site, you’ll quickly learn about Smith’s many roles: education specialist, freelance designer, instructional designer, and curriculum developer. There’s also an instructional designer resume front and center that summarizes his experience and educational background. The portfolio includes examples and excerpts of learning objects that Smith has developed and references from colleagues. The unique feature of this site is that each time viewers click on an image to view a sample, they are taken back to Smith’s introduction, then they must scroll down to see the samples.

15. Stellar Instructional Design →

This portfolio is well organized and has some well-designed thumbnails that catch the eye and guide the visitor to the types of projects they want to see.

16. Stylelearn.com →

Clicking on this site brings a different result than some other portfolio sites. The site doesn’t appear at first to be a portfolio. The “about” tab takes the viewer to information about Alexander Salas, a designer with experience in the healthcare and IT industries. The home page features a learning game, a demo, and a training course that viewers can experience. The “sample” tab leads to several short demos created in Articulate Storyline and Rise. The demos are colorful, interactive, and a good representation of the designer’s skills.

17. Dr. Jennifer Lynn Wagner →

While this instructional design portfolio is pretty simple and plain, it gets the job done. I particularly like the category buttons at the top you can click to take you to specific types of her work.

18. Heather Willis →

Willis’s YouTube portfolio begins with upbeat music and simple visual elements that introduce her as an instructional designer with skills in Storyline, Captivate, Camtasia, Premiere, and Edge. Willis works with animation, develops presentations, and creates videos. Here, she shares demo snippets of pieces she has created. The portfolio includes statements from clients regarding Willis’s work. The video concludes with her social media contact information.

19. Tim Slade →

Tim’s portfolio is really great. Not only does it feature some big name clients, but when you click on the projects, there are supporting videos walking you through the work and lots of useful info.

20. Andre Syzmanowicz →

Syzmanowicz shares a YouTube video portfolio that highlights a training course for healthcare professionals to help patients understand the benefits of colorectal cancer screening. The video is just over two minutes, and demonstrates how learners move through a module and assessment quiz.

21. Liberate eLearning →

This portfolio is a virtual tour of the eLearning resources developed by Liberate eLearning. Set to music, the portfolio is fast-moving and technically savvy. It’s evident that this custom eLearning developer has performed work for all types of companies, including major corporations. Interested parties can visit the company’s website for more information.

22. The EduTechDiva →

Tonya V. Thomas’s Eductech Diva website describes her work in several areas, including educational technology, design, project management, and multimedia communication. Thomas’s portfolio includes a collection of work samples where the viewer can click on links to see interactive presentations.

23. The University of Hawaii →

This is how colleges display their distance learning programs and course portfolios. All programs feature an instructor, method of delivery, and description. No frills, pure information. If I had one complaint, it’s that the loading time of this portfolio is pretty slow and could definitely be improved.

24. Hemeon Learning Inc. →

Just a bunch of sample screenshots. However, this portfolio page has a disclaimer: more information will be available after registration. The projects here fall into the following categories: Health and Safety, Human Resources, Information Technology, and Policy.

Why Do I Need an Instruction Design Portfolio Site?

Your ID portfolio encompasses your past and present skills, domain knowledge, subject matter expertise, educational background, and more. It also gives your peers, employers, and students a glimpse of your creative process, methodology, teaching techniques, and past instructional design projects.

By presenting your experience in a structured, tangible fashion, you get an edge over potential competitors who don’t have a portfolio, allowing you to stand out to potential employers.

Portfolios make a recruiter’s job so much easier and provide a great shortcut to landing an interview with a hiring manager, helping you bypass ordinary selection filters. Having quality samples of your eLearning courses and academic work will catch an employer’s eye. Plus, potential clients may get a sneak peek into your pricing and terms.

That said, one of the common issues associated with portfolios is non-disclosure.

Sometimes, you have no right to share your accomplishments in proprietary work with the community at large or third-party organizations in particular. Try to find a workaround and describe a project from the perspective of your personal input, without dropping names or giving away classified information.

A well-made eLearning portfolio can also be an opportunity to show off your soft skills and personality to potential clients and employers. Don’t hesitate to throw in lively details, or an appropriate story regarding a specific instructional challenge. A personal slant will help you build a rapport with a broad audience and let people see the real author behind the courses.

Instructional Designer Portfolio Checklist

Here are some things you’ll want to make sure to include in your own portfolio:

• Clean design. Although this may not directly define you as an Instructional Designer, the look and feel of the portfolio page makes a crucial impression on your viewers. Elegant imagery and a smart layout will surely earn you a few extra points.
• Content diversity. Make sure you showcase versatile courses ranging widely by content, style, approach, year of publication, etc. Having a diverse portfolio highlights that you have a wide range of instructional design skills that make you well-suited to all types of jobs.
• Clear descriptions. You want to showcase your instructional design process and methodology and guide the viewer from challenges and requirements through the solution and up to business/academic impact.
• Employed tools/software. Don’t forget to mention your favorite eLearning tools, LMS, and authoring software to give the portfolio a professional flavor.
• Project roles and positions. Talk about your specific responsibilities within every project, and accentuate your personal input.
• Confidentiality and IP. Make sure that you’re not breaching any NDAs or confidentiality policies when you share a project in your portfolio. By the same token, protect your own intellectual property from misuse – provide screenshots or safe links rather than original files.
• Academic/business paper samples. Supplement your portfolio with examples of your writing. This can be scripts, papers, publications, etc.
• Personal details. Your mission, interests, and hobbies are an integral part of your professional brand.

Basic Tips for Creating Your eLearning Portfolio

Here are some simple tips to guide you as you create a portfolio:

1. When sharing your experience as an Instructional Designer, focus on the practical value of your activities, as well as your capabilities for problem-solving and executing complex projects from scratch. Go beyond your skills as a course author and throw strategy into the mix, matching employers’ potential needs with your battle-hardened optimization scenarios.
2. A perfect portfolio shows your prime accomplishments and the links between them – not the whole story with all its ups and downs. Choose carefully, and see if the projects on the list still comply with your active skillset.
3. The target audience is another aspect worthy of consideration. You may need to come up with a couple or more portfolios to cater to different verticals. Is this a traditional school project or an eLearning design opportunity that you have in mind? Do you need to highlight your business coaching activities? Factor this in for your portfolio.
4. If you are thinking of a platform for deploying a personal website, try WordPress. It’s a market-tested engine used by millions of people, so you can’t go wrong. WordPress encompasses a host of free and paid plugins for every taste and budget, with decent customization options. Check out this nice guide to building up a WordPress site.
5. Last but not least, always keep it up to date. Make regular updates to the description and review the portfolio based on new experiences, certificates, or challenges. Besides, educational technology evolves all the time, so you don’t want to appear out of touch by mentioning obsolete tools.

Crafting an instructional design portfolio may take up a good deal of time, but it pays off well in the long run, helping you land better jobs and grow your salary.

Mistakes to Avoid When Making Your ID Portfolio

Before we get into the step-by-step process of creating a portfolio, I want to address the stuff that often gets swept under the rug but needs to be front and center – the common blunders in crafting an instructional design portfolio. While some of the best lessons are learned by making mistakes, let me help save you some heartache by talking about some of the most common pitfalls that can turn a rockstar portfolio into a rookie one.

Overloading the Portfolio

The Mistake: Throwing in everything but the kitchen sink. Every project, every course, every tiny interaction you’ve ever designed.

The Fix: Curate, curate, curate! Choose projects that showcase your range, your expertise, and your design philosophy. Your portfolio is your art gallery – let’s keep it sleek, selective, and stunning.

Neglecting User Experience

The Mistake: Getting so wrapped up in showcasing your projects that you forget about the journey you’re taking your viewer on.

The Fix: Design for the viewer. Easy navigation, quick loading times, and a clean, intuitive layout are key. Make sure they can glide through your portfolio with zero friction and 100% immersion in your work.

Failing to Demonstrate Expertise

The Mistake: Showcasing final products without peeling back the curtain on your process, your role, and your impact.

The Fix: For each project, weave a narrative. What was the challenge? How did you tackle it? What was your role, and what were the results? Show them the wizard behind the curtain, revealing not just the what, but the how and why.

Ignoring Visual Appeal

The Mistake: Underestimating the power of aesthetics, resulting in a portfolio that might be rich in content but lacks in visual charm.

The Fix: Your portfolio is a visual representation of you. Employ a cohesive color scheme, use high-quality images, and ensure that every visual element aligns with your personal brand. Make it a feast for the eyes, not just the mind.

5 Steps for Creating Your Own Instructional Design Portfolio

Your portfolio website is the most crucial project you’ll work on. It’s your first impression, and it can determine whether potential clients or employers stay to look at your projects or leave your site. Your site needs to be outstanding, engaging, and unforgettable to succeed.

There are a lot of ready-to-go website constructors like Wix and Weebly. However, I do not recommend you use them, because they will limit your capabilities. The problem is that you cannot embed your online courses into the website via HTML5 using such constructors, and there is no point in your portfolio without “live” samples.

So what can you do?

I recommend building your portfolio with WordPress – the full-powered CMS (Content Management System).

One of WordPress’ greatest strengths is that it is easy to use and doesn’t require prior training to set it up.

You can easily add your HTML5 code to embed your courses via WordPress plug-ins. Your website with WordPress is based on your hosting, so you don’t need any other payments to maintain your website. By the way, my blog is also built on WordPress.

Here are the steps to create a great portfolio website using WordPress:

1. Create a domain. A domain is your website name, so choose it wisely. It is better (and simpler) to use your real name as the domain.
2. Choose the right hosting. You need hosting to store data on your website, so it is an essential part of your portfolio site. As for me, I highly recommend Bluehost. You can easily check your domain name on their website. You don’t even need to link a domain and hosting manually – Bluehost takes care of it for you.
3. Perform a one-click WordPress setup on your website. Again, Bluehost makes installing and setting up WordPress super fast and easy.
4. Select a WordPress theme. It will define what your website will look like. You can use free themes or make your custom theme on your own but this is a time-consuming process. Choose one of the beautiful and not quite expensive ready-made themes that WordPress offers. A portfolio website should have a modern and stylish look, so choose the right theme that works best for you. Click here to select the ready-to-go theme.
5. Install and activate a plug-in for embedding your course to your portfolio website.  A good course plugin will feature an easy-to-use interface for managing and embedding your course content within minutes. See the guide on how to do this here.

Now all that’s left is adding your courses, their descriptions, and your bio. Well, now you are all set. Congrats!

Remember, a strong portfolio website can go a long way toward promoting your skills and expertise to potential clients or hiring managers. By showcasing your best work, you can demonstrate your ability to produce high-quality results for their organization. When they see your portfolio, it should inspire them to hire you for their team.

Get the Training You Need to Take Your Instructional Design Career to the Next Level

Unlock your full potential in instructional design with the Professional Certificate in Instructional Design program from Emeritus.

Gain comprehensive knowledge ranging from instructional design basics to popular theories and practical implementation strategies for online learning environments.

Whether you’re looking to start a new career in the field or just take your skills to new heights, this course is perfect for you.

Join now to take the first step toward becoming an expert in instructional design!

You can learn more about the program and request a brochure at this link.

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Final Thoughts

I’m looking forward to your nominees for the ‘truly outstanding portfolio’ award. Found a great sample? Give me a shout in the comments, and I’ll add it to the list!

If you are on the list of award-winning portfolio authors, feel free to embed this badge on your website! To do so, just copy and paste this code in an HTML editor:

<a href="https://myelearningworld.com/instructional-design-portfolio-samples/">
<img src="https://myelearningworld.com/gold-badge.png" style="max-width: 100%;"/>
</a>

Have an interview coming up for an instructional designer job? Make sure to check out our guide to the most common instructional design interview questions.

The post 24 Model Examples of an Instructional Design Portfolio (2024 Update) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

One area where people sometimes get confused is understanding how Skillshare’s pricing works, because they do change things up from time to time. Can you buy their online courses individually? Is there a monthly subscription option? Are there any free classes? As someone who’s used Skillshare for several years now, I’m here to clear things up for you.

This guide takes a detailed look at each of the plans offered by Skillshare in 2024, including their cost, key features, and free trial information. Before I start, it’s worth pointing out that Skillshare also offers a one-month free trial, so you can fully experience the platform before making any commitments.

How Much Does Skillshare Cost in 2024?

As of early 2024, the cost of a Skillshare membership is currently $167.88 per year for the annual plan (which works out to $13.99/month averaged out) or $32 a month for the new month-to-month plan

I have noticed that this price does seem to ever so slightly change from time to time. Earlier this year, Skillshare was priced just slightly lower around $165 for an annual membership, and in the past, they’ve explored different pricing options, including sometimes offering a monthly plan and other times doing away with it. At the time of this writing, the Skillshare monthly membership is once again available for the first time in the last couple years.

Skillshare Premium membership gives you:

• Unlimited access to over 25,000 Skillshare courses in a wide range of categories
• Access to the new Skillshare Live Sessions 
• Access to the student community where you can engage in discussions with other students taking the courses you’re taking
• Download Skillshare classes for offline viewing (currently only available on tablets and phones, not available on desktops)
• Earn Badges and Class Certificates for completing classes
• Gain hands-on expertise with class projects
• Enjoy Learning Paths with curated series of sequential courses for building skills
• Discounts on other creative platforms, including SquareSpace and Adobe Creative Cloud.

You might be asking, “Is there a free Skillshare plan?”

Skillshare used to offer a free membership tier that included limited access to a small selection of classes. However, they got rid of the free Skillshare courses a year ago back in September 2021, and now, the only option is the annual premium membership plan.

Skillshare also has plans for teams. These plans are for businesses that want to subscribe with multiple users and other students.

You can learn more about the Skillshare Teams plan pricing in the chart below:

Skillshare Premium Membership- $167.88/year ($13.99/month) billed annually or $32 month-to-month

The Skillshare Premium membership gives learners access to thousands of classes taught by top experts and industry leaders.

Enjoy classes in a vast array of categories such as creative writing, music, photography, web design, and fine arts.

With a Skillshare membership, learners also have access to the student community and the Skillshare app.

Learners will be able to download and save classes for offline learning and enjoy each class completely ad-free. The ability to download classes really is a huge bonus here and is useful for so many situations, like when you’re traveling and don’t have internet access.

The annual Skillshare membership cost also gives the learner amazing discounts on other creative platforms such as SquareSpace and Adobe Creative Cloud.

The Skillshare annual membership does require a once-a-year payment upfront for the whole period, but it’s a great value for what you get, saving you more than 50% off the monthly price.

Key Features:

• Unlimited access to all of Skillshare’s classes
• Ad-free content
• Download courses for offline viewing
• Massive discounts for other creative programs
• Access to Skillshare’s online learning community
• Quick and simple to maneuver lesson plans
• Access to join Skillshare “Groups” to share work and learn from others
• Feedback and advice from teachers and classmates
• Easy-to-use platform

Who is the Skillshare Premium Membership Best Suited For?

The Skillshare Premium membership is best for anyone wanting to enhance or learn new or existing skills.

The annual subscription offers access to all of the classes available at Skillshare ranging in topics from freelance and entrepreneurship, marketing, creative writing, and fine arts. There is something for every learning with a Skillshare membership.

The Premium subscription gives learners access to essentially an unlimited amount of education.

Skillshare Pricing Q&A

Is there a Skillshare free trial?

Yes! Skillshare offers a free one-month trial.

Does Skillshare offer both monthly and annual payment plans?

Currently, Skillshare only offers both an annual membership and monthly plan as of early 2024. It’s worth noting that sometimes Skillshare only offers an annual plan and doesn’t give a monthly option.

Does Skillshare offer discounts?

During the holidays, you may be able to find Skillshare Black Friday or Cyber Monday deals. Our Skillshare discounts guide has more tips for saving.

What form of payment does Skillshare accept?

Skillshare accepts all major credit cards, PayPal, Apple Pay, and Google Pay for the annual subscription.

Does Skillshare have a refund policy?

Skillshare offers a refund on annual memberships if contacted within 7 days of purchase.

Can you cancel Skillshare?

Yes, canceling Skillshare is easy and you can do it at any time. Just log in to your account, go to the Payments tab, and click ‘Cancel Membership’ if you signed up through the Skillshare site. If you signed up for a Skillshare account via the Google Play or Apple Store, you’ll need to cancel through those methods.

After you cancel Skillshare, your account will remain active through the period you’ve already paid for.

What are some popular classes on Skillshare?

• Portrait Photography – Shoot and Edit Instagram-Worthy Shots
• Mastering Tik Tok – Stop Scrolling and Post Your 1st Tik Tok
• Easy Animation – Make Fun, Cute GIFS For Your Instagram
• Confidence for Creatives – 5 Exercises to Grow Your Confidence and Self-Care

How long are the classes on Skillshare?

Skillshare classes contain anywhere from 20-50 minutes of pre-recorded video.

Skillshare Pricing Compared to Other Online Learning Sites

You might be wondering how Skillshare’s membership fee compares to other popular course websites, like Masterclass or LinkedIn Learning.

Let’s take a look:

• Coursera pricing — $59 a month or $399 a year for a Coursera Plus subscription
• LinkedIn Learning pricing — $39.99 for month-to-month or $240 for an annual membership
• Masterclass pricing — $120-$240 a year, no monthly plans available
• Udemy pricing — Individual courses sell anywhere from $19.99 to $199 each

At $13.99/month for the annual plan ($167.88 billed annually) and $32 for the month-to-month offering, Skillshare pricing is a solid value when compared to other major players in the online course marketplace. The only cheaper option really is Masterclass, but it’s worth pointing out that they have far fewer classes and don’t cover nearly as many topics as you’ll find on the Skillshare platform.

Is Skillshare Worth It?

So, the big question is: Is the Skillshare price worth it?

We think so.

While Skillshare might not be the perfect fit for everyone, it’s a great fit for most people looking to learn new skills or pursue new hobbies and passions.

There are thousands of classes across just about every category imaginable, and the teachers are true experts in their field, so you know you’re getting good instruction. There are classes in art and design, acting, cinematography, business, proofreading, programming, voice over training, instructional design, Microsoft Office, web design, digital marketing, illustration, and more. Skillshare is a great alternative to Masterclass and other online course platforms.

Check out what these people have to say about it:

And don’t forget, there’s a one-month free trial, so you can always test it out before paying a cent to see if a Skillshare subscription is worth it for your situation.

Skillshare is an incredible online learning platform. It has thousands of classes perfect for creatives and entrepreneurs. Start your free month today!

Check out our Skillshare review for a deeper look at this platform.

Have any questions about Skillshare pricing or plans? Let us know by commenting below.

The post Skillshare Pricing: Plans, Free Trial Info, More (2024) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

In the guide below, I’ll give you everything you need to know about FutureLearn pricing, plans, and features so you can see if it’s the right choice for helping you reach your goals. I’ll also discuss how its pricing stacks up against other popular online learning sites.

This guide has been fully updated for 2024, so you can be confident you’re getting current, accurate info to help you make an informed decision.

What is FutureLearn?

FutureLearn is a fantastic platform offering online courses and degrees from top universities around the world. It was established in 2012 and is owned by the UK Open University.

FutureLearn is partnered with several well-known universities and colleges to provide high-quality education and superior job-related skills. They are also partnered with the British Council to increase accessibility to students in low and mid-income countries worldwide.

In addition, the massive learning platform does something different from others, offering accredited courses. So you can learn to develop a career, all from home with FutureLearn.

FutureLearn offers a variety of programs and degrees. The platform offers many free courses with the option to purchase to receive a certification.

All FutureLearn courses are created with high-quality content that helps to develop and grow industry-required skills.

FutureLearn courses vary in length of time they take to complete. Some short courses take a few weeks, while other programs span longer.

Students can choose to enroll in multiple online courses if they have the time to commit.

In addition, FutureLearn provides beautiful digital certificates upon completion of paid courses that can be used for career development, showcases on a resume or career profile.

Popular subjects on FutureLearn include:

• Business and management
• Healthcare and medicine
• Teaching
• Psychology and mental health

Regardless of whether you’re looking to deepen your knowledge, strengthen skills, or develop a new hobby, FutureLearn is the platform to do it with.

The platform has a massive range of subjects, categories, topics, and information suitable for all learners.

When students sign up for FutureLearn, the platform prompts them to create a profile. This is a great way to introduce yourself to other students as they come to your page to “meet” you.

FutureLearn is a great place to spend time digitally.

So what makes FutureLearn stand out? Continue reading to find out! We’re sharing all the details surrounding the fantastic learning platform. By the end of our guide, you’ll be ready to start learning!

Let’s get started with our FutureLearn pricing overview…

How Much Does FutureLearn Cost?

FutureLearn offers two different kinds of plans: Free Limited Access and Paid Unlimited Access.

Here’s a breakdown of the differences between them:

Limited Access (Free Plan)

Most of the online courses on FutureLearn can be studied free of charge. The platform does a great job at making high-quality education accessible regardless of socioeconomic status.

This plan gives you limited access to 1400+ short courses along with restricted access to course content (meaning you get lessons delivered weekly rather than all upfront).

However, you can’t access all of the course lessons up front to learn whenever and wherever, you won’t receive any certificates when you complete courses, and you won’t be able to access the course material again once you’ve completed the class.

Unlimited Access ($39.99 Monthly or $244.99 Annually)

The Unlimited Access plans from FutureLearn give you full access to everything the platform offers.

If you’re looking for accreditation, FutureLearn offers certificates that show you completed a course if you have an unlimited plan. You must complete a series of evaluations and score a particular mark to earn accreditation. For that reason, accreditations from FutureLearn mean something in the industry.

With an unlimited plan, you’ll also get immediate access to all course content, you can still access all course content after you’ve finished the class, and you can use the FutureLearn app so you can learn on the go.

FutureLearn’s Unlimited Access plans are available on a monthly or annual basis. The month-to-month plan will set you back $39.99 a month, while the annual plan is currently priced at $244.99 a year, working out to $20.42 a month.

FutureLearn for Business

This fantastic platform has an outlet for business needs as well.

Regardless of the size of the team, number of team members, or the business needs, FutureLearn has something.

FutureLearn works within the business’s budget and anticipated goals to create a high-quality training course specifically for that company. FutureLearn for Business is a great way to cultivate a learning culture, embrace new skills, and close/bridge skill gaps among employees.

It’s a great way to induce job excitement and establish common ground among teams.

FutureLearn for Business gives the admin access to track employees’ progress insights a team to establish and create relevant course content and courses that are broken into achievable steps that employees can fit into their days.

FutureLearn for business is best suited for companies who want to support and encourage a learning culture. It’s a great way to bridge gaps between teams and connect employees with each other. FutureLearn for business is a great choice for any size business.

Click here to learn more.

FutureLearn for Healthcare Providers

FutureLearn offers high-quality medical courses for those in the healthcare field. Courses come from highly regarded universities and colleges and support self-paced enriching learning. These courses can help to expand knowledge and even support education for the public to improve health.

Click here to learn more.

FutureLearn Cost FAQ

Are courses on FutureLearn really free?

Yes and no. Yes, you can take nearly any course free on FutureLearn. However, if you want the digital certificate and accreditation, then paying for the course is necessary. On the other hand, the free version is great for hobbyists or even to explore the platform.

What are the most popular courses on FutureLearn?

1. Data Analytics Using Python
2. Data Analytics For Business
3. Advanced Cyber Security Training
4. Software Development Fundamentals
5. Introduction To Psychology

What is FutureLearn Expert Track?

FutureLearn Expert Track is a great way to accelerate career development. It aims to help you master skills in a specific area. The Expert Track is a collection of in-depth courses, practical knowledge, and more. The length of time Expert Tracks takes to complete vary significantly between each.

What kind of courses can you enjoy on FutureLearn?

FutureLearn is a massive online learning platform. You can find all kinds of courses. There are short courses, programs, Expert Tracks, Microcredentials, and more. Whatever your learning goals are, FutureLearn is the platform to check out.

FutureLearn Pricing Compared to Other Online Learning Sites

You might be wondering how FutureLearn’s pricing compares to other popular course website.

Let’s take a look:

• Coursera—$59 a month or $399 a year for a Coursera Plus subscription
• LinkedIn Learning —$39.99 for month-to-month or $240 for an annual membership
• Udemy—Individual courses sell anywhere from $19.99 to $199 each
• Skillshare—$29 a month or about $165 annually
• Udacity—$249 a year

All in all, FutureLearn’s pricing is about on par with the other comparable online learning sites.

Is FutureLearn Worth the Cost?

FutureLearn is easy to use and perfect for all levels of learners. I personally think FutureLearn is worth it, and there are lots of different plans available to fit your budget (including free options).

FutureLearn has so many great courses with raving reviews. It’s great for hobbyists, entrepreneurs, students, and more.

Wondering how FutureLearn pricing compares to other online learning sites? Check out these guides:

• Brilliant.org pricing guide
• Coursera pricing guide
• CreativeLive pricing guide
• Domestika pricing guide
• Edureka pricing guide
• edX pricing guide
• LinkedIn Learning pricing guide
• Masterclass pricing guide
• Mindvalley pricing guide
• Nas Academy pricing guide
• Pluralsight pricing guide
• Skillshare pricing guide
• Udacity pricing guide
• Udemy pricing guide

Have any questions about FutureLearn pricing and plans? Leave us a comment below.

The post FutureLearn Pricing: Plans, Free Trial Info, More (2024 Guide) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

The reading program provides a personalized, age-appropriate experience, allowing children to choose from various genres and topics, and offers tools to help parents and educators track reading progress and provide targeted recommendations. Overall, Epic provides a fun, engaging, and educational app that can help children develop essential reading and learning skills while fostering a lifelong love for literature.

In the guide below, I’ll take an in-depth look at Epic pricing and plans, going into the features and benefits of each. I’ll also talk about how the price compares to other educational apps I’ve tested, so you can see side-by-side how it stacks up. By the end of this guide, you’ll be able to decide if the app is worth the cost.

How much does Epic cost in 2024?

Great Reading App for Kids

Epic

Want your kids to fall in love with reading? Epic includes a huge library of 40,000+ books and helps kids progress in their reading, making it fun and exciting.

Try It Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

An Epic subscription costs either $11.99 if you pay month-to-month or $79.99 for an annual plan paid upfront, which works out to $6.67 a month.

Regardless of which Epic unlimited plan you pick, you’ll get unlimited access to their complete library of 40,000+ books, audiobooks, and learning videos.

The price of Epic children’s books is one of its most attractive features. The platform offers a range of pricing options, including a free trial period, making it accessible to families and educators on a budget.

Personally, I’d opt for the annual plan since the savings are so significant and the content library is so big that I’ve found there’s plenty on the app to keep kids busy for a year or longer.

Another thing I like is that the platform offers bulk pricing options for schools and libraries, making it affordable for institutions looking to provide access to a wide range of reading materials for their students. I know of a lot of teachers who use Epic in their classrooms and have gotten good results with it.

Finally, despite the affordable price, Epic children’s books don’t compromise on quality, providing users with a vast selection of high-quality books, audiobooks, and learning videos to help children develop vital literacy and learning skills.

Overall, the pricing of Epic children’s books is an excellent value for the wealth of content and features it provides.

Key Features of Epic

• A digital library of over 40,000 books, audiobooks, and learning videos for children aged 12 and under.
• A personalized reading experience, allowing children to choose books based on their interests and reading level.
• Tools for parents and educators to track reading progress, customize reading lists, and provide targeted recommendations.
• A vast selection of high-quality books, including popular and award-winning titles.
• Resources for educators, such as lesson plans and quizzes, to support classroom instruction.
• A wide range of pricing options, including a free trial period and bulk pricing for schools and libraries.
• Accessible from all devices with an internet connection, making it convenient and flexible for families and educators.
• Multiple genres and topics to choose from, including fiction, non-fiction, STEM, and more.
• Audio support for emerging readers and those with reading difficulties.
• Engaging videos and interactive features enhance the reading experience.

Who is Epic best suited for?

Epic children’s books are best suited for children aged 12 and under and parents and educators who want to support their literacy and learning development. The platform offers various books, audiobooks, and learning videos across multiple genres and topics, making it an excellent resource for children of all interests and reading levels.

Another cool thing I found is that the personalized reading experience allows children to choose books based on their interests and reading level, keeping them engaged and motivated to read.

Parents and educators can also use Epic children’s books to track reading progress, customize reading lists, and provide targeted recommendations, making it a valuable tool for supporting academic success. Furthermore, the platform includes resources for educators, such as lesson plans and quizzes, making it an excellent option for classroom instruction.

All in all, Epic children’s books are an ideal resource for parents and educators who want to promote literacy and support children’s learning and development in a fun and engaging way.

Epic Pricing Q&A

Does Epic offer a free trial?

Yes, you can try Epic Unlimited free for 7 days to test out everything the platform has to offer at no cost!

How much does Epic cost per month?

Epic Unlimited costs $11.99/monthly or $79.99 billed annually.

Can any books be read offline?

Yes, with an Epic Unlimited membership, books can be downloaded. However, it’s critical to note that not all books can be downloaded, but most can be.

How does Epic pricing compare to its competitors?

Here are some competitors of Epic children’s books, along with their price ranges:

• ABCmouse pricing – $12.99/month
• Homer pricing – $12.99/mo or $79.99 annual plan
• Noggin pricing — $7.99/mo or $69.99/year
• Reading Eggs pricing – $9.99/mo or $69.99/year

As someone who’s tested dozens of learning apps, I found that the cost of Epic is basically on par with most other popular kids educational apps.

Is Epic worth it?

Whether Epic children’s books are worth the price depends on individual circumstances and needs.

For families and educators who prioritize literacy and learning, the platform offers a vast collection of books, audiobooks, and learning videos for children aged 12 and under. The personalized reading experience allows children to choose books based on their interests and reading level, keeping them engaged and motivated to read. It’s a fantastic tool to help kids build reading skills.

Parents and educators can also use Epic children’s books to track reading progress, customize reading lists, and provide targeted recommendations, making it a valuable tool for supporting academic success. Additionally, the platform includes resources for educators, such as lesson plans and quizzes, making it an excellent option for classroom instruction.

The pricing for Epic children’s books varies depending on the subscription level, with options for families and educators. The monthly fee for a family subscription is $7.99 per month, and the annual fee is $79.99 per year. The monthly fee for an educator subscription is $5.99 per month, and the annual fee is $59.99 per year.

Given the vast collection of books and features the platform offers, many families and educators find the price reasonable and a good value for the money.

However, the price may not be worth it for those who may not use the platform frequently or have access to other resources for children’s reading and learning. Ultimately, whether Epic children’s books are worth the price depends on individual circumstances and needs.

Click here to try Epic today!

Have any questions about Epic pricing, plans, or features? Let me know by commenting below.

Related Posts You Might Find Helpful

• Top Educational Game Apps
• Preschool Learning Apps Guide
• The Best Coding Apps for Kids
• Fun Reading Games for Kids
• The Best Math Apps for Kids
• The Best Learning Apps for Toddlers

The post Epic Pricing: Plans, Free Trial Info, & More (2024 Guide) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Noggin is more than simply learning videos for children. Instead, it’s a huge library of highly engaging videos, lessons, games, and eBooks specifically designed for ages 2-7 years old. This combination of content sets it apart from other apps I’ve tested, and it keeps kids entertained while playing with familiar characters and building their skill sets.

As someone who’s explored the app in depth, I’m going to explain all the differences between the Noggin plans, including features and prices for each plan available, in the guide below.

How Much Does Noggin Cost in 2024?

Noggin – Interactive learning with the trusted characters your kids love.

With over 1,000 educational games, videos, and activities developed by experts, Noggin offers a fun, interactive, and highly effective learning experience for kids ages 2 to 7.

Start Your Free Trial!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Noggin offers a subscription-based pricing model that varies depending on the subscription duration. Customers can choose between a monthly or an annual plan, which both give you unlimited access to the platform’s content. The monthly plan is priced at $7.99 per month, while the annual plan costs $69.99 per year, representing a fairly significant discount for customers who commit to a longer-term subscription.

Noggin also offers a 30-day free trial period for new customers, allowing them to explore the platform’s features and content at no cost for an entire month before committing to a subscription.

Additionally, subscribers can access Noggin across multiple devices, including phones, tablets, and smart TVs, making it a convenient and accessible option for families and educators.

Overall, the pricing for Noggin is competitive compared to other educational platforms I’ve reviewed, providing parents and educators with an affordable option to support their children’s learning and development.

Key Features of Noggin

• Encourages learning through play, promoting cognitive development and problem-solving skills.
• Provides a safe and age-appropriate environment for children to learn and explore.
• Offers personalized recommendations based on each child’s interests and learning preferences.
• Enhances creativity and imagination through interactive games and eBooks.
• Helps children develop social skills through positive and collaborative interactions.
• Promotes healthy screen time habits by offering educational content that is engaging and fun.
• Provides a wide range of educational content, including literacy, STEM, and social-emotional learning.
• Supports language development through interactive videos and books.
• Offers a convenient and accessible platform for parents and educators to support their children’s learning and development.
• It can help children prepare for school readiness by promoting foundational skills and knowledge in various subject areas.

Who Is Noggin Best Suited For?

Noggin best suits parents, caregivers, and educators looking to provide young children with an educational and interactive digital experience. The platform is ideal for children between the ages of 2 and 7 who are eager to learn and explore through play.

It offers a variety of content that promotes cognitive, social, and emotional development, providing a fun, safe, age-appropriate environment for children to engage in educational activities.

Additionally, Noggin’s personalized recommendations and flexible subscription plans make it a solid choice for families and educators looking to support their children’s learning and development.

Noggin Pricing Q&A

Does Noggin offer a free trial?

Yes, Noggin offers a 30-day free trial for new customers who want to try the platform before committing to a subscription. The free trial period provides users unlimited access to Noggin’s extensive library of educational content. During the trial period, users can explore interactive games, videos, and eBooks designed to promote learning through play.

In addition, the free trial allows customers to experience the platform’s features and benefits before deciding whether to subscribe, making it a great way to evaluate if Noggin is the right educational tool for their children. If customers choose to continue using Noggin after the trial period, they can subscribe to one of the platform’s affordable plans, either monthly or annually, to continue accessing the service.

What about Noggin is so fantastic for children?

Noggin is engaging for kids for several reasons.

First, the platform provides various interactive and educational games, videos, and eBooks designed to be fun and engaging for children. These activities cover a range of subject areas, including literacy, STEM, and social-emotional learning, providing children with a diverse and engaging learning experience.

Second, Noggin’s content is designed with young children in mind, focusing on age-appropriate themes, characters, and activities. This helps children to relate to the content and stay engaged throughout their learning journey.

Third, Noggin’s personalized recommendations and adaptive learning technology provide children with content tailored to their interests and learning preferences. This helps to keep children engaged and motivated as they progress through the platform’s educational activities.

Finally, Noggin’s safe and secure environment gives parents peace of mind while their children are engaged in educational activities. The platform provides a kid-friendly interface, free from advertisements or inappropriate content, ensuring children can explore and learn in a safe and supportive environment.

Will my child recognize any of the characters on Noggin?

If your child knows mainstream characters, then yes. Noggin uses Nickelodeon characters to whisk children away to a world of learning. They will solve problems with the Paw Patrol, explore with Blaze and the Monster Machines, play with Shimmer and Shine, and so much more.

How do I cancel my Noggin subscription?

To cancel your Noggin subscription, follow these steps:

1. Open a web browser and click to go to the Noggin website.
2. Sign in to your Noggin account.
3. Click on your profile picture or icon in the top right corner of the screen.
4. Select “Account” from the drop-down menu.
5. Scroll to the “Membership” section and click “Cancel Membership.”
6. Follow the prompts to confirm your cancellation.
7. Once you have confirmed the cancellation, you will receive a confirmation email from Noggin.

Please note that if you cancel your Noggin subscription before your current billing cycle ends, you will still have access to the service until the end of the cycle. After that, your subscription will be canceled, and you will no longer be charged.

Noggin Pricing Compared To Other Kids’ Learning Sites

You might wonder how a Noggin subscription stacks up compared to other websites like ABC Mouse and National Geographic for Kids.

Let’s take a look:

• ABCmouse pricing – $12.99/month
• Homer pricing – $12.99/mo or $79.99 annual plan
• Reading Eggs pricing – $9.99/mo or $69.99/year
• Starfall pricing – $35/year

With Noggin costing only $7.99 per month and offering substantial discounted savings for an annual membership, it’s one of the more affordable premium educational apps that I’ve come across.

Is Noggin Worth It?

The biggest question is always – Well, is it worth it? And when it comes to Noggin, I certainly think so.

It’s entertaining and engaging and makes learning an absolute blast for children as they learn foundational skills in math, reading, and other key subjects. Children can choose from videos, stories, and games and learn essential skills like working together, problem-solving, and more.

And – remember, Noggin offers a one-month free trial to explore the lay of the land before making any commitments. I definitely recommend taking advantage of that and seeing how your kid responds to the app before you shell out for a paid subscription.

If you still want more info before you give it a try, check out our complete Noggin review for an in-depth breakdown of everything the platform offers.

Start your 30-day free trial today!

The post Noggin Pricing: Plans, Free Trial Info, More (2024) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As someone who’s been working in the field for nearly 20 years, I’ve seen firsthand how demand and pay for ID pros has risen over time. Below, I’ll detail the average base salary, average total compensation, and other details for instructional designers in 2024.

How Much Do Instructional Designers Make?

Indeed reports that the average base salary for an instructional designer in America in 2024 is $70,656 plus a $3,000 annual bonus in some cases.

Indeed found the highest salary for instructional designers in Seattle, Washington ($75,147) followed by Denver, Colorado ($72,535), and Chicago, Illinois ($70,621).

Zip Recruiter puts the average salary for an instructional designer higher at $81,290 noting that salaries range from the low of $39,500 to the high of $133,000. The lower quarter percentile group earns an average of $62,000 annually. The higher quadrille group earns an average of $93,500 per year. This works out to be $5,167 to $7,792 per month.

Salary.com reports instructional designers make $55,883 to $70,783 with the median base salary being $62,213.

All in all, instructional designer salaries have remained fairly stable over the last few years based on my ongoing monitoring and analysis.

10 States Where Instructional Designers Earn the Most Money

Here is the list of the median salaries for instructional designers in the top 10 states/territories, showing the highest paid positions as reported by Salary.com:

1. Alaska: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $85,390
2. California: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $85,090
3. Washington, DC: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $84,690
4. New Jersey: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $84,190
5. Massachusetts: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $82,890
6. Connecticut: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $82,390
7. New York: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $81,690
8. Washington (state): Median Instructional Designer Salary: $81,390
9. Rhode Island: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $80,290
10. Delaware: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $79,990

10 States Where Instructional Designers Earn the Least Money

Here is the list of the median salaries for instructional designers, found in the lowest-paying 10 states/territories as reported by Salary.com with the lowest salary of all states shown last:

1. Arkansas: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $70,290
2. Arizona: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $70,290
3. Nebraska: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $69,890
4. New Mexico: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $69,590
5. Tennessee: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $69,190
6. Montana: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $69,090
7. Wyoming: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $67,790
8. West Virginia: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $67,490
9. Mississippi: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $66,290
10. South Dakota: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $65,190

There is about a $20,000 difference in annual pay when working as an instructional designer in the lowest-paying state of South Dakota ($65,190) as compared to the highest-paying state of Alaska ($85,390). Alaska also has a nice annual dividend benefit from the Alaska Permanent Fund that pays each of its residents $2,000 per year.

Careers for Instructional Designers

Under the general category of an instructional designer, there are specialty positions that are tailored for different levels and skills. They are training specialists, instructional learning analyst, eLearning instructional designer, curriculum designer, and project manager. Let’s compare them.

Training Specialist

The typical salary for a training specialist is $55,422 according to Payscale.com.

The top five states with the highest salaries for a training specialist are:

1. Washington: The average salary is $64,844.
2. New York: The typical salary is $64,290.
3. Texas: The average salary is $59,302.
4. Georgia: The typical salary is $58,193.
5. Illinois: The average salary is $57,639.

In this position, you will design and create the training materials needed by various groups. You will also usually be called upon to use these same materials to teach the programs. The teaching may be done in-person or remotely through online group live streams and using a virtual educational system to connect with students and follow their progress.

This job position is usually part of the human resources department. In a corporate environment, you will work to assist in training new employees, and in the continuing education of existing employees.

Instructional Learning Analyst

The typical salary for an instructional learning analyst is $57,208.

The top five states with the highest salaries for an instructional learning analyst are:

1. Washington: The average salary is $66,933.
2. New York: The average pay is $66,361.
3. Texas: The typical salary is $61,213.
4. Georgia: The average salary is $60,068.
5. Illinois: The average pay is $59,496.

An instructional learning analyst uses technological advancements and data mining to understand how people absorb new information and retain it for practical use. Insights from the analysis and research support efforts in this field to design the most impactful learning modalities that incorporate real-world information in the teaching methods.

This is not academic efforts for just research purposes. Instead, these practical investigations help make the lessons more useful in a practical sense to increase job performance and improve productivity.

eLearning Instructional Designer

The national average salary for an eLearning instructional designer is $62,424.

The top five states/territories with the highest salaries for an eLearning instructional designer are:

1. Washington, DC: The average salary is $72,412.
2. New York: The average salary is $71,788.
3. Washington: The average salary is $69,915.
4. Georgia: The average salary is $66,794.
5. Illinois: The average salary is $53,048.

The focus of an eLearning instructional designer is on developing dynamic online educational systems that are effective and make the best use of many media formats. An eLearning instructional designer must stay up-to-date on all the online delivery platforms (such as Blackboard, Canvas, and Zoom) and how to use them to deliver the online educational programs effectively. It is critical to have a clear understanding of the differences between in-person classes and online teaching to be able to manage the limitations created by online experiences.

Curriculum Designer

The national average annual salary for a curriculum designer is $75,303.

The top five states/territories with the highest salaries for a curriculum designer are:

1. Washington, DC: The average salary is $84,693.
2. New York: The average salary is $81,703.
3. Washington: The average salary is $81,323.
4. Illinois: The average salary is $78,203.
5. Texas: The average salary is $74,773.

This special field focuses on creating educational curricula for students in kindergarten to 12th grade. The deliverables required for a curriculum designer include such things as lessons that are targeted to the appropriate age levels, student worksheets, teachers’ guides, standard testing methodologies, and student progress reporting.

Project Manager

The average salary for a project manager in this field is a rewarding $138,218. The pay is so high because this job is very difficult and requires a senior executive with more than five years of experience in project management.

The top five states/territories with the highest salaries for a project manager are:

1. California: The average salary is $172,772.
2. New York: The average salary is $166,276.
3. Massachusetts: The average salary is $155,771.
4. Washington, DC: The average salary is $153,837.
5. Illinois: The average salary is $146,649.

A project manager who focuses on informational design projects is usually in a senior administrative position. In this position, you will supervise a large team of instructional designers and have bottom-line responsibility to make sure the project is delivered on time, on budget, and meets the specifications required.

The instruction design team may have a wide variety of professionals with specific expertise in media, content creation, and interface design. The project manager defines the instructional design project, creates a development plan, set the timeline, and the work schedule for it.

A dedicated project manager needs to be able to keep the team organized and manage the workflow to keep the project on schedule. To be able to perform successfully and meet the staged project deadlines, a project manager must have high-level technical competence, excellent problem-solving skills, people skills, and be flexible in the face of unexpected challenges.

For those who advance in a career as an instructional designer and who are good at managing people, this can lead to a project manager position after sufficient years of experience with associated work success. Candidates earn consideration for these positions by taking on increasing development team management responsibilities.

The instructional design career path offers a number of possibilities for those with the right skills.

For a closer look at how to become an instructional designer check out this article.

Ready for a Career Upgrade?

Instructional designers must be qualified to be hired for this position.

The minimum qualification includes a certification from a recognized school or online institution. The instructional design certification is the equivalent of a master’s degree.

Most positions require at least 2 years of experience as an educator before being qualified to advance to the level of an instructional designer. Those who have 4-5 years of experience command the highest salaries.

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

If you need to get training, there are plenty of courses you can take online from subject matter experts, including the Professional Certificate in Instructional Design program from Emeritus. In just 5 months, this online class gives you all the training you need to earn a certificate and launch your career as an instructional designer. This s immersive program provides students with an in-depth study of the foundations of instructional design and cutting-edge approaches used today in the learning design field.

You can learn more about the program and request a brochure at this link.

Once you’ve gotten certified and start looking for jobs, you’ll also want to create an instructional design portfolio, which you can easily do with a website builder like Squarespace.

Check out our video with some great ID portfolio examples and tips below:

Useful Resources

• What is instructional design?
• What Do Instructional Designers Do?
• 7 Steps To Become An Instructional Designer
• FAQ: How to Be a Freelance Instructional Designer
• Is Instructional Design the Right Career?
• How to create the perfect instructional designer resume

A Final Word on Instructional Designer Salaries

The demand for qualified and certified professional instructional designers is increasing which means even entry level instructional designers can earn a great salary.

If you’re thinking about trying to get the training you need to pursue this career path, then, check out my list of the best instructional design courses to get the training and certifications you need.

If you are hunting for a job in this sector and you are willing to relocate, then, you can expand your search to include the highest paying cities and states. Just remember to factor in the cost of living when you make your decision.

Many states with high-paying jobs also have a modest cost of living so you will do extremely well financially if you move there and work as an instructional designer.

Often, you can even get a moving allowance to help pay for your costs to move as well.

Looking forward to your success!

Have any questions about instructional designer salaries? Let us know by commenting below.

The post What’s the Typical Instructional Designer Salary? (2024 Figures) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Speaker isolation pads can cut out vibrations so you can make sure you’re hearing your monitors clearly, allowing you to better mix your recordings. More simply put, isolation pads let you get a clearer, more accurate sound from your monitor speakers so your final mix is better than ever. This is especially beneficial in home studios or untreated spaces, where the room’s acoustics may not be optimal.

The best studio monitor isolation pads are designed to provide the utmost in sound isolation and decoupling, so you can be sure your mixes will come out as well as possible. I’ve reviewed and ranked the best speaker isolation pads based on numerous factors, including their overall quality of construction, shape and design, effectiveness, customer reviews, price, and more (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews).

What Are The Best Monitor Isolation Pads?

Here are my picks for the best studio monitor isolation pads you can buy in 2024…

1. Sound Addicted High Density Studio Monitor Isolation Pads →
2. Auralex MoPAD →
3. Adam Hall SPADECO2 →
4. LyxPro MNS-4 →
5. Pyle PSi03 →
6. Auralex ProPAD →

1. Sound Addicted High Density Studio Monitor Isolation Pads →

This Sound Addicted pair of foam pads is designed for 5” monitors. It’s a solid solution to avoid distortion in the low-end frequencies, this model will be a great fit for your recording environment.

What are the tech parameters of these studio monitor isolation pads?

• High-density acoustic foam pads
• Dimensions: 7.5” x 11” x 1.6” inches (W x D x H)
• Five various angle configurations to make sure the tweeters are positioned at ear level
• Plain design with no logos.

All in all, these Sound Addicted speaker isolation pads support all celebrated monitors like Yamaha HS8, JBL LSR308, M-Audio BX8, KRK Rokit, and others. Got speakers that meet the profile? Go for it!

Official Sound Addicted website.

Best for: standard 5” monitors.

2. Auralex MoPAD →

MoPAD are well-known iso pads that have helped many a pro and amateur avoid monitor vibrations.

What’s special about these speaker isolation pads?

• Sold in pairs, flexible sizing and positioning, including horizontally-placed monitors
• Four base pieces as well as four angling wedge pieces
• Bases are 12″ long x 4″ wide x 1″ thick
• They eliminate sympathetic vibrations
• They help yield a more accurate bass response and clearer high frequencies.

The ‘industry’ standard Auralex uses dense foam that easily handles heavy weights and vibration. You can configure the monitor angle and set the right height.

Best for: multiple sizes of bookshelf loudspeakers or monitors up to 100 lbs. each.

3. Adam Hall SPADECO2 →

A cost-effective model that will meet most budgets and expectations, the Adam is a great example of high-density acoustic foam pads. Some users view these iso pads as a decent Auralex MoPAD alternative. Whatever the rationale, these speaker pads simply do a good job!

What are the tech specs of these studio monitor isolation pads?

• Two-component design
• Dimensions (W x D x H): 10.43” x 12.99” x 1.57”
• Anthracite color

The Adam always works as intended. The ‘two components’, in fact, make up three possible combinations: horizontal placement and two different angles. The Adam helps avoid disturbing resonation and makes audiophiles happy at a reasonable cost.

Best for: mid-sized and big heavy monitors.

4. LyxPro MNS-4 →

Another two-component pair of acoustic isolation pads, LyxPro is a good way to decouple monitors from a surface.

What does these speaker isolation pads come with?

• Great sonic isolation, optimization of performance for a wide range of reference monitors.
• A wedge piece that allows you to tilt the monitors to and fro up to 8 degrees
• High-density acoustic foam, two component design
• 1-year warranty.

Long story short, these studio monitor isolation pads are a good value for the money. Since they can angle up to ear level and support heavier monitors, you simply can’t go wrong.

Best for: 5″ and 8″ studio monitors.

5. Pyle PSi03 →

Pyle is another great option if you’re looking for sound isolation pads. The model offers two dampening recoil stabilizer risers, 9” x 12” each. A great pair of studio monitor pads at a reasonable cost!

What’s in the package?

• High-density durable foam
• Dimensions: 9.44” x 12.1” x 2.0”
• Universal stabilizers for optimized audio performance
• Reduced vibration and resonance, efficient absorption of bass recoil
• Supports studio monitors, shelf speakers, subwoofers, etc.

The features speak for themselves. In addition, the platform bases can be reversed for the sake of upward and downward-firing effects.

Best for: mid-sized speakers up to 33 lbs.

6. Auralex ProPAD →

A premium version of MoPADs, the ProPAD is a bit more sophisticated and comes at a somewhat higher price – and it’s the best you can find!

What do the ProPADs do?

• Ensure optimal durability with their open-celled PlatFoam
• Provide protection against unwanted vibrations
• Support most surround-sound and stereo monitors
• Keep away sympathetic vibrations and improve sound clarity.

These studio monitor isolation pads have the dimensions of 13″ length x 8″ width and a slip-resistant ISO-plate top. You can think of these speaker pads as a cheeseburger, where the cheese is the plate. This design is slip-resistant and provides effective isolation at all times.

Best for: mid-sized studio monitors, a good fit for home theaters, listening rooms, media rooms, etc.

FAQ

What are monitor isolation pads?

Studio monitor isolation pads are designed to go underneath speakers to decouple them from the flat surface they’re sitting on, helping to reduce vibrations and other noise issues during playback.

Are monitor isolation pads necessary?

If you want the clearest, most accurate sound from your studio monitors during playback, isolation pads are a must.

Do speaker isolation pads work?

Yes, good studio monitor isolation pads will drastically cut down on vibrations when you’re using your speakers, allowing you to hear your mix more clearly and accurately during mixing.

What are monitor isolation pads made from?

The best speaker pads are made from high-quality foam that can absorb vibrations and prevent them from being heard during playback.

Final Thoughts

I’ve learned that decoupling studio monitors is absolutely crucial for your audio ambiance. It’s good to know there is an abundant choice of solutions for reverb reduction.

The good news is with the right isolation pad setup, you can improve sound quality and reduce interference from the supporting surface to get clear, crisp sound.

Some of the speaker isolation pads in this guide are original designs, and some are mere variations.

The rule of thumb here is to check out the dimensions, read the reviews and see if the monitor isolation pads are in line with your budget expectations. Good luck, and feel free to share your experiences!

Have any questions about choosing studio monitor isolation pads? Comment below and let us help you out.

The post The 6 Best Studio Monitor Isolation Pads for a Home Recording Studio (2024 Guide) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

The right accommodation for your home studio monitors will help you decouple them from unwanted surfaces, and ultimately produce pure sound and enjoyable audio experiences. Studio monitor stands are specifically designed to position the monitors at the ideal height and angle, ensuring that the sound is directed precisely toward the listener’s ears. This placement is crucial for achieving accurate and balanced sound reproduction, which is essential for critical listening, mixing, and producing high-quality audio.

In this article, I’m sharing what I believe are the 7 best studio monitor stands from various budget categories and announcing my top picks (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews). This guide has been fully updated for 2024 to bring you the best options currently on the market today.

What are the Best Affordable Monitor Stands?

Here are our picks for the top studio speaker stands worth a look…

1. Ultimate Support MS-90 →

Combining the advantages of both wooden and metal stands, the MS-90 is a game-changing model from Ultimate Support that fits most common application scenarios in a sound recording studio.

What’s great about this set of studio monitor stands?

• 36″ column made of extra-durable 6000 series aluminum
• Nifty internal design featuring three standalone channels: two small ones for audio cables and power cables, and a large one for weighting
• Three rubber feet to provide isolation from the floor
• Four rubber pads to separate monitors from the stand
• Two joints to decouple the bottom and the top

All these characteristics translate into maximum decoupling and reliability with this affordable studio monitor stand set.

Plus, you get the perk of a lifetime warranty: whatever happens, you’re covered.

One downside to these studio monitor stands: the height is non-adjustable here whereas many other stands are. Aside from this drawback, MS-90 is the best choice!

Best for: pro and semi-pro studios, mid-size and larger monitors.

2. SANUS Adjustable Height Speaker Stand →

As the name suggests, the SANUS studio speaker stand offers full adjustability and a few other perks. Need more details on this studio monitor stand? Here you go:

• Supports satellite speakers up to 3.5 lbs.
• Adjustable height – 28” to 38”
• Heavy-gauge offset steel column with a built-in wire channel
• Top plate, keyhole adapter and L-shaped brackets included
• 5-year warranty from the manufacturer.

It’s cheap and functional! At this budget, you should seriously consider this stand for lightweight speakers.

Best for: home studios, satellite and small bookshelf speakers (JBL, KEF, Sony, and many others)/smaller monitor speakers

3. VideoSecu 2 →

The VideoSecu stand mount supports a great selection of speakers. It’s easily adjustable, heavy duty and nice to look at.

What are the key features of these studio stands?

• Stylish steel column to support up to 30 lbs weight capacity for quality stereo sound
• Flexible side clamping on the top plate – width from 5.5 to 11 inches
• Adjustable height – from 26.5” to 47”
• Screw-in rubber feet facilitate great isolation on carpet or solid floor
• The top plate can rotate 180 degrees and tilt up to 10 degrees
• Stealthy wire management, ensured stability

Best for: PA systems, club environments, a broad selection of studio monitors including JBL, KEF, Klipsch, Sony, Yamaha, Pioneer, and beyond.

4. Mounting Dream MD5401 →

Mounting Dream MD5401 height-adjustable speaker stands raise the bar for durability. The model has an extendable tube (35.5” to 48”) with 11 lbs capacity per stand.

More details below:

• Various attachment options catering to specific speakers: adapter bar for horizontal holes, vertical hole/keyhole, as well as a round holder for wooden speakers
• Heavy-duty cast iron, black finished steel (supports heavier monitors weighing up to 11lbs/5kg per column)
• Floor-standing design features with a triangle shape base
• Neat cable management solution with cabling hidden out of sight.

All in all, this is a very sturdy and very flexible model that provides full compatibility with a wide spectrum of speakers. In any case, make sure you check the location of the speaker holes before you buy.

Best for: mid-weight acoustic systems, semi-pro, and home applications.

5. VIVO (STAND-SP03B) →

Universal floor speaker stands, this VIVO pair works great with bookshelf and surround sound speakers.

Let’s look further into the model’s parameters:

• Dimensions: 25” height, 6.25” x 6.25” top shelf, 9.5” x 9.5” base measure
• Smooth compatibility: this stand accommodates most satellite and bookshelf speakers
• Design: high-gauge steel speaker stands (2 columns) in sleek matte black finish
• Spikes: easy carpet placement with smoothly attachable and detachable spikes
• Padded feet: a nifty option for solid floor placement.

In other words, VIVO offers a stylish neutral look, and it’s heavy-duty and easy to assemble. For a pretty low budget, VIVO is as sturdy as it gets. If you prefer to conceal the cords, this may not be the right option though, since there is no cord management.

Best for: home and semi-pro studios, monitors weighing up to 22lbs.

6. Pangea Audio DS400 →

Heavy-duty 32” speaker stands, Pangea is a high-quality steel model that holds the speaker firmly for best performance.

Here are the features:

• Durable, all-steel
• You can fill all four support piers with sand or steel shot
• Adjustable bottom spikes for better carpet standing
• Four rubberized top pads for speaker isolation
• Supports a bunch of compact speakers as well as larger monitors.

The DS400 utilizes sturdy support piers and provides a rigid base for compact monitors and bookshelf speakers. Stylish, impressive, worth every penny.

Best for: amateur and pro recording studios, large monitors.

Now that you’re familiar with some nice speaker stand options, you might want to supplement your acoustic infrastructure with isolation pads for better decoupling and sound performance. Check out my brief roundup of iso pads, and pick what feels right!

7. DR Pro SMS1BK (36″) →

A wooden model, the DR Pro is a popular studio monitor stand despite the traditional drawbacks associated with wood.

How does DR stand out?

• The model has a hollowed-out cavity that you can fill with the right material for greater density
• Thus, you can boost acoustic isolation between the monitor and the floor
• Shipped in various versions, e.g. DR Pro Maple Wood.

All this should be taken with a pinch of salt though. Wooden models  are far less durable. Plus, they have a larger footprint and you can’t adjust their height.

Best for: smaller studio monitors and speakers

A Final Word on Studio Monitor Stands

Spending hours recording in the studio only to find out that your tracks don’t sound quite right is frustrating.

One of the most common problems is that the speakers aren’t properly positioned.

This can happen for a number of reasons, but one of the most common is that the speaker stands aren’t positioned right.

If your speakers are too low or at the wrong angle, they won’t be aimed at your ear level properly and you won’t be able to hear all the detail in your tracks.

This can lead to subpar recordings that don’t represent your hard work accurately.

That’s why choosing the right speaker monitor stands for your studio is so important. The right stands will place your speakers at the perfect height, so you can hear all the details in your tracks and create a better mix.

With the guide above, you can find great monitor stands that will set you up for success.

Have a question about choosing the right studio monitor stand? Comment below and we’ll help.

The post 7 Best Studio Monitor Stands for People on a Budget (2024 Guide) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

The good news is there’s no need to drive miles to take expensive photography classes. These days, you can take some great online photography classes from the comfort of home or anywhere you’d like. As someone who works in the eLearning field, I’d argue that online classes are even more effective than in-person classes in many cases due to their flexibility and the ability to take lessons on demand as many times as you’d like.

I’ve reviewed and ranked the best online photography courses available in 2024 based on a variety of critical factors, including quality of the curriculum, instructor credentials, student reviews, cost, and more (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews). From free online photography courses to paid options with certifications, we have choices for everyone.

What are the Best Online Photography Classes?

Here are our picks for the top online photography courses to take in 2024…

1) Annie Leibovitz Teaches Photography (Masterclass)

Annie Leibovitz Teaches Photography (Masterclass)

Step into Annie Leibovitz’s world and learn the secrets of capturing amazing portraiture that tells a story!

Sign Up!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Plans start at $10/month for unlimited access to all courses (billed annually)

Duration

15 video lessons, 3+ hours

In this powerful online course, famed photographer Annie Leibovitz shows you how to take stunning, iconic photos. The course is great for those working in any photography genre.

During her iconic career as a staff photographer shooting portraits for Rolling Stone and Vanity Fair, Annie has taken some of the most famous images in the world—capturing legends such as John Lennon, Queen Elizabeth, LeBron James, and countless others.

What I like about this class is how Leibovitz’s expertise and reputation as a world-renowned photographer bring an unparalleled level of insight and depth to the course. Her approach to teaching isn’t just about the technical aspects of photography but also about storytelling through images, which is a crucial skill for any photographer.

Throughout taking the course, you’ll learn all about Annie’s philosophy, creative process, and the skills she uses to capture her amazing photos. What makes this course particularly special is the way Leibovitz delves into the philosophy behind her work. She encourages students to develop their own concepts and vision, which is essential for creating compelling and meaningful photography.

Click here to enroll in this course today.

What You Will Learn

• How to develop concepts
• How to work with subjects
• Tips for shooting with natural light
• Editing tricks to bring images to life in post-production

Best for: Anyone who wants to learn the creative process of a world-class photographer.

2) Fundamentals of DSLR Photography Class Online (Skillshare)

Fundamentals of DSLR Photography (Skillshare)

Master the basics of using your camera, learning key camera settings like ISO, aperture, shutter speed, and more. You’ll take a look at the “exposure pyramid.

Try It Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Skillshare offers a 1-Month Free Trial. After that, the price for an annual membership is around $165 per year, which works out to $13.75/month averaged out, or you can opt for a monthly membership at $32 a month.

Duration

1 hour 20 mins(12 lessons)

Skillshare provides a wide range of online video courses to try out at a very reasonable price. It also provides a one-month free trial, which is enough to complete two or three of the best online photography courses for free.

This course is designed to help you with your camera and some tutorials on Photoshop and Lightroom.

You can learn everything from street photography to portraits with this class. These lessons also include a sharing option where you can compare your projects with others and learn through their experiences.

This course is great for beginner photographs.

It will inspire you to get up and take some beautiful street photos.

You will get to know how to balance shutter speed and ISO for the perfect click.

You will be learning camera settings, manual mood shoots and will be able to create next-level photos that you always imagined taking by yourself.

It is not about what is the object in front of the lenses, it is about how you capture it, the angle you choose, and the editing skill you have.

This online photography course will help you to adjust things like exposure, contrast, clarity, shadow, and all other tools, which you will need for the perfect editing.

You can try this class free during your one-month free trial period on Skillshare.

What You Will Learn

• How to balance the three elements of the exposure triangle to capture different levels of moments
• How to learn to shoot in manual mode and panning the camera with the motion of the object.
• How to opt for the right camera and lenses
• How to adjust and set ISO ranges and shutter speed
• How to freeze and blur motion

User Feedback

“Excellent DSLR Course! I have learned a lot from this course. Simply just amazing. I can recommend this course unreservedly to all who are interested in wanting to try their hands on DSLR Photography. Justin Bridges will be able to walk you through ALL the REQUIRED STEPS that you need for your first RAW Photo Shoot & All the necessary TWEAKINGS that you may need to do via the Editing mode.”

Best for: Mastering both photography and photo editing; aspiring photographers

3) Photography Essentials: Understanding the Basics (Skillshare)

Photography Essentials: Understanding the Basics (Skillshare)

Just getting started in photography? This 101 course is perfect for beginners looking to master the basics and get on the path to becoming a great photographer.

Try It Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Skillshare offers a 1-Month Free Trial. After that, the price is $165 per year, which works out to $13.75/month averaged out, or you can opt for a monthly membership at $32 a month. See our Skillshare pricing guide for more info.

Duration

1 hour 30m (13 lessons)

If you want to learn photography basics but don’t have a lot of time, this course is for you.

It has all the information about essential basic skills of photography in just 90 minutes.

This course is not only about basic photography skills, but it will give you tips and tricks that you need to become a prominent photographer.

If you have an interest in capturing the true essence of nature and if you are fond of traveling and strive to capture the scene with your camera, this class is the best fit for you.

This course will help you capture emotions and storytelling content with your camera.

Most of the content in these videos is related to travel and lifestyle photography, and you will grow as a lifestyle and traveling photographer within a few days.

Like any other good online photography course, this course is also designed for beginners, who have little or no knowledge and who want to improve their photography skills.

The course will help you with all the basic tricks and tips that will help you to capture the best scenes, making unforgettable images.

It will also teach you how to find the best angle for the image and how to control the lighting environment.

You can take this class free during your one-month Skillshare trial period.

What You Will Learn

• How to use the best camera setting and camera modes to nail the perfect composition.
• How to do the best editing for the image captured.
• How to manage social media platforms and tips for the photographers
• How to find the best angles and lighting environment to capture the moment.
• How to get a crisp focus in every photo
• How to edit the photos with precision
• How to work with manual mode and manipulate your environment

User Feedback

“I learned so much from this course. Sean is such an engaging teacher and explained everything so clearly, with great use of example images to illustrate the points being made. I can’t wait to get out and put what I have learned into practice!”

“The classes were genuine and practical, which in conjunction with Sean’s great work, makes this an adaptable course for beginners.”

Best for: Beginner and intermediate-level photographers

4) Introductory Photography Course (Udemy)

Free Photography Tutorial - Introductory Photography Course (Udemy)

This free photography class from Udemy teaches some of the very basics to beginners just getting into this hobby.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Free (Udemy pricing varies by course)

Duration

2.5 hours

If you are a beginner and want to start from the basics, this short video-based Udemy course is for you.

This free online photography course starts with the basics, like managing autofocus modes, lenses, depth of field, etc.

Right from the start, the course demystifies many aspects of using a camera beyond the auto mode. The instructor’s approach is straightforward and easy to follow, which made the learning process enjoyable.

This free course is not only about camera settings but it also covers compositional concepts and covers topics from the very basic to specialized niche topics.

Having prior camera skills or photographic skills is not required to start this course, because it starts with the fundamentals, and you will learn a lot in a short span of time.

Even some of the accomplished photographers commented that they still learned a lot from this course.

It doesn’t matter what kind of camera you are using, because this course is not limited to any specific type of camera or brand. A wide range of terminologies is included in this course to help you out with any kind of camera.

The mode of study in this course is very easy to understand because of the simple language and no usage of complex theories or jargon.

The aim of this introductory course is to inspire and make enthusiastic beginners understand the fundamentals of photography.

Click here to sign up for this class at no cost.

What You Will Learn

• How to apply the right techniques required for the perfect click
• How to frame up photos by using the rule of leading lines and thirds to cover everything
• How to control exposure, brightening, or darkening of photos
• How to understand aperture and depth of field
• How to work with different shutter speeds, ISO settings

User Feedback

“The course has filled in a lot of gaps in my knowledge when it comes to understanding the ‘why’s’ and the ‘what’s’ of settings of the camera I have used but couldn’t fully explain to myself. The presenter is honest and gives practical advice that I can relate to from my own photographic experiences.”

“This is a great course. After following along with the videos, I had a much better sense of how to control my camera and how to compose better shots. I was shooting underwater in Cuba. I was not used to shooting with so much natural light. Initially all of my pictures were blown out, but with Chris’s training, I was able to make quick changes and get some great shots.”

Best for: Beginner photographers who are learning for the first time

5) Macro Photography & Focus Stacking Made Easy (Udemy)

Macro Photography & Focus Stacking Made Easy (Udemy)

This online class focuses on close-up, macro and focus stacking, getting you on the path to shooting great macro photos in no time at all.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Regularly $69.99 with 30-day money-back guarantee (price may vary)

Duration

3 hours on-demand video

If you have a DSLR and want to capture the amusing world around you, then a Macro photography course is the best way to help you to get the most from your camera.

This course will help you to learn the techniques, like lighting, optical, and more to capture some of the best photographs of nature like birds, insects, flowers, and much more.

The aim of the course is to help you with your DSLR skills and mirrorless cameras with their macro-capabilities in a very reasonable way.

By spending a few dollars, your ordinary lenses can be turned into amusing macro lenses, because this course will help you with some of the best techniques with small changes in your camera settings.

Once you are one with this course, you will excel in focus stacking techniques, and you will have much fun with photoshop.

You will learn about all kinds of close-up shots, extreme macro, and reverse lenses techniques in a simple and easy-to-digest manner.

Click here to sign up for this course.

What You Will Learn

• How to select the right lenses, cameras, and light sources such as LED, fiber optic, etc.
• How to understand the concept of focus stacking and images in photoshop and helicon focus
• How to capture stacks of images by using a computer.
• How to use a wide range of lenses, attachments to take close-up photos.
• How to work with exposure, white balance, and depth of field
• How to set up the Helicon Remote

User Feedback

“Coverage of the subject is extensive and presented with practicality in mind. Getting into macro photography can be expensive but doesn’t have to be. The experience of the instructor clearly shows. I will be returning to these videos many times.”

“I really enjoyed the course. I wanted to know more about macro photography and this course provided all the necessary information. Excellent tutor. No messing about, straight to the point!”

Best for: Advanced photographers interested in close-up and macro with a DSLR

6) Photography Masterclass: A Complete Guide To Photography (Udemy)

Photography Masterclass: A Complete Guide to Photography (Udemy)

Looking for a comprehensive photography class that will help you take your skills to the next level? This Udemy class is a great place to start!

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Regularly $109.99 with a 30-day money-back guarantee (price may vary)

Duration

23.5 hours on-demand videos

As the name shows, Photography Masterclass is a complete guide for capturing the best photos.

This course is designed to help with everything that you grow your photography skills and take them to the next level.

If you are keen to take photos of nature, people, animals, or birds, you must know how to light it, edit it or compose a short.

If you excel in these skills, you can make huge money, and make a career in photography.

This course will add to your knowledge about photography and enhance your earning chances.

This online photo course starts with the basics like tackling your camera, gives knowledge about types of lenses, and other equipment that you need to accomplish a bigger goal.

You will not only learn how to use your camera but also your smartphones and tablets to take and edit pictures.

After taking online classes of this course, you will end up being a brand yourself and you can earn through starting a business in photography, because by the end of the course, you will be a confident photographer.

Click here to learn more.

What You Will Learn

• How a camera works in a true sense.
• How to compose and edit images
• How to work in natural and artificial light
• How to balance symmetry, composition, backgrounds, and angles
• How to take the best pictures with smartphones and tablets.
• How to photograph different scenarios such as portrait, landscape, aerial, wildlife, etc.
• How to brighten up your subjects with flash or natural lighting

User Feedback

“This is an excellent, cost-effective and very comprehensive course and I’m so glad to enroll in the class. Even though I don’t have any more equipment than my iPhone 7 Plus, I’ve learned so much from the basics that I might choose to have a DSLR or mirrorless camera in the future. I am extremely grateful of the fact that all three instructors were committed throughput and conveyed their knowledge diligently. Once again, this course is highly recommended!”

“One of the most detailed and beautifully structured courses on photography that takes us from the basics to the advanced lesson with so much ease. Thanks to the mentors for putting in all their efforts for this wonderful course.”

Best for: Aspiring, professional photographers

7) Fundamentals of Photography (CreativeLive)

Fundamentals of Photography (CreativeLive)

Looking to better understand your equipment so you can get the most from it as a new photographer? This beginner's class is the perfect place to begin your journey.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

$99 individually purchased or available with “The Creator Pass” subscription for around $11/month along with a 7-day trial period

Duration

24h 30m of class content

If you want to be one of the best photographers, you must master the basic technicalities of the camera that you are using.

You must have knowledge about the kind of equipment that you need.

The Fundamentals of Photography is an online photo course that will help you boost up your creativity in photography and teach you the essentials of the camera.

These lessons are not ordinary photography classes, but they aid in experiential learning and quality visuals.

These lessons are not only designed for the basic understanding of the photographs but also encourage practicing and experimenting with them.

When you start doing photography and experiment with it, you will feel the need of knowing different ideas and approaches to add more to the beauty of the picture. This course is here to fill the gap and teach these ideas and approaches.

This photography class will help you with different styles of cameras, post-processing, modes in cameras, focusing and lightening techniques. It covers a lot of things that you need as a photographer.

Click here to learn more.

What You Will Learn

• How to corroborate shutter speed, aperture, and image compositions.
• How to use natural lighting for maximum advantage
• How to choose the right gear
• How to work with two different sensor sizes ( basic and compared)
• How to use different lenses such as Fisheye and Tilt & Shift lenses
• How to use various exposure settings ( bracketing, values)
• How to work with pixel shift, noise reduction, selective cloning, and time lapse

User Feedback

“John is one of the best teachers I have ever had. He has a methodical approach and explains things slowly without becoming boring. His experience is very helpful and the material he created for this course is spot on. I could tell years of thought went into every section of this course. Before taking the course, I thought it was going to be out of date but that really was not the case. Everything taught is still very relevant.”

“I’m hooked, John’s presentation was sincere, passionate, personable, and natural. His introduction left me with a desire to learn more. I love the concept of his teaching technique through his own story.”

Best for: Outdoor and travel photographers

8) Portrait Photography Bootcamp (CreativeLive)

Portrait Photography Bootcamp (CreativeLive)

Interested in becoming a portrait photographer? This bootcamp course will have you taking great portraits by the time you finish it.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

$74 individually purchased or available with “The Creator Pass” subscription for around $11/month along with a 7-day trial period

Duration

Approx. 14 hours

Portrait photography is one of the distinguishing skills of any photographer, which is more demanding than many other types of photography.

As humans, we are fond of reflecting on ourselves and on the people we love, and portraits photography is one of the best skills that you can use to take pictures of people that you cherish.

This skill can be used for your business, where you can use portrait portfolios.

Portrait Photography Bootcamp will help you establish a strong foundation for any kind of portrait photography.

It will start at the very beginning and help you establish a foundation for all styles of portrait photography.

This course is one of its own kind, which will help you boost up your portrait skills and it will cover all that you need to know to make an excellent portrait shoot.

It will not only assist you with making portraits, but it will help you with the basic camera settings, like lens selection, lighting, angles, and posing techniques for all kinds of photos.

Click here to learn more.

What You Will Learn

• How to make a good portrait
• How to manage the light environment, expressions, posing, etc.
• How to work with shooting doors, windows, stairs, nature, or your studio with full instructions.
• How to use modifiers and speed lights
• How to shoot full-figured objects (couples, fashion models)
• How to apply studio lighting

User Feedback

“This has been, by far, the best, most helpful course I’ve ever done. Lindsay is amazing and helped me to understand lighting and posing in such a simple, straightforward way that is easy to remember. I would highly recommend this class!”

“Lindsay’s Photography Bootcamp is an answer to my prayer. All lessons are relevant. She is so easy to understand. I am so excited about my photography journey.”

Best for: Professional photographers willing to expand their skillset

9) Photography Basics And Beyond: From Basics To DSLR Specialization (Coursera)

Photography Basics and Beyond: From Smartphone to DSLR (Coursera)

Learn how to create photographs you can be proud of on everything from a DSLR to your phone in this great class.

Enroll For Free

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Free to audit (paid upgrades available)

Duration

6 months (4 hours per week)

This in-depth class helps you pave your way toward a career in photography.

I found it to be an enriching and comprehensive journey into the world of photography. This specialization, consisting of a series of five courses, is meticulously designed to cater to beginners, with no prior experience necessary, making it an ideal starting point for anyone interested in delving into the art of photography.

These complete online photography classes will help you understand basics of compositions, on any photo capturing device, like smartphones, DSLR, mirrorless models, etc.

It will help you to build your skills by giving you creative concepts and tips to make the best photos that you always wanted to capture.

The hands-on projects are particularly beneficial, allowing you to apply the concepts learned in real-world scenarios. This practical approach to learning ensures that you gain a deep understanding of the key concepts and skills.

This course will not only teach you to make the best photos, but it will also give you a certificate of specialization from Michigan State University that will add to your credentials in the photography field.

All in all, this is one of the best free online photography courses out there.

Click here to get started for free.

What You Will Learn

• How to develop a final project of photoshoots
• How to work with frame and vintage points to click old subjects in new, improved ways
• How to use strobe lighting
• How to use focus effects with the help of depth of field
• How to apply the principles of post-photography image management using Adobe Lightroom
• How to use content in photography such as fact to fiction or purely documentary to expressive

User Feedback

“This course was very informative and provided just the right amount of challenge for me to stretch my creativity and newly obtained knowledge. I enjoyed it and I am looking forward to the next course”

“It’s a very good course for beginners and I got to learn a lot and improve my photography in every way possible! I recommend it to everyone who’s interested in Photography and wants to do more with it”.

Best for: Becoming an all-rounder photographer who makes money

A Final Word on Online Photography Classes

The above are some of the best online photography classes you can benefit from as they provide a lot of knowledge about photography skills.

These online learning classes have made our lives easier by providing lessons instantly with one click, but the real thing is the craze and eagerness to learn photography. These classes are going to increase your motivation towards learning photography skills and excel in the field.

But remember, there’s no such thing as a single “best online photography class.” What’s best for one budding photographer might not be a great choice for another. It depends on where you are on your journey, what level your skills are at, and even some personal preference.

Our advice? Take advantage of the free trial offers these online course websites offer and test out some different classes on this list to see which you prefer.

Soon, you’ll be on your way to becoming a photographer!

Have any questions about taking online photography classes? Drop a comment below and we’ll lend a hand.

The post The 9 Best Online Photography Classes You Can Take in 2024 appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

I’ve found that it’s crucial to maintain a reading habit even during these breaks. Regular reading plays a vital role in a child’s development – it fuels their imagination, sharpens analytical thinking, and enhances problem-solving skills. More than that, it broadens their understanding of the world, fostering empathy and communication skills.

But getting kids to pick up a book during holiday time can be challenging. As someone who’s navigated this, I’ve gathered some practical tips to keep your children engaged in reading during their school breaks. Let’s dive in and explore how to make reading a fun part of their holiday routine.

Formulate a Plan

Make a plan with your children before the holiday break starts. Try not to wait until the holiday break is underway to come up with a reading routine.

This plan could include a simple discussion of what reading time each day will look like. If you are looking for more structure, it could also include a calendar or chart with designated reading times.

The best type of plan is one that has a reading goal. You can set a goal of 20 minutes each day, as a minimum. In spite of the hectic days, at least you will have built 20 minutes of reading routine time into your bedtime routine.

You can also have your child draw out their own reading calendar. Putting them in charge of this task will help them take ownership of their reading goals. Add in some stickers and other craft supplies to make it a fun calendar.

Use Apps to Make Reading Fun

Lou Adventures: An Interactive Learning Story for Kids

Lou Adventures is an interactive learning story for kids that helps them improve their reading skills through a fun, adventurous game.

Try It Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Another option to switch up the reading routine is to use interactive reading apps, like Lou Adventures.

Lou Adventures is a free app that helps children hone their reading comprehension skills in a fun, engaging way.

Lou, a furry dog character in the app, takes children through different interactive adventures and mysteries. The app asks children questions along the way to check for understanding.

The best part is that you can refer to the dashboard after they have completed their reading time and check their progress.

Check out our Lou Adventures review for an in-depth look at the app.

Click here to try Lou Adventures for free!

Set an Example

Children do what they see. Part of making reading an everyday occurrence, especially over a holiday break, starts with you. Take some time each day and read.

You can read with your child, or you can read your own book while your child is reading. If you have some downtime, which is a rarity for parents and caregivers, take a few minutes to read.

Let your child see you stopping to sit and read. Explain to your children why reading is important to you, and in life. Give them examples of how reading often helps you learn or relax.

You can also make it a point to let them know that you are going to read for 20 minutes. Maybe they will join you!

Allow Children to Choose

Allowing children to choose what they read over break can be a game-changer. Most often in school, children are told what they have to read. This could be their chance to pick out different types of books they will enjoy. These books might not be educational, but the practice of reading is education in itself.

Go somewhere new to pick out books to read over the holiday break. If you frequent the local library and bookstores often, choose another library.

Find a different bookstore in a new town. Some towns have awesome used bookstores that you can visit. There are also virtual used bookstores online that you can order from.

If you make the plan for reading over break early, you can have these books at your doorstep when break begins.

Give it a Theme

Of course, your child can read a mix of books during the holiday break. Another cool idea is to choose a theme for the week. Maybe your child loves mystery, science, or a certain character. You can search for books within the theme of their choice together. Mix up the type of books within your theme, including both fiction and nonfiction.

Make it a Challenge

Who doesn’t love a good challenge? There are many ways to make reading a challenge over holiday breaks. You can find many printable worksheets online that make reading a challenge.

Some of my favorite challenges include a checklist of different types of books (a funny book, a nonfiction book, a book with magic). Other reading challenges are bingo boards that list different types of books. You can add a prize incentive of our choice for each winning bingo line.

Challenge your child to read to their siblings. The book challenge options are plentiful, and it might be a good way to gear your child up for reading over the holiday break.

Designate a Reading Space

The best part about reading is that it can be done anywhere! Books are easy to carry and bring along with you while waiting or traveling. If you plan to be home over most of the holiday break, create a reading space. If you do not have a designated reading space already, adding in a new one could add to the excitement of reading over the break.

A designated reading space does not have to be fancy, though it can be! Some books in a bin with a comfortable place to sit is a great way to start. You can add pillows or a beanbag chair. Fun lighting is always a plus!

If the reading nook is next to a window, natural light sets a great tone.

One important tip is to make sure the books are easily accessible in the reading zone. If children have to leave the reading zone to find another book, it could lead to distraction. Having the books at arm’s reach is key for keeping children focused during their reading time.

Take the Pressure Off

Once you have a plan set for reading over holiday break, you want to try to stick to it as much as possible. But there is a lot of fun and relaxation time that occurs over a holiday break. Let’s not forget the traveling, traditions, and family dinners.

One of the best pieces of advice is to take the pressure off. Some reading is better than zero reading, but remember we want to continue to make reading an enjoyable activity.

Try not to put too much pressure on the reading schedule, but instead focus on building reading in with quality family time.

If it’s the middle of the holiday break and your child seems to be running out of steam, take a break. Switch up the reading activity or reading location. Try again the next day!

Start a Family Book Club

When a family reads together, it makes reading a more normal part of a child’s daily life. You can simply read at the same time, or you can read together with your child.

Choose a long book to read and break it up throughout the holiday break. Another option is to choose a book or series of books that you will discuss as a family.

After the book is complete, gather together and discuss the storyline and the characters. This is a great activity to help with reading comprehension. Its help’s children verbalize what happened in the story.

If you read short books, you can do a family book club after each one. If you read longer books together, you can do a family book club every few days. This activity will keep everyone reading over holiday break, including parents and caregivers.

Engage with Follow-up Activities

Reading books is great, but having children complete follow-up activities for their reading is even more important. This keeps them accountable.

Decide on the types of activities you want to include over break. You can do activities every few days, or every single day, if you have time.

Some art activities can include making a bookmark, drawing a book cover, drawing a character, and creating a new character.

Alternatively, you can choose more literacy-based follow-up activities, such as reading comprehension questions. Have children react to the whole story or different parts of a story. They can write their reactions in words or draw a picture.

You can focus on practicing sight words within the stories for younger readers. For more advanced readers, you can focus on the definitions of words within the stories. Short on prep time? No worries, there are free printable worksheets online for all of your reading and literacy needs.

Whether you choose one item from this list or multiple items, the most important thing is not to make this feel like homework! We want children to be excited to read.

What are some other tips to keep kids reading during holiday breaks? Share them with us by commenting below.

The post How to Keep Kids Reading During Holiday Breaks from School appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Plus, with various options to suit different budgets and interests, they’re an ideal gift from grandparents or relatives, helping maintain a year-long connection with each exciting delivery.

I’ve reviewed and ranked some of our favorite kids subscription boxes for the holidays, including picks based on their quality, ease of use, entertainment factor, customer reviews, and price  (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews).

1. KiwiCo Crates

Top Pick

STEM, STEAM & Science Kits for Kids | KiwiCo

KiwiCo's monthly STEM, STEAM, and Science kits spark fun and learning with their one-of-a-kind hands-on activities kids of all ages love.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Subscriptions on sale for $15.95/month this holiday season (regularly $23.95/mo). One-off purchase options and classroom kits also available.

Recommended Age

KiwiCo makes sure every age group is covered and provides age-appropriate engaging custom content for the following age groups:

• 0-24 months (Panda Crate)
• 2-4 years (Koala Crate)
• 5-8 years (Kiwi Crate)
• 6-11 years (Atlas Crate)
• 6-14 years (Yummy Crate)
• 9-14 years (Tinker Crate)
• 9-16 years (Doodle Crate)
• 12-100 years (Eureka Crate)
• 14-100 years (Maker Crate)

KiwiCo offers subscription crates for all children, ages 0-18, and even children at heart. Their crates have an adorable animal-themed label based on the age group and interest level.

KiwiCo has done extensive research to make sure that the content of each crate is not only engaging to the specific age group, but also safe and age-appropriate.

Some projects require age-specific skills, however, KiwiCo has done a great job making sure there is an age range to help you choose the right subscription box for your child, not only based on age, but also based on categories, or areas of interest.

KiwiCo also offers crates for classrooms that align with NGSS and Common Core teaching standards so that you can supplement a student’s in-class activities, or give a subscription to your favorite homeschooler.

Key Features

• Quiz to match crate to child
• Incredible level of customization (based on age, area of interest, budget or shipping frequency)
• STEM-focused activities (hands-on learning through building and critical thinking)
• Engaging “learning through play” activities
• High-quality crate content
• 3-, 6-, or 12-month subscriptions
• NGSS and Common Core-aligned content

Click here to shop KiwiCo now.

2. Little Passports

Price

• $24.95/month for 12-month subscription, billed every 12 months
• $28.95/month for 6-month subscription, billed every 6 months
• $30.95/month for month-to-month subscription

Recommended Age

Available in 8 different categories that are based on age and interest, you are sure to find a perfect match for your child:

• 3-5 years (Early Explorers and Animals Wild)
• 5-8 years (Science Junior)
• 6-8 years (Space Quest)
• 6-10 years (World Edition)
• 7+ years (Kitchen Adventures)
• 8+ years (Science Expedition)
• 8-12 years (USA Edition)

Little Passports offers “passports” for your child to travel to in any area of their interest: from art to STEM to animals, children will playfully learn through exploration each time they open a subscription box.

For example, with the World Edition box, children can explore the world, learn about geography, be exposed to different cultures, and gain an appreciation for cultural diversity. The Kitchen Adventures box will offer your child step-by-step cooking instructions and provide many (if not all) of the ingredients to help create yummy dishes or desserts. Aside from keeping kids busy, they will also learn valuable life skills, such as cutting vegetables, safe cooking in the kitchen, or even following directions.

The theme-based subscription boxes have a key theme for each month, with supporting books, games, and an arts-and-crafts component to make sure that all learning styles are engaged. This also reinforces the lessons the children learn through play and interaction, keeping them interested and excited about each box content they receive.

Key Features

• Shopping filter by age group, interest area, and budget range
• Great STEM toy options for all ages
• Age-appropriate picks based on developmental stages of child
• High-quality toys
• Parent-approved, Award-winning selections (Parents’ Picks Award Winner 2021)
• Theme-aligned workbooks, experiments, and games to focus on one key idea with multi-disciplinary learning (art, reading, math, science-all on one)
• Perfect school learning supplement for extra-curriculars

Click here to learn more.

3. MEL Science

Price

Starting at $29.90/month

Recommended Age

MEL Science offers subscription kits for all ages, from 4 to 99, and each box subscription has a different main theme:

• 4-7+ years (Coding)
• 5-10+ years (STEM)
• 8-12+ years (Math)
• 8-14+ years (Physics)
• 10-16+ years (Chemistry)
• 14-99+ years (Medicine)

With over 100 different hands-on projects to choose from, your child will never be bored. Every month, they will be excited and positively challenged to explore new science concepts.

The kits are geared toward specific age groups to offer age-appropriate content to ensure that each child is challenged at their proper academic and developmental level.

MEL Science also offers school and group orders, making this a great fit for small homeschool groups, Montessori schools, or micro-schools.

If you are an educator, MEL Science kits take the lesson planning and prep work off your plate. Everything the child needs to successfully complete the different projects is included in the kit (with small exceptions of certain household ingredients).

You can use the physics or the chemistry subscription box to supplement the academic theory lessons.

The content is exciting and fun, making boring science concepts like electricity come alive. For example, in one kit, your child will build a mini rocket ship.

Applying science concepts, thinking critically, solving problems with creativity, and learning from trial and error are all amazing skills that foster innovation and invention.

Key Features

• Boxed-kit engaging science experiments for every age
• Digital connection (optional) to enhance the hands-on experience
• Video guides to help with the lesson
• Augmented reality connection for an immersive learning experience
• Choose one or more science subjects
• Classroom-quality experiments

Click here to learn more.

4. Universal Yum

Price

Starting at $16/box

Recommended Age

The Universal Yum box is a great gift idea for children of any age, from 3 years old to adult. Although some of the educational trivia is mostly geared toward children ages 8-12, it can be used by younger children with adult help.

Who’d think that snacks can be educational? If you are looking for a fun way to supplement your child’s geography lessons, or simply introduce them to different world cultures and foods, the Universal Yum is a fun and fairly inexpensive way to do just that. More fun than receiving a gift card to a local restaurant, the Universal Yum subscription brings you different countries to your doorstep every month, with a booklet that explains each snack, and has useful and quirky trivia about that specific country, as well. Your child can also rank their top 5 choices of snacks and compare with friends, who get the Universal Yum box, as well. With this box subscription, you can send a monthly sweet gift, and the recipients will experience a world-class culinary journey.

Note: Keep in mind that some snacks might taste unusual, whether it’s spicy, sour, or not a customary flavor (for example, fried egg and sea salt chips). Universal Yum boxes are for children who are somewhat open to trying new flavors.

Also, please check the ingredients for allergy-specific info, should your child have any dietary restrictions, or health issues. Contact Universal Yum, if you are unsure.

Key Features

• Sweet and savory snacks from different countries every month
• Informational booklet with activities, such as trivia and recipes
• “Pick your Country” feature
• Review past favorites online
• Option to reorder favorites individually (for yourself, or as gifts to share) in the Universal Yum shop

Click here to learn more.

5. Music Library Box

Price

Starting at $40/month

Recommended Age

The Music Library Box is for any child from age 4 to 12, geared mainly towards the early elementary school years.

With music programs disappearing from many schools, it is more important than ever to foster and cultivate musical talent and music appreciation in children outside the traditional teaching venue on an everyday basis.

Research shows that music is very important for a child’s brain development, but also helps in many other areas of a child’s academic and personal success.

Music is also a key elective subject that assists in other areas in life, not only with math, but also with creative thinking, stress management, and artistic expression.

The Music Library Box was founded by a retired music teacher of over 20 years. It introduces different instruments, music genres, and music theory, as well as music appreciation with the help of hands-on instruments, books, and activities.

It also includes interactive digital content that enhances the learning experience.

Your child will learn how to play different instruments with ease through playful interaction. This is a great way for your child to experiment and explore which instrument they enjoy playing, without breaking the bank, or committing to just one instrument too early.

Even if you are not musically inclined, you can give the gift of music to a child, as the included lessons will make it a breeze for them to learn on their own.

Key Features

• Connection between music and art, language arts, math, or logic
• Great quality box content and instruments
• Online access to exclusive content
• Printable downloads
• Activity booklets
• Access to video music lessons

Click here to learn more.

6. We Craft Box

Price

• $34.99/monthly
• $99.99 for 3 months
• $189.99 for 6 months
• $359.99 for 12 months

Recommended Age

The We Craft Box activities are geared toward children of ages 3-9, with some activities needing adult help with younger artists, depending on their skill level, and their gross and fine motor skills.

Arts and crafts can be stressful and messy sometimes, but they don’t have to be. With the We Craft Box subscription, your child can get monthly art projects delivered directly to the mailbox.

With everything needed included, you will foster the inner artist in every child, encourage them to express themselves, help them learn about art appreciation, color theory, different art styles, and encourage them to develop their gross and fine motor skills.

Art also fosters creativity and imagination in your child, something that is key to healthy early child development.

With the We Craft Box, you can focus on making fun memories with your child rather than having to plan and prep an art activity. Also, the supplies that come in the subscription box are of really nice quality so that your child sees your commitment to art. The We Craft Box gets the kids away from computer screens and helps them engage with different mediums, using their hands and eyes.

The children can reuse the non-consumables (such as watercolor or clay) over and over, practicing the skills they learned while creating new masterpieces.

The art projects are great for display, but also make for great gifts to showcase the child’s creativity and mastery.

Source: We Craft Box Website

Key Features

• 4-5 pre-kitted activities per box, with everything needed included (with the exception of scissors)
• High-quality art supplies
• Step-by-step directions and video tutorials for no-stress teaching
• One box can be used for two crafters
• A themed story is included

Click here to learn more.

7. Green Kids Crafts

Price

Starting at $28.95/month

Recommended Age

• 3-5 year olds (Junior Box)
• 5-10+ year olds (Discovery Box)

Green Kids Crafts subscription box comes packed with STEAM activities. STEAM stands for Science, Technology, Engineering, Art, and Math-including art to balance right-brain thinking with left-brain thinking.

You can order individual activities, or surprise your child with a box of a handful theme-based activities that include anything from a STEM building project to an art project that is all about bees.

Key Features

• 4-6 science and art projects
• 12-page magazine
• Choose individual science experiment boxes or mystery bundle packs

Click here to learn more.

Final Thoughts

Whether you’re a parent, a grandparent, a relative, or an educator, you’ll appreciate the thoughtfulness that goes into each subscription box to help your child or student thrive developmentally, as well as educationally.

The best way to learn is through play, and each featured box subscription service incorporates that concept.

With so many different subscription boxes to choose from, we reviewed the top choices for each major academic and skill-set category, such as STEM, music or arts.

Once you know what interests match your child’s interests and which skills you would like to foster and support with an annual subscription, simply select the appropriate subscription plan based on age and size.

Have any questions about our guide to subscription boxes kids will love this holiday season? Comment below so we can help.

The post Top 7 Best Kids Subscription Boxes for the Holidays appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

That’s why learning how to manage your time effectively is so important. Unfortunately, research reveals that an astonishing 82% of individuals do not employ any form of time management system. If you have poor time management, you’ll constantly feel stressed out and upset, and you’ll never get to spend time doing the things you really want to do.

The good news is I believe taking online time management classes is one of the most effective ways to learn how to make the most of your time and manage it like a pro.

I’ve reviewed and ranked the best time management courses based on numerous factors, including quality of curriculum, teacher credentials, student reviews, cost, ease of access, and more (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews).

What are the Best Time Management Courses Online?

Here are my personal favorites for the best time management courses online in 2024:

1. Time Management for Boosting Productivity (MEW Learning)
2. Productivity & Time Management Strategies for Goal Setting & Eliminating Distractions (Skillshare)
3. Get Productive: Time Management Hacks, Strategies and Tools! (Skillshare)
4. One Minute Habits for Success (LinkedIn Learning)
5. Productivity and Time Management for the Overwhelmed (Udemy)
6. Work from Home – Work Life Balance and Time Management (Udemy)
7. Work Smarter, Not Harder: Time Management for Personal & Professional Productivity (Coursera)

Keep reading to learn how to master your time effectively and efficiently, smoothly excelling at all that you do as a result!

1. Time Management for Boosting Productivity (MEW Learning)

Time Management for Boosting Productivity | MEW Learning

This time management course offers clear, proven strategies to help you prioritize tasks, cut out distractions, and get more accomplished.

Enroll Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

$49.99

Duration

56 lessons over 3.5 hours

If you’re someone who wants to accomplish more with your time in any facet of your life, this is the course for you.

With over 50 insightful video lessons taught by 3-time bestselling Amazon author Alex Genadinik, you will learn to implement effective time management strategies, from task prioritization and goal setting to mastering your own personal productivity habits.

This course also covers valuable topics such as eliminating distractions, overcoming procrastination, getting quality sleep to improve productivity, and leveraging technology for maximum efficiency.

I love the real-world case studies and step-by-step guidance — it’s huge for building confidence and knowledge to take control of your time, focus on your goals, and reach your full potential.

Whether you’re a student, teacher, entrepreneur, employee, parent, or anyone else, I really believe this course can help you maximize your productivity and make the most of every moment. This course is also great for companies who want to train their entire team to manage their time more efficiently.

Enroll today and start learning how to get more done in less time!

You Will Learn

• How to immediately free up time by automating and outsourcing daily tasks
• Strategies for eliminating distractions from your day
• Ways to use technology to optimize your productivity
• Tips for sustaining motivation and focus on tasks
• Task prioritization techniques
• How sleep, exercise, and diet can affect your productivity
• Best practices for setting goals and reaching them

Best For: Anyone who needs to use their time more effectively

2. Productivity & Time Management Strategies for Goal Setting & Eliminating Distractions (Skillshare)

Productivity & Time Management Strategies for Goal Setting & Eliminating Distractions (Skillshare)

This time management course uses a proven productivity methodology to show you how to get more done in less time with less stress. Become more productive in all areas of your life, from business to at home.

Try Skillshare Free for One Month!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Skillshare offers a 1-Month Free Trial. After that, the price is $165 per year.

Duration

22 lessons over 2.5 hours

Want to learn how to get more stuff done in less time? And want to get more done without working yourself to death?

This time management class is a complete master course that will show you a proven productivity methodology that helps you accomplish your goals all without exhausting yourself.

Thousands of students have taken this Skillshare course, using it to maximize productivity by taking their time management skills to the next level. And the overwhelming majority of students reported that this time management course exceeded their expectations.

You can try Skillshare free for one month and take this and other online courses at no cost during that time. Skillshare is one of the best online courses websites out there today.

You Will Learn

• The effective time management skills top performers use to get more done in less time
• How to set goals and develop step-by-step plans for getting them done
• How to hyperfocus on your most important tasks while eliminating distractions
• How to organize your day to get more done
• How to be productive in all aspects of your life
• How to make sure you have time for the things that matter most in your life and improve work-life balance

User Feedback

“If you want real practical and understandable advice on using the most valuable resource you have, your time, then this course is the BEST. If you think you don’t have time to take this course then you really need it!”

Best For: Anyone who wants to reduce stress by getting more done in less time and improve work-life balance

3. Get Productive: Time Management Hacks, Strategies, and Tools! (Skillshare)

Get Productive: Time Management Hacks, Strategies and Tools! (Skillshare)

This class is the complete resource on time management and productivity, helping professionals better manage their teams and create a more productive company culture.

Try Skillshare Free for One Month!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Skillshare offers a 1-Month Free Trial. After that, the price is $165 per year. Check our Skillshare pricing guide for more info.

Duration

39 lessons over 3+ hours

Do you lack motivation and willpower? Want to overhaul your habits?

This time management class will teach you the principles and strategies needed to become a master of productivity. You’ll master the basic tenets of productivity, including multitasking, overcoming procrastination, and dealing with information overload.

This course is specifically aimed at professionals, helping students become more productive at project management, meetings, dealing with employees, and more. It also teaches ways to be more productive outside of work with things like achieving your health and fitness goals.

You can try Skillshare free for one month and take this course at no cost during that time.

You Will Learn

• The 4 quadrants of productivity for better time management skills
• How to develop willpower, motivation, good habits, and smart decision making
• How to manage your team, run more productive meetings, improve your commutation skills with your team, and build a better culture at your company
• Actionable plans to help you go from knowing to doing
• The keys to successful project management

User Feedback

“It covers everything you need for you to become a more productive and efficient version of yourself.”

Best For: Managers who want to run their teams and organizations more efficiently; anyone in project management

4. One Minute Habits for Success (LinkedIn Learning)

Price

One-month free trial, then $39.99/month to access

Duration

4 chapters spread over 40 minutes

Practice makes perfect – that’s the age-old phrase that has somehow stuck around, and it’s proven to be gold.

Time management skills are all about effectively managing the tasks you have to fit them into a concise time frame without compromising on quality or suffering from burnout.

Sounds pretty difficult, doesn’t it?

Well, the surefire way to achieve this is to practice, practice, and practice. Because what does practice do? It forms habits, and habits stick around.

Ask any successful person around you, they’ll have a list of go-to habits that they put in action whenever they’re faced with a challenging task.

In this online time management course, that’s what they focus on: habit building. It might seem like a bit much to dedicate an entire course to habit building, but it’s really an art that you’ll learn to appreciate once you’re through with this course.

Your instructor Scott Mautz, author of Leading from the Middle and part of IU faculty, has come to know human nature in great detail in his many years in the industry. As such, he focuses on short, one-minute habits that won’t let the all too common human qualities of procrastination and laziness get in the way.

With Scott’s energetic nature and drive for teaching, his time management training course will leave you with invaluable life skills.

LinkedIn Learning offers a free one-month trial, which is a great opportunity to take this class at no cost.

You Will Learn

• Utilizing your existing skills to your advantage
• The importance of resetting
• Building self-confidence
• Performing under high-pressure situations
• Habit building that lasts
• The importance of practice – and how to do the most of it
• Building your customized routine for all-around success
• Navigating procrastination – and making sure it doesn’t come back

Best for: Individuals striving to get into habit building and use it to effectively manage time and gain control of their daily life

5. Productivity and Time Management for the Overwhelmed (Udemy)

Price

Regularly $79.99 (price may vary at times)

Duration

32 lectures spread out over almost 2 hours

It’s easy to feel overwhelmed in today’s hectic world that keeps throwing information, dates, and deadlines at you left, right, center. But the important thing is knowing how to curb this feeling of overwhelm by effectively managing the most precious resource you have: time.

If you’re looking to do just that and beat your procrastination then this is just the time management course for you!

Split up into three tacitly developed sections, this time management class focuses on tackling major obstacles to managing your time effectively while also educating you on proven ways to make the most of what you have.

Taught by Josh Paulsen, he has spent more than 15 years leading organizations and helping clients and students achieve their full potential.

Having traversed into the realm of science and psychology, Josh has developed a grasp over the working of the human mind, using what he’s learned to apply it to successful time management training techniques.

You Will Learn

• Managing sensations of overwhelm
• Planning
• Limiting multitasking
• Energy management
• Beating procrastination
• The importance of sleep
• Settling mood, energy, and emotional states for success
• Increasing productivity
• Effective time management techniques

User Feedback

“The course was highly interesting. A couple of things, I was already doing here and there, but had no idea what an impact they have on productivity and focus. I’ll have to implement them more often. I learned a whole lot more techniques that I can’t wait to try a few of them out and find out which ones or which combinations work best for me so that my head isn’t so chaotic and I can be even more helpful to my colleagues and other areas of my life.”

Best for: Individuals who feel overwhelmed going about their daily routines and want to boost productivity

6. Work from Home – Work Life Balance and Time Management (Udemy)

Price

Regularly $99.99 (price may vary at times)

Duration

50 lectures spread over approximately 5.5 hours

The onslaught of the COVID-19 pandemic meant that thousands of individuals shifted to a work-from-home position. And while it means that you can get that extra 30 minutes of sleep and stick to the pajamas a little longer, it also means that you no longer have access to that exclusive work environment where productivity is buzzing in the air.

This online time management course is designed to help you manage your newfound freedom without losing sight of the reins and still churning out productivity on the daily.

Whether you’re self-employed, working for a corporation, or simultaneously juggling multiple roles while also making your mark in the business world, this course teaches you how to make the best of your situation and utilize time and resources effectively.

Taught by professional speaking duo Joeel and Natalie Rivera, they combine their skills in public speaking, training and coaching to help individuals realize their best self. Gaining experience from their years of running Transformation Services – a company focusing on life coach training and personal empowerment – and Joeel’s time as a psychology professor specializing in counselling and education, the duo imparts valuable advice with concrete steps to help each individual carve the path that is best for them. All they ask is that you bring a can-do attitude and see how your life changes!

You Will Learn

• Learning balance
• Reducing stress
• Time management techniques & key skills
• Reducing burnout
• Establishing effective boundaries
• Deliberate goal creation
• Practical tools to tackle any time crunch situation
• The importance of recovery
• Scheduling
• Creating effective to-do lists
• Ins and outs of emailing
• Delegating tasks
• Setting achievable goals

User Feedback

“Awesome!! It helped me to find a positive approach in my day to day activities which I can now implement in my personal and professional life. Facts have been delivered very well with the logic behind them fully explained.”

Best for: Entrepreneurs, self-employed individuals, independent contractors, and people working from home looking to effectively manage their time

7. Work Smarter, Not Harder: Time Management for Personal & Professional Productivity (Coursera)

Price

Included with 7,000+ other courses with Coursera Plus subscription ($59/mo). Try Coursera Plus free for 7 days. See our Coursera pricing guide for more info.

Duration

4 weeks with 2 to 3 hours of content in each week

Work smarter, not harder – that’s the mantra of a million successful people. After all, you’ve only got so much to give, so why burn yourself out trying to give more energy when you could just work smarter? It’s what will keep you going in the long run and you’ll soon see – and feel – the benefits.

In this online time management training, the aim is to help individuals recognize what work is worth doing, and how much effort a certain task requires. While it’s great to give your all when working on a task, there is a thing called too much effort. This is a point where the amount of effort you’re exerting is in disproportion to the results you’re getting.

A University of California offered time management course, the content is rigorous and tested – a sure recipe for success.

Margaret Meloni, instructor at the University of California’s Irvine Division of Continuing Education takes you through this course, using her ample experience in the field to deliver course instruments in a way that they resonate with the student. She takes her time when teaching, and makes sure to value comprehension over quantity, being mindful to not jam too much into each session. Her compassion for learning and imparting knowledge truly makes her course stand out.

You Will Learn

• Planning for personal goals
• Planning for professional goals
• Crisis management
• Building a unique perspective in varying situations
• The barriers of successful time management – and how to overcome them
• Resource management with factor evaluation
• Recognize the importance of saying no – and when to do so
• Effective, stress-free delegation

User Feedback

“Outstanding course with a simple & practical suggestions on time management and improving personal & professional productivity. Narratives of clients is very well used to understand the concept. Thank you very much for making a difference in our personal & professional life through this course.”

Best for: Individuals who feel themselves to be burnt out and want to utilize their time more effectively – great for students and busy professionals

Other Useful Resources

• The Best Public Speaking Classes Online
• The Best Instructional Design Training Courses Online
• The Best Voice Over Training Courses Online
• The Best Photoshop Classes Online
• The Best Personal Development Courses Online

Final Thoughts

Balancing various aspects of life can be challenging, but mastering time management through online courses can transform how you get the most out of every minute, enhancing productivity and peace of mind.

These skills are key to success in any field, and the courses we’ve highlighted go beyond basic scheduling techniques. They explore the psychology of time use, offering insights into motivation and decision-making, and provide strategies to align your daily routines with your goals.

With these comprehensive online courses, you can quickly learn to manage your time more effectively, setting you on a path to personal and professional fulfillment.

The post The 7 Best Time Management Training Classes Online (2024) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

That’s why it’s so vital to have a good time management plan in place. By taking the time to plan your day and schedule your activities, you can make sure that you’re making the most of your time both in the classroom and out, helping you cut down on the obscenely long hours many teachers report working.

In the guide below, I’ll share some of my favorite time management tips for teachers that I’ve learned after spending years in education.

Time Management for Boosting Productivity | MEW Learning

This time management course offers clear, proven strategies to help you prioritize tasks, cut out distractions, and get more accomplished.

Enroll Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Teacher Time Management Tips & Ideas

1. Start your day with a plan

Before you begin each day, make sure you have a written plan for what you want to accomplish.

Personally, I recommend writing this plan at the end of the previous school day and then reviewing it in the morning before you start your day.

This way, you can hit the ground running as soon as you arrive at school and won’t waste any time getting started on your tasks.

This doesn’t have to be anything fancy or detailed; a simple list of the tasks you need to complete and goals for the day will suffice.

But by taking the time to think about what you need to do ahead of time, you can save yourself a lot of time and stress throughout the day.

2. Use a planner for long-term structure

As a teacher, having a planner with your lesson plans, meetings, key deadlines, and important dates is essential.

This will help you stay organized and on top of everything that’s happening both in and out of the classroom.

But in addition to using your planner for daily and weekly tasks, you can also use it to plan for larger projects that are due down the road.

For example, if you know you have a big Parent-Teacher Conference coming up in a few weeks, make sure to start planning for it now.

By setting aside planning time to do this, you can avoid scrambling at the last minute and feeling overwhelmed.

Not only that, but having a planner that outlines everything going on in your classroom can be useful if a substitute teacher has to step in at any point.

This way, they can easily follow your lesson plans and keep the students on track while you’re gone.

3. Prioritize tasks

There’s no shortage of tasks on your to-do list as a teacher.

And with so many different things that teachers manage, it can be tempting to try and do everything at once.

But the truth is, that’s just not possible. And when you try to take on too much at once, you end up feeling overwhelmed and stressed out.

Instead of trying to do everything at once, focus on one task at a time, from the most important and urgent to the least.

By prioritizing important tasks, you can ensure that you’re giving each task the attention it deserves and making progress on the things that are most essential.

In the excellent online time management class “Time Management for Boosting Productivity,” you can learn some highly effective tactics for prioritizing tasks in your daily life.

4. Do your hardest tasks first

Speaking of prioritizing your important tasks, that also usually means doing the most difficult tasks on your to do list first.

I know it can be tempting to push these tasks off until later, but the truth is, they’re not going to get any easier the longer you wait.

And the longer you put them off, the more anxious and stressed you’ll feel.

So instead of procrastinating, just bite the bullet and get started on your to do list.

You’ll be surprised at how much better you feel once you get them out of the way.

5. Set time limits for tasks

When you’re working on a task, it can be easy to lose track of time and end up spending much longer on it than you intended.

To avoid this, set a timer for yourself or your students and make sure you stick to it.

This will help you stay on track during the day in your classroom and ensure that you’re using your time efficiently.

6. Assign homework strategically to free up class time

When it comes to managing time in the classroom, one of the most important things experienced teachers learn is how to balance the repetition of key concepts in the classroom versus assigning homework to free up class time.

If you assign too much homework, students will feel overwhelmed and may not have enough time to complete it.

But if you don’t assign any homework, you’ll likely have to spend more time in the classroom rehashing concepts that could be better mastered at home by putting the information taught in class into practice.

The key is to find a balance between the two and assign homework strategically.

This way, you can make the most of your time in the classroom and ensure that students are mastering key concepts both at home and in school.

7. Use technology to be more efficient

These days, there are more tools for teachers than ever that can help you save time on everything from grading assignments to planning lectures.

From online gradebooks and quiz makers to lesson plan creators and digital calendars, there’s a tool out there to help with just about every aspect of your job.

And while it’s important to not get too reliant on technology, using it in moderation can definitely help you be more efficient and organized in your work.

So if you’re feeling overwhelmed by all the things you have to do as a teacher, consider using some technology to help you out.

8. Set routines for each day of the week

Having a well-established routine can go a long way to helping you more effectively manage your time as a teacher.

Many teachers have found it helpful to have a specific routine or theme for each day of the week.

For instance, Mondays might be for lesson planning for the upcoming week, Wednesdays might be for grading assignments, and Fridays could be for sending emails to parents recapping the week’s events.

Or you might have a different routine for each period of the day.

Whatever you decide, having a set routine will help you use your time more efficiently and make sure you’re covering all the bases in your job.

9. Know when to say “no”

Every teacher knows how easy it can be to get sucked into doing things that are outside of your job description.

Whether it’s joining a committee, volunteering for an after-school event, or something else, there are always going to be extra things that come up that you’re expected to do.

But it’s important to know your limits and not try to do too much. Otherwise, you’ll quickly find yourself feeling overwhelmed and bogged down.

So when you’re asked to do something that’s outside of your job, really think about whether or not you have the time to commit to it and a desire to do it.

If you do, go for it!

But if you don’t, don’t be afraid to say no.

It’s better to focus on doing a few things well than to try to do too many things and end up doing all of them poorly.

10. Delegate tasks when possible

At the end of the day, the buck stops with you as a teacher for how your classroom operates, but that doesn’t mean you have to do everything on your own.

If you have an assistant or aide in your classroom, make sure to delegate tasks to them when possible.

This will free up your time so you can focus on the things that only you can do, like lesson planning and grading.

And if you don’t have an assistant or aide, see if there are any other teachers in your school who you can collaborate with.

For instance, you might be able to team up to share resources and lesson plans.

And don’t be afraid to use your students for basic tasks like passing out materials or taking attendance.

Get them involved in the running of the classroom and you’ll be surprised at how much time it can save you while also teaching them some responsibility.

11. Take advantage of downtime

There will be moments throughout the day when you have some down time, whether it’s while students are completing an assignment or during a free period.

Instead of using this time to check your personal email or surf the internet, use it to get ahead on grading or do some other task that’s been weighing on you.

This way, you can use your time more efficiently and finish your work sooner.

12. Take breaks

It can be all too easy to let teaching take over every minute of your day, but it’s important to take some time for yourself.

Make sure to schedule in some breaks throughout the day, even if it’s just a few minutes here and there.

Use this time to step away from your work and clear your head.

You’ll come back feeling refreshed and ready to tackle whatever else is on your plate.

Taking breaks can also help you avoid the dreaded teacher burnout.

13. Keep your personal life on point

As a teacher, you give your all to your students and your job.

But it’s just as important to make sure you’re taking care of yourself, both mentally and physically.

If your personal life is a mess, it will quickly start to affect your work.

So make sure you’re maintaining a healthy lifestyle, spending time with loved ones, and doing things that make you happy outside of work.

This will help you be your best self when you’re at school and prevent burnout.

Final Thoughts

As a teacher, there are a million and one things to get done in a day. From lesson planning and classroom management to working with individual students and grading papers, the list of tasks never seems to end.

That’s why time management skills are so important for teachers.

By following these time management tips, you can take control of your time, get more done, and feel less stressed out in the process.

I also highly recommend checking out the online course “Time Management for Boosting Productivity“. It’s an in-depth class with 50+ video lessons on time management and productivity that everyone can learn something from.

So what are you waiting for? Start implementing these tips today and see how much easier your days become.

Have any questions about our time management tips for teachers? Want to add your own tip for building time management skills? Share your thoughts by leaving a comment below.

The post 13 Time Management Tips for Teachers to Be More Effective appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As a teacher, you’re already overworked (and likely underpaid) as it is. So, finding ways to save time grading can help you regain some of your valuable time so you can enjoy a life outside of school. The good news is, there are ways you can grade assignments more efficiently without sacrificing quality.

As someone who’s worked in eLearning for nearly 20 years and has numerous teachers in my network, I’ve put together a collection of highly effective tips for saving time on grading.

How to Save Time When Grading Student Work

Now that we’ve talked about why grades are important, let’s discuss some ways you can save time when grading student work.

1. Use technology to your advantage

Taking your classroom digital can help you significantly slash your grading time. In my opinion, it’s the single best way teachers can cut their grading time down significantly.

There are a number of digital resources available that can help you grade assignments more quickly and efficiently.

For example, online quiz makers and assessment tools can be a super easy and efficient way to administer tests as these tools grade tests and quizzes automatically. This frees up your time so you can focus on other tasks, like writing personalized feedback for students.

Another time-saving tech tool is a digital portfolio platform. These platforms allow students to submit their work electronically, which cuts down on paper waste and makes it easy for you to keep track of all assignments in one place. And, many of these platforms include features that make it easy to provide feedback directly on student work.

You can even use online gradebooks to keep track of student grades and provide feedback rather than doing it all by hand. These gradebooks often include features that automate the grading process, such as weighting assignments and calculating grades automatically.

The result is less work for you and better feedback for your students.

2. Get students involved in the grading process

Another great way to save time when grading is to get students involved in the process.

You can do this by teaching them how to grade their own or each other’s work. This can be especially helpful for assignments that are mostly objective, such as multiple-choice quizzes.

Of course, you’ll still need to check their work and ensure they’re being honest, but this can help cut down on your grading time.

Involving students actively in the grading process can also benefit them academically. They can learn how to identify their own strengths and weaknesses, as well as how to give and receive instant feedback that’s constructive and insightful.

3. Don’t grade everything

One of the biggest mistakes I’ve seen new teachers in particular make is thinking that they have to grade every single piece of work their students do.

This simply isn’t true.

In fact, grading every assignment can actually do more harm than good as it takes up a lot of time and can overwhelm students (and you!).

Instead of grading everything, focus on assessing the assignments that are most important. For example, you obviously want to grade major tests but not maybe every single homework item.

If an assignment doesn’t need to be graded in order to provide feedback, then don’t grade it.

For example, if you’re having students do a quick in-class writing exercise, there’s no need to grade every single one. You can simply read through them quickly and provide general feedback on what they did well and what needs improvement.

The key is to focus on the assignments that will give you the most information about student understanding and progress.

4. Create assignments that combine multiple subjects

Another way to save time when grading is to group subjects together into a single assignment for multiple grading opportunities.

For example, you could combine reading and writing skills with social sciences assignments. An essay on a social sciences topic could then be graded both as a writing assignment and as a social sciences assignment.

This can be an efficient way to grade as you’re able to kill two birds with one stone, so to speak.

Just be sure that the entire assignment is actually assessing what you want it to. You don’t want to overburden students or create an assignment that’s too difficult to complete.

5. Use rubrics

Rubrics are a grading tool that can be used for any type of assignment.

They break down an entire assignment into its various parts and detail the criteria for each part. This makes it easy to assess student work and provide feedback.

Rubrics can also be helpful for students as they can see exactly what is expected of them and what they need to do to earn a good grade.

When using rubrics, you can either create your own or find ones that have already been created. There are rubrics available for almost any type of assignment you can think of.

6. Focus on quality of assignments, not quantity

Does a math assignment really need to have 40 repetitive questions covering the same concept over and over in order to be effective?

Probably not.

Sure, repetition can be helpful for some things, but it’s not always necessary. In fact, it can often be counterproductive as it can lead to students getting bored and feeling like they’re just going through the motions.

It’s important to focus on quality over quantity when creating assignments.

A shorter assignment with 10-15 questions can be plenty if it’s well-designed and covers the material in an effective way.

The key is to focus on creating assignments that are engaging and cover the material in a way that’s most likely to lead to students understanding it.

7. Do spot checks in real-time with in-class work

One easy way to cut down on time spent grading is to spot check your students’ work during class as you go through your lessons.

For example, if you’re working through some math problems, you can have students solve them on their own and then randomly choose a few to come up and solve on the board. Or they can hold up their answers for you to quickly check.

This will help you quickly assess who’s understanding the material and who needs more help.

It also allows you to provide immediate feedback and answer any questions students may have.

Doing spot checks like this throughout the semester can save you a lot of time in the long run as you won’t have to grade as much material at the end.

Final Thoughts

If you’re spending hours and hours grading assignments every week, you really need to make it a priority to find ways to save time. Otherwise, you’ll quickly become bogged down and burned out.

By following the tips in this article, you can make grading more efficient and less time-consuming without sacrificing quality.

So take the opportunity to implement a few of these time saving tips and see how they work for you. You may just find that your grading load becomes a lot more manageable.

How much time do you spend grading assignments each week? Let us know by leaving a comment below.

The post 7 Ways Savvy Teachers Save Time Grading Assignments appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Step-by-Step Guide to Accessing the 60-Day Trial

See if the Deal is Currently Available

Noggin doesn’t offer the 60-day free trial year round. It’s typically available during the Christmas holiday season (like at the time of this writing), and may be available for limited times during other promos throughout the year. You can check here to see if the offer is currently available.

Visit the Special Link

Start by clicking on our exclusive link. This will take you directly to Noggin’s promotional page where the 60-day free trial is available.

Create an Account

You’ll need to create an account if you don’t already have one. This involves providing some basic information and setting up login credentials.

Enter Payment Details

While the trial is free, Noggin requires payment details upfront. Rest assured, you won’t be charged until the trial period ends, and you can cancel anytime. If you do decide to keep the app after the trial period is up, you’ll be billed at the regular Noggin pricing.

Download the App

Once your account is set up, download the Noggin app on your preferred device – be it iOS, Android, Amazon Kindle, or a smart TV.

Start Exploring

Dive into Noggin’s extensive library of interactive games, educational shows, and books. Remember, everything is ad-free, so your child’s learning experience is uninterrupted.

Making the Most of Your Noggin Free Trial

By taking a smart approach to the 60-day trial period, you can make an informed decision about Noggin’s long-term place in your child’s learning journey.

• Explore the Full Range of Content: Noggin boasts a wide range of educational materials. Spend time exploring different categories – from interactive games that enhance problem-solving skills to educational shows with kids’ favorite Nickelodeon characters that make learning fun. Each category offers unique benefits, so try them all to understand what captivates your child the most.
• Establish a Routine: Consistency is key in learning. Use the trial period to establish a routine. Allocate specific times for your child to engage with Noggin. This not only helps in setting healthy screen time habits but also integrates learning seamlessly into their daily life.
• Engage with Your Child: Take an active role in your child’s Noggin experience. Watch shows with them, discuss the stories, and encourage them to share what they’ve learned. This not only enhances the learning experience but also strengthens your bond.
• Track Progress and Interests: Observe which activities and topics your child gravitates towards. Noggin offers a wide range, from science and math to art and storytelling. Understanding their interests can help you guide their learning journey beyond the app.
• Use the Parental Features: Noggin comes with parental controls and features that allow you to track your child’s progress and manage the content they access. Familiarize yourself with these tools to ensure a safe and appropriate learning environment.
• Plan for Post-Trial: Towards the end of the trial, evaluate your experience. If you find Noggin beneficial, consider subscribing. If not, ensure you know how to cancel the subscription to avoid any charges.

Final Thoughts

This 60-day free trial offer from Noggin is an excellent opportunity to introduce your child to a world of fun and learning without any commitment.

Whether you’re a parent looking for quality educational content or an educator seeking to supplement your teaching tools, this trial period is an invaluable resource.

You can read our full in-depth Noggin review if you want to learn more about this app before you try it.

Don’t miss out on this limited-time offer. Click here to start your 60-day Noggin adventure today!

The post How to Get a 60 Day Noggin Free Trial appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

While Noggin pricing is already very affordable, this deal offers the lowest price of the year, bringing the cost of an annual subscription down to a one-time payment of just $47.

Why Try Noggin?

Noggin – Interactive learning with the trusted characters your kids love.

With over 1,000 educational games, videos, and activities developed by experts, Noggin offers a fun, interactive, and highly effective learning experience for kids ages 2 to 7.

Start Your Free Trial!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Noggin, a subscription-based educational app, has been a game-changer in my experience with preschool-age children. It’s a vibrant platform that opens up a world of learning for kids aged 2-7, covering everything from basic literacy and numeracy to social skills like empathy and kindness.

As pointed out in our Noggin review, “the app features games, shows, and books all specially created to help your child develop their understanding of math, reading, and social sciences.”

As a user, I’ve found its cross-platform availability incredibly convenient. Whether on iOS, Android, Amazon Kindle, or smart TVs, Noggin is just a Wi-Fi or mobile data connection away. This accessibility means that engaging educational content is always at your child’s fingertips.

The app is a treasure trove of interactive games, ad-free shows, and a vast collection of books, all featuring beloved characters from the Nick Jr. universe. Characters like Dora the Explorer and the PAW Patrol team aren’t just entertaining; they’re a bridge for kids to connect with essential learning concepts.

What sets Noggin apart in my eyes is the expert design of its content. It’s not just about academic learning; there’s a strong focus on socioemotional development. Activities in Noggin encourage children to be empathetic friends, thoughtful learners, and caring family members.

Navigating the app, children can choose from a variety of activities. Whether it’s diving into an interactive game, enjoying an educational show, or exploring the extensive library of books tailored for early readers, Noggin offers a balanced mix of fun and learning.

Details of Noggin’s Holiday Deal

The 2023 Noggin Holiday deal is live at the time of this article’s publication. So far, an end date hasn’t been officially announced, but the company has been clear that this is a very limited-time deal.

This holiday deal is a game-changer. The 50% discount on the annual subscription opens up a year of learning opportunities at $47 off the regular price.

For those new to Noggin who aren’t ready to pay just yet, the 60-day free trial is a no-risk introduction to its rich educational content. This is twice as long as the regular 30-day trial they offer during the rest of the year.

Get This Deal Before It’s Gone

Dive into a year of learning for 50% off the regular price of Noggin or if you’re not ready to commit just yet, you can try Noggin free for 60 days and see the magic unfold.

Hurry, this special holiday offer is only available for a limited time! Click here to grab it before it’s gone

The post Noggin’s Holiday Deal is the Perfect Gift for Kids appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

However, many LMS vendors stick with SCORM and don’t use the newer – and more promising – Tin Can (xAPI) format. In fact, a survey conducted with 150 learning and development professionals found that 62 percent of them utilized SCORM in their practices.

As an experienced instructional designer who’s created a number of online courses and modules, I’ve navigated the complexities of creating SCORM-compliant content and understand the importance of this standard in the eLearning industry. In this article, I’m going to demystify the process and provide you with practical, straightforward methods to develop SCORM packages.

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

1. Use SCORM compliant authoring tools to deliver appealing content

First of all, let’s discuss what software you trust for shaping up your courses to create a SCORM package.

If this is just an ad hoc deck with some nice extras, and you are not particularly interested in viewer statistics and reporting, PowerPoint seems like a universal remedy.

If you seek deeper insights, a logical move is to go beyond PowerPoint and employ third party authoring software and eLearning platforms. Microsoft’s all-in-one solution is always a soft option, but it can’t cover all creative needs and specific eLearning features such as performance tracking, assessment, grading, quizzing, etc.

In fact, it’s the tracking options that matter when discussing eLearning standards. SCORM defines how web-based training content can be played back and tracked by SCORM-friendly learning management systems. Another aspect is packaging the content into an easily transferable archive.

Most industry frontrunners like iSpring Suite, Adobe Captivate, Articulate Storyline, Trivantis Lectora, and others offer full SCORM compliance so you can save a course for LMSs in just a couple clicks.

Apart from the quality of collaboration tools, quizzes, effects, and interactions, eLearning software solutions are judged by the criteria of interoperability and scalability. Some vendors include both authoring tools and learning management systems as part of their comprehensive product line. Works great if you are loyal to a specific brand, causes discrepancies if you prefer diversity.

Before you get carried away with a captivating character library or nice-looking triggers, make sure you don’t fall into the vendor lock-in trap. A course created in Program A should play back flawlessly in Program B; otherwise, you are facing a dead end.

Another major concern here is quality. After you’ve handcrafted all the bells and whistles to support your course flow, it would be a shame to lose any effects in the conversion process. Check out solution providers’ compatibility notes to be on the safe side.

Here is to sum up the advantages and disadvantages of this scenario to create a SCORM course.

Pros

• No need to shop for a standalone presentation-to-SCORM converter
• Most authoring products integrate easily with LMSs
• These tools have great functionality so your content will look glossy and professional.

Cons

• Content authoring tools may be pricey, especially if you are aiming at the high end
• Despite advanced integration policies taken on board by most vendors, there is still a risk of quality losses and incompatibilities.

2. Use a converter to turn your deck into a SCORM archive

On a sidenote, a SCORM container can accommodate various content types, be it video, Flash, HTML, slides or PDF files.

You might ask: Why not just open an HTML page in a learning management system of choice and save the conversion efforts?

Well, you can definitely do so, but again you won’t be able to monitor learner’s progress, keep viewer statistics and receive feedback. From this perspective, the whole point of having an LMS is missing.

In case you don’t want to get involved with a sophisticated – or costly – third party authoring tool, your better choice could be a converter or a free add-on like Microsoft Office Mix (installed on top of PowerPoint 2013 onwards).

If you ask Google to fetch some free PowerPoint-to-SCORM course converters, you’ll get a plethora of available choices at your fingertips. However, beware of technical complications and limitations. There is no such thing as free lunch.

For instance, if you go with Office Mix, which is a powerful tool shipped free of charge, you will surely enjoy the authoring experience. However, some of the visuals and interactive elements are doomed to get lost during conversion. Not to mention that analytics will no longer be available in Office Mix.

Note also that Microsoft has removed SCORM conversion from the latest version of Office Mix. I hope that they will reinstate the functionality shortly.

Among others, iSpring Free is known to be a lossless conversion tool that supports all the frills PowerPoint has to offer. If you want the output to look exactly the way you conceived it, iSpring’s solution is, by all means, worthy of consideration.

Pros

• Free conversion tools are readily available on the web
• You do not get stuck with a particular authoring tool
• Minimized compatibility risks.

Cons

• No software solution on the planet can sign off on a 100% insurance policy against quality loss.

3. Do some heavy lifting and generate the package on your own

Whether you’d like to prepare several courses or a standalone lesson for display in an LMS, it’s actually pretty easy to compile a unified SCORM archive with no extra tools involved.

Here is what you have to do to create a single package/course

Generating a SCORM content archive is pretty much about the manifest file, a package inventory item named imsmanifest.xml.

Let’s go through the elements of the .xml file:

1. <manifest> and its parameters

Identifier: This one ensures the course doesn’t get confused with other courses with somewhat similar names.

Version: Your course version, e.g. version=”1.0″

The rule of thumb here is to equip your course with a unique identifier to avoid mixups. A simple combination of name + creation date should do it.

Here is a sample:

<manifest identifier="course_1_01_05_2016" xmlns="http://www.imsproject.org/xsd/imscp_rootv1p1p2" xmlns:adlcp="https://www.adlnet.org/xsd/adlcp_rootv1p2" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xmlns:lom="http://www.imsglobal.org/xsd/imsmd_rootv1p2p1" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.imsproject.org/xsd/imscp_rootv1p1p2 imscp_rootv1p1p2.xsd http://www.imsglobal.org/xsd/imsmd_rootv1p2p1 imsmd_rootv1p2p1.xsd https://www.adlnet.org/xsd/adlcp_rootv1p2 adlcp_rootv1p2.xsd">

2. <organizations>

In this node, insert a default point and make sure it coincides with the indetifier name.

<organizations default="Course_1_organization">
<organization identifier="Course_1_organization">

3. <title>

Provide your course name as the title. It’s as simple as that.

4. <item>

With a single course, it’s not a big deal. It only gets tricker if you have multiple materials in a bundle. In that case you’ll have to generate an item for every module of the course.

5. <resources>/<resource>

This is, in fact, a list of all the essentials that account for the integrity of your eLearning course. Open the node for all resources – <resources>.

Don’t forget to create a resource node for each separate module.

<resource identifier="resource" type="webcontent" adlcp:scormtype="sco" href="res/start_1.html">

Make sure that the “identifer” parameter matches the “identifierref” parameter of the associated <item> node.

Type should be indicated as “webcontent”. “href” leads to the html page that opens up when a visitor logs in. The “scormtype” of the resource has to be set as “sco” if this mentioned resource corresponds with the item to be launched. If this is not the case, it must be defined as “asset”. “Assets” don’t need a “href” parameter.

You should have at least one file/href per item so you can add them based on your needs.

Last but not least, you have to close the open nodes: </resources></manifest>. Finally, make sure the manifest file created by the reload editor is the same one that we generated.

Download a sample SCORM archive for further reference →

Need to bundle multiple packages?

In some scenarios, such as a series of presentations or a multilevel course, you may want to pack several educational materials into a single SCORM package. Here are a few easy steps to follow:

Step 1. Unzip courses into separate folders and see to it that each and every one includes an imsmanifest.xml file.

Step 2. In every imsmanifest.xml file, use CTRL+C to copy the index file names and content assets.

Step 3. After you are done copying, create a new parent folder and place all merged SCORM packages therein.

Step 4. Operating with the SCORM 1.2 standard, you should include five standard files into the parent folder. Four of these are .xsd files that don’t require any modification. The fifth file is the notorious .imsmanifest.xml, which you will need to change so it complies with the package.

Step 5. Modify the imsmanifest.xml of the parent file so it refers to the subfiles. The change should be made in the item tag and the organization. Plus, ensure there is a row for all the sub-folders in place.

Step 6. Before you finally zip the package, make sure the item identifiers are precise and relevant. Also, they should be similar to the other corresponding resource identifiers. Here’s a sample code:

<?xml version="1.0? standalone="no"?>
<manifest identifier="course_1_01_05_2016" xmlns="http://www.imsproject.org/xsd/imscp_rootv1p1p2? xmlns:adlcp="https://www.adlnet.org/xsd/adlcp_rootv1p2? xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.imsproject.org/xsd/imscp_rootv1p1p2 imscp_rootv1p1p2.xsd http://www.imsglobal.org/xsd/imsmd_rootv1p2p1 imsmd_rootv1p2p1.xsd https://www.adlnet.org/xsd/adlcp_rootv1p2 adlcp_rootv1p2.xsd">
 
<metadata>
<schema>ADL SCORM</schema>
<schemaversion>1.2</schemaversion>
<adlcp:location>imsmetadata.xml</adlcp:location>
</metadata>
 
<organizations default="Course_1_organization">
<organization identifier="Course_1_organization" structure="hierarchical">
<title>Multi sco sample</title>
<item identifier="Course_1" identifierref="C_1" isvisible="true">
<title>Introduction</title>
<adlcp:masteryscore>80</adlcp:masteryscore>
</item>
<item identifier="Course_2" identifierref="C_2" isvisible="true">
<title>Chapter 1</title>
<adlcp:prerequisites type="aicc_script">Course_2</adlcp:prerequisites>
<adlcp:masteryscore>80</adlcp:masteryscore>
</item>
<item identifier="Course_3" identifierref="C_3" isvisible="true">
<title>Chapter 2</title>
<adlcp:prerequisites type="aicc_script">"Course_3</adlcp:prerequisites>
<adlcp:masteryscore>80</adlcp:masteryscore>
</item>
</organization>
</organizations>
 
<resources>
<resource identifier="C_1" type="webcontent" adlcp:scormtype="sco" href="course_multiple/res1/start_1.html">
<file href="course_multiple/res1/start_1.html"/>
</resource>
<resource identifier="C_2" type="webcontent" adlcp:scormtype="sco" href="course_multiple/res2/start_2.html">
<file href="course_multiple/res2/start_2.html"/>
</resource>
<resource identifier="C_3" type="webcontent" adlcp:scormtype="sco" href="course_multiple/res3/start_3.html">
<file href="course_multiple/res3/start_3.html"/>
</resource>
</resources>
</manifest>

Step 7. Last but not least, archive the parent folder with all the subfiles, and voila! Test the course in your learning management system. If you see all the links in the navigation panel, everything should be OK. Don’t hesitate to double check and go through the entire course.

Download a sample SCORM package →

Pros

• You have full control of the process
• There is no need to roam the web for solutions

Cons

The job requires pinpoint accuracy. If you are pressed for time, authoring tools and converters may be a smarter choice.

How do you create SCORM course content? As you can see, it’s no rocket science, even if opting for manual packaging. The most important factor is that your content and visuals remain intact and reach the target audience on time and with a positive impact.

A Final Word on How to Create SCORM Content

With the tips above, you can create a SCORM package that will work great for publishing your online courses.

If you’re looking to take your instructional design skills to the next level, I highly recommend looking into the Professional Certificate in Instructional Design program from Emeritus.

In only 5 months, you can learn all about the basics of instructional design, popular ID theories and models, and best practices for creating eLearning experiences.

You can learn more about the program and request a brochure at this link.

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Have any questions about how to create SCORM courses? Comment below and I’ll help.

The post How to Create SCORM Content: 3 Ways to Make a SCORM Content Package appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As an eLearning professional with extensive experience in recording voice-overs, I’m a strong believer that you can’t overstate the critical role a vocal booth plays in producing high-quality audio content. Whether you’re a seasoned eLearning developer, an aspiring voice artist, or a podcast enthusiast, the right booth can transform your recordings, minimizing ambient noise and creating that crisp, clear sound that captivates listeners.

But here’s the thing — getting access to a great vocal booth can be a bit like finding hidden treasure.

In this article, I’m going to guide you through some of the best ways to acquire a vocal booth that suits your needs. Whether you’re dreaming of owning one for your home studio, itching to craft a DIY masterpiece, or considering the convenience of renting time at a local studio, I’ve got you covered.

1. Budget Portable Sound Booths on VocalBoothToGo.com

VocalBoothToGo.com manufactures low-cost portable sound booths that start at under $1,000. These sound booths have a metal frame support structure that is easy to assemble and disassemble. The sound booth frames are covered by a fitted acoustic blanket material. This material provides up to 80% noise reduction and an echo-free environment for recording. Outside noise is reduced by 10dB and the blanket material suppresses humming noises.

Here are two examples of low-cost portable recording booths they offer that I love.

The Acoustic Vocal Booth 4 (AVB4) is a one-person walk-in booth, with these features:

• Inexpensive: Sells for $1,298.78 (price as of September 2023).
• Portability: Assembles quickly in minutes without tools. Comes with a carry bag for the metal frame and a separate carry bag for the acoustic blankets.
• Sound Reduction: Creates a reverberation-free recording environment with 80% noise reduction.
• Lighting: Includes a noise-free LED light and adapter.
• Window: One clear vinyl window is installed in the door wall.

The Acoustic Vocal Booth (AVB63) is a two-person walk-in booth, with these features:

• Modestly-Priced: Sells for $1,188.68 (price as of September 2023).
• Spacious: Designed for two people with the dimensions of 80 inches long, 40 inches wide, and 80 inches tall.
• Lightweight: Easy to carry in the trunk of a regular-sized automobile or to ship by common carrier. The total weight is 100 lbs.
• Lighting: Includes two noise-free LED lights and adapters.
• Windows: Two clear vinyl windows are installed in the door walls.

Best For: These vocal booths are made for those who need portability to do their work. These portable sound booths are frequently used at conventions to record real-time announcements. They have been used to create isolation rooms for virtual reality games at gaming conventions. They can be easily set up and taken down for use to record in any office space.

2. Premium Sound Booths on VocalBooth.com

VocalBooth.com manufactures a portable professional sound room that starts at $3,750 with the standard features package, with delivery in the U.S. by standard freight included (price as of September 2023). This silver series vocal booth is a single-wall design that is commonly used for extra sound isolation, such as when recording a singer, within a larger recording studio environment. It can also be used as a stand-alone booth for voice-over recordings.

The dimensions are 48 inches wide by 48 inches depth by 82 inches interior (88 inches exterior) height. The door makes an airtight seal when closed and has a 12-inch high by 24-inch wide window installed. For easier portability, optional caster wheels are available, which add four more inches to the height.

The standard package features include:

• Studio Foam Sound Insulation: The inside walls are covered with two-inch pyramid studio foam that is charcoal-colored and A-level fire-rated.
• Ventilation: Comes with active ventilation that uses a high-capacity, silent-running fan that can be left on when recording. Adaptors are available to connect this booth to a recording studio’s HVAC system.
• Cable Ports: The walls have cable and electric pass-through ports.
• Lighting: Comes with three, silent, lighting fixtures
• Finish: The exterior of the booth is finished in an executive gray color.

Best For: This sound booth is more solid than a blanket booth. Even though it can be moved around on its optional caster wheels, it is more of a permanent sound booth not meant to be taken apart once it is assembled. The built-in ventilation system is innovative and works well.

3. Buy a New or Used Sound Booth on eBay

On eBay you can find plenty of choices of new and used sound booths. They range in price from just under $200 to the top-of-the-line double-walled professional WhisperRoom brand at almost $6,000.

The cheapest vocal booth that I found for sale on eBay was $160.00. For that price, you will get what looks like a shower stall with thick canvas curtains for the walls. The support frame is made from PVC tubing. The curtains hang down from the PVC tubing as a shower curtain would. The sound isolation is minimal but the curtain material does prevent any sound reflections coming off the interior walls of the room, which might add unwanted reverb to a voice recording.

For the top-of-the-line, I found a WhisperRoom MDL 4260 E model that was previously-owned and listed on eBay for sale at $5,890. A brand-new WhisperRoom sound booth of this same model costs $7.395. For that kind of money, you get a double-walled booth with excellent sound isolation and quiet ventilation. It is large enough to accommodate one person, with the interior dimensions of 2.5 feet by 3.5 feet and an interior height of six-foot-eight inches. This room offers supreme sound isolation, which is what you are paying for. It reduces sound at the frequency of 125 Hz by 30 dB and at the frequency of 1,000 Hz or higher by 60 dB or more.

Best For: People who know what they want, and who are looking for a bargain are likely to find one on eBay. Be sure to factor into your decision the cost of shipping the sound booth to your location and any assembly that may be required.

4. Do-It-Yourself (DIY) Sound Booth

I have to admit that I am more of the do-it-yourself (DIY) type of guy. A sound booth is the perfect DIY project because the professional rooms are very expensive. You can achieve nearly the same thing for less than one-quarter of the price if you build a sound room yourself.

I once built a very effective sound room out of materials I found for free, which worked extremely well to record punk bands in my basement. The reason I know that it worked well is that I never had the neighbors call the police due to my loud noise, even when the bands played at nearly deafening levels.

Sound isolation is not that difficult to achieve if you have plenty of space and lots of sound-deadening materials. I hung thick carpeting in the walls of my found-materials sound booth and allowed a one-inch gap between the layers. The sound would penetrate the first layer, get deadened by the carpet, and then have to travel through the air to be deadened again by another layer of hanging carpet.

I found that this worked quite well with three layers of very thick carpet. If you are going to try this be sure to use fire-retardant chemicals on all the materials that you install.

The trickier part is to put in ventilation so you can breathe in the room and the ventilation system does not transfer sound in or out of the sound booth. Sound travels by vibrating air molecules, so where the air goes, the sound can follow. Use a baffling system to let the air pass, by having it go around corners, and the sound can be caught by the baffling materials since sound waves flow in a straight line.

I found some helpful videos on YouTube that show how to construct a decent sound booth for recording voice-overs.

Here is the video that discusses the options of how to make a low-cost sound booth in a home including how to make a budget DIY vocal booth using special sound-absorbing blankets. The framing that holds up the blanket is made from standard PVC pipe and connectors.

The total cost of the materials for this vocal booth will be around $350 to $400.

Here are the parts needed for this DIY project:

• 4 – Acoustic Blankets →
• 14 – One-Inch T-Joints →
• 8 – One-Inch U-Joints →
• 24 – Shower Curtain Rings →
• 1 – PVC pipe cutter →
• 4 – Clamps →
• ~ 6 – Four-foot length, one-inch diameter PVC pipe →
• 13 – Five-foot length, one-inch diameter PVC pipe →

For those who are a bit more ambitious, here is a video that shows how to build a home sound booth for around $500, out of lumber and sound-absorbent acoustic foam tiles.

For this booth, complete building instructions with diagrams and a materials list are found on the website of Murrant.ca.

Best For: People who are a hands-on type of person who likes to build things and those on a limited budget who need to create a working sound booth for as little money as possible.

5. Rent a Professional Voice-Over Studio

Professional recording studios rent for $50 to $500 per hour. The hourly rate includes the cost of an audio engineer to run the recording equipment and you will have to bring your recording media or buy it from the studio. Search on Yelp to find recording studios in your area.

For example, I searched on Yelp for the “Best vocal booth in Jersey City, NJ” and found these studios listed:

• Long Island Sound Studios
• Degraw Sound
• Lessons & Sessions
• Brewery Recording Studio
• Skyroom Studio

There were many other choices. Any one of them would be a reasonable place to record a voice-over, if you can afford their hourly rental rates. To find some voice-over recording studios in your area, just search on Yelp for “best vocal booth” along with the name of your city.

Recording voice-overs requires less technical skill and microphone placement work than what is needed for an audio engineer to record a band. You may get a better rate if you find a recording studio that specializes in voice-overs. The rental rate may be less for a small vocal booth when compared to renting out a full sound recording studio room Many recording studios have rooms with enough space for a full band and have a smaller vocal booth within the space. When doing voice-overs, you do not need such a large room.

Sometimes, recording studios offer a “block-rate” discounted deal when you pay for a group of hours in advance. Other studios may offer discounts for last-minute bookings of time that is not scheduled. You may get a discount if you can go to the studio in a short moment’s notice. You may be able to find a deal like these if you shop around.

If you just want to try some voice-over recording with rented gear, you can rent equipment for recording, a microphone, and there is also the chance to rent out some vocal booths from the companies that sell them. Vocal Booths to Go rents out booths for $150 to $600 per week that depends on the type and the size, plus shipping charges. Many conferences and conventions, which need a temporary room for audio interviews at the event, use this solution.

You may be able to record your voice-overs at a local community college if they have a music program. Rehearsal rooms at schools are a decent alternative if you cannot afford the cost of a voice booth in a professional recording studio. You can bring some sound-absorbing material with you and temporarily hang it up in a rehearsal room at school to improve the voice recording.

Another idea to save money is to use moving blankets that you can rent from a self-moving or storage place. They are a very cheap substitute for professional acoustic blankets because they are made of similar materials.

Conclusion

If you’re not planning on renting some time at a professional recording studio, you can use any of the techniques I described above to buy or build a vocal booth. After you solve the challenge of having a place to record your voice-overs, you are also going to need some voice-over equipment to use to make the recordings.

Then, add a high-quality microphone that has a good design for recording voice-overs in a home recording studio setting. After that, you should be all set and ready to record everything from voice overs on Google Slides to YouTube video narration and more.

Conduct a few test recordings in your new room and then add more sound-absorbing material if needed. Make adjustments until you get a recorded sound that has a very high degree of presence for the voice. You want to capture a strong, clear sound with no reflective sound from the walls or natural reverb from the room where you are making the recording.

The goal is to make the voice-over recording very present without it sounding like it was recorded in a specific type of room. You don’t want it to sound like it was recorded in a small stuffy space either. The idea is, that the sound of the voice is all you hear. There is no distraction and there is no indication of what type of room it was recorded in at all.

When you do this well, the voice has that presence, which gives it a dynamic sense of power, and you can hear the difference.

Want to learn more about the art of voice work? Check out our guide to the top voice acting classes online.

The post 5 Best Ways to Get a Vocal Booth for Your Voice-Overs appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As someone who’s been working in instructional design for nearly 20 years, I’m going to answer all of the following questions in depth in this guide:

• What is instructional design?
• What do instructional designers create and do?
• What are the components of instructional design?
• What are the different instructional design models?
• Why is instructional design important in education?

What is Instructional Design?

Instructional design, or instructional system design (ISD), is the process of creating learning experiences in such a way that knowledge and skills are acquired and applied. The process involves assessing needs, devising a method, developing materials, and evaluating their usefulness.

Or as I like to explain it more simply when someone asks me, instructional design is the construction of instructional materials, modules, or lessons.

Instructional designers use academic theories and models of individuals’ learning and the cognitive processes that underpin the learning experience. These approaches ensure that instruction is as efficient as possible when transmitting knowledge or teaching skills to students.

To assure the quality of instruction, the instructional design process includes:

• Evaluating the specific needs of the students
• Establishing the outcome goals and key objectives of the training
• Developing and arranging assessment tasks
• Constructing teaching and learning activities

Some examples of instructional design models include ADDIE (Analysis, Design, Development, Implementation, and Evaluation), The Kirkpatrick Model, Bloom’s Taxonomy, ASSURE, and Situated Learning Theory.

What are the Components of Instructional Design?

While many different instructional design methods and procedures exist, many elements are the same. They include analysis, design, development, and evaluation.

1. Analysis

The parameters for building a course vary for different groups of learners. Adults, for example, are always interested in why they should learn anything and like to be self-directed. As a result, it’s critical to keep this in mind while creating a course for adults.

Similarly, I’ve found that building online courses for children differs greatly from designing training programs for adults because children rely on explanation.

2. Design

The student should properly appraise themselves by the end of the course. So how you design performance, conditions, and specified criteria should help them achieve the goal.

Well-defined objectives help the instructor select appropriate material, methods, media, and assessments.

3. Development

After the first two elements, the most crucial aspect is developing your material. It should contain a pre-planned exercise, a presentation, assessments, and comments from the students. Effective instructional materials should include easy-to-follow lessons, multimedia elements, and activities that help the student to understand and remember the content.

Learners are more likely to enroll in a course if knowledge is broken down into tiny, easy-to-understand chunks.

4. Evaluation

You can use a pre-test or one of the formative or summative evaluation criteria to determine whether the learner has grasped the material.

At the end of the course, learners should be assessed and given timely feedback to understand their knowledge levels.

It will help them determine whether or not to enroll in additional training courses to improve their abilities.

Instructional Design Models

To fulfill instructional goals, an instructional design model gives principles for organizing acceptable educative scenarios to accomplish instructional goals. Such models include ADDIE, Kirkpatrick, Bloom’s Taxonomy, and ASSURE.

Let’s look at some popular instructional design models.

The ADDIE Model

The ADDIE model is specifically created to enhance teaching with technology resources. It is presently employed in various instructional design procedures for e-learning.

It began in the mid-1970s as a military training project (USA) at the University of Florida (USA). However, it has expanded and adapted over time to meet current demands and is still very commonly used by instructional designers.

Its name is an abbreviation for the several stages of the process. As shown below, the scope is broad and flexible enough to meet any unique requirement:

Analysis Phase

During this phase, the designer’s focus is on the students to create a program that matches each student’s or participant’s degree of competence and intelligence. The analysis phase guarantees that what they already know is not repeated.

Instead, the focus is on topics and lessons that pupils have yet to investigate and learn. Instructors discriminate between what students already know and what they should know after finishing the course during this phase.

Design Phase

How will you present the course? This is when you put together the structural framework that will form the program you’re working on.

It entails having clear ideas on the strategy, approach, and path forward, as well as the deadlines to reach each goal and the resources to use.

Development Phase

This phase entails getting down to business and creating the course content and training materials. In the development stage, you prepare the content to be used and adapt it to the possibilities afforded by e-learning education once you decide on the style and manner you want to impart specific knowledge.

Implementation Phase

Once you established the goal, the path has been clearly outlined, and you can launch the course on your learning management system. It’s important to remember that all previous work has been done to ensure that this phase runs smoothly.

However, it is also critical that the method of instruction be in perfect alignment with the previously stated methodology and the tools employed.

Evaluation Phase

It is the final step where you will assess the effectiveness of the entire instructional design process. It comprises forms for students to appraise the applicability of the program they followed and the work of the e-learning teacher when putting it into practice.

The Kirkpatrick Model

The Kirkpatrick Methodology uses four tiers of criteria to measure aptitude, considering any type of training, whether informal or official.

This model was created by Dr. Donald Kirkpatrick (1924–2014) in the 1950s. The model can be used before, during, and after training to demonstrate the value of training to It is divided into four levels:

1. Reaction

This level aims to assess how people respond to the training model by asking questions that reveal the learners’ thinking.

Questions will determine whether the participant enjoyed their experience and found the program’s content relevant in their career.

2. Learning

This level of evaluation is used to determine how far learners have progressed in terms of competence, knowledge, and mindset.

Compared to level one, this level is significantly more difficult and time-consuming.

3. Transfer

This level examines how the learner’s behavior in class has changed after finishing the program.

Assessing the change allows you to see if the knowledge, mindset, or abilities given in the program are being applied in the learning environment.

4. Results

Level four measures the overall performance of the learning model by measuring elements such as involvement in the classroom and results, which is commonly regarded as the program’s primary purpose.

Bloom’s Taxonomy

Bloom’s Taxonomy is organized in a hierarchy, and like many other theories, it supports the premise that learning is based on existing knowledge and skills.

Each learning outcome must be met before going on to the next level.

• Remembering: entails extracting earlier knowledge from long-term memory and making connections to help with current comprehension.
• Understanding: entails employing ways to infer conclusions from existing data, such as summarizing and analyzing concepts, comparing message meaning, and interpreting both oral and written texts.
• Applying: entails putting the learning approach into action.
• Analyzing: requires breaking down information into valuable components while ensuring that each element is related to the ultimate purpose.
• Critiquing: material based on the learning criteria is part of evaluating.
• Creating: the concepts into a new structure to generate a meaningful thinking pattern.

ASSURE

ASSURE is an instructional design paradigm that aims to improve teaching and learning effectiveness. The abbreviation “ASSURE” stands for the different processes in the model.

Each stage is described in detail below.

A – Analyze Learners

The teacher should assess the characteristics of her students as the first stage in the procedure. There should be an emphasis on student characteristics linked to the targeted learning outcomes.

S – State Standards and Objectives

After analyzing the learner’s characteristics, the teacher must state the learning module’s criteria and objectives. This statement outlines what the students will accomplish due to the instruction.

S – Select Strategies, Technology, Media, and Materials

Given your learning objectives, you’ll need to choose instructional methodologies, technology, and media to help you achieve your goals.

U – Utilize Technology, Media, and Materials

This step in the ASSURE process is devising a strategy for implementing the technology, medium, and content you’ve chosen.

Like the rest of the instructional steps, you must ensure that your plans contribute to achieving the goals you’ve set.

R – Require Learner Participation

This step necessitates that you devise a strategy for actively engaging your students in the content you’re teaching. This needs to be determined at both the class and individual levels.

E – Evaluate and Revise

The final phase in the ASSURE procedure is where you evaluate the impact of your teaching on student learning. This involves reviewing your teaching methods and the technology, media, and resources you employed to make certain the learning objective is being achieved in the most effective manner.

Situated Learning Theory

Situated learning is based on psychology, sociology, cognitive science, and anthropology, among other topics. These learning encounters cannot take place in a vacuum. Situated learning theory highlights the importance of cognitive apprentices learning from experts.

When creating instruction, keep the following in mind:

• The most effective learning happens when learners are given an issue to solve and must think and act like experts.
• Realistic and situation-specific problems are required in learning.
• The instructor is a role model and coach instead of a lecturer.
• They’re also in charge of breaking down knowledge into small parts to help students solve challenges.
• Reflection, discussion, and evaluative thinking must be encouraged in the classroom.
• Even if most of the issues are group activities, students must actively participate in the scenario.
• The information learned through contextual and real-life activities is the “content” of a course, not neat bundles of information delivered by the instructor.

Why is Instructional Design Important in Education?

The goal of instructional design is to specify the fundamental factors that instructors must consider during the development of an educational program. The program will depend on the tools and resources available.

Instructional design is cost-effective

When it comes to establishing the curriculum plan, instructional designers use a thorough approach, zeroing in on the learning requirements that will yield the best results.

As a result, institutions avoid wasting money on training that does not change behavior. The cost of developing these tailored solutions, which are created from the ground up using instructional design principles, is swiftly repaid through effective learning that leads to results.

Instructional design produces measurable results

Instructional designers acquire information on institution objectives and ensure that learning objectives are aligned. It’s a chain reaction that starts at the top with set goals. Because these custom-built, research-backed solutions are designed to engage learners better, they frequently produce the best results.

Other Resources

• How to create an instructional design portfolio
• What is an instructional designer?
• Instructional designer salary guide
• The best instructional design courses online
• Instructional design resume tips
• Common instructional designer interview questions
• Where to find instructional design jobs
• Instructional design job listings
• Instructional design career path
• Instructional design masters programs
• The best instructional design certificate programs
• Top instructional design bootcamps
• How to write an instructional design cover letter

Final Thoughts

Your tool for institutional change is instructional design. You may use it to engage your students, modify their behavior, and change the culture of your classrooms. The days of teaching content that causes student dissatisfaction are long gone.

It’s easier than ever for instructional designers to develop content that learners want to complete, with options ranging from gamification and story to social and microlearning.

If you’re interested in learning more about instructional design or pursuing a career in the field, you should consider enrolling in the Professional Certificate in Instructional Design program from Emeritus. This comprehensive course teaches everything from the basics of instructional design to popular instructional design theories and best practices for implementation in an online learning environment.

You can learn more about the program and request a brochure at this link.

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

The post What is Instructional Design in Education? Everything You Need to Know appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Making the transition from teacher to instructional designer can be intimidating, but with the right preparation and dedication, it is possible. In fact, the career pivot is probably easier than you might think. As someone who’s been in the ID industry for nearly 20 years, I’ve seen countless teachers seamlessly enter the profession and succeed.

In the guide below, I’ll outline the steps you can take to switch from being a teacher to becoming an instructional designer.

Why Change Careers from Teaching to Instructional Design?

Instructional design is a field that focuses on developing instructional materials and learning activities to support effective teaching and learning. Instructional designers use knowledge of instructional theory, technology, and best practices in order to create engaging, effective learning experiences for students, employees, and other members of the public in a range of settings from academic to corporate to nonprofits and more.

As a teacher, you may find yourself looking for new ways to impact education and a switch to instructional design might just be the opportunity you’ve been searching for.

With a focus on creating and implementing effective educational materials and experiences, instructional design offers a unique opportunity to influence the way students learn and retain information.

Another thing I love about this role is how it also allows for creativity and innovation, offering the ability to design lessons that are engaging and interactive.

Additionally, instructional designers have the opportunity to work with a variety of industries and subject matter, providing a chance to expand your knowledge and skill set.

Plus, with the growing need for remote learning opportunities, instructional designers are in high demand, providing an exciting and stable career path for educators looking to make a change.

And of course, the instructional designer salary potential is definitely attractive when compared to teaching.

All in all, if you’re looking for a career that combines your passion for education with ample opportunities for personal and professional growth, instructional design might just be the perfect fit.

Why Teachers Make Good Instructional Designers

Teachers have a unique set of skills that make them valuable in many fields outside of the traditional classroom setting, especially instructional design. They have the unique ability to analyze, plan, and deliver effective lessons to students on a daily basis.

With a deep understanding of how to spur students’ interest and help them understand complex topics, I’ve found that teachers are a natural fit for instructional design.

They know how to tailor their materials to meet the needs of their students while keeping them engaged and motivated.

Additionally, teachers have honed their organizational skills, ensuring their lesson plans are well-structured and their materials are easy to access.

Overall, teachers have excellent organizational skills, the ability to communicate complex ideas clearly, and a natural inclination toward creative problem-solving. Given these traits, teachers can easily transfer their skills into the realm of instructional design, and become highly effective designers in their own right.

How to Transition from Teaching to Instructional Design

If you’re ready to start transitioning into the field of instructional design, there are some important steps you’ll need to take.

Get the right training

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

The first step to transitioning from teaching to instructional design is to complete an ID certificate program or specialized degree program.

This will provide you with a foundation in the basics of designing educational materials as well as a chance to gain hands-on experience.

If you’re thinking about switching from teaching to instructional design, look no further than Emeritus and their Professional Certificate in Instructional Design.

This fully online program offers everything you need to earn a certificate and launch your career in this exciting field.

With knowledgeable instructors covering industry-relevant topics, you’ll gain invaluable insights into analytics and methodologies that will help you create impactful learning solutions for your students or colleagues.

This immersive 5-month program offers a deep dive into both the foundations and cutting-edge approaches of the learning design field, ensuring that you graduate with the skills and knowledge necessary to succeed in your new career.

You can kickstart your journey toward a fulfilling and rewarding career today with Emeritus.

Click here to learn more about the program and request a free brochure.

Find your area of focus

Instructional designers can work in a range of sectors, including corporate, education, healthcare, and government. They can also specialize in certain areas of the process, like content creation, planning, UX design, or technical development.

As a teacher, you may already have a good idea of the sector and area that interests you most. Take some time to research these different areas further and determine which option best suits your strengths and preferences.

It’s important to think about your strengths and interests when deciding which sector you want to specialize in.

You may want to focus on designing materials for the corporate world or developing educational content for K-12 or higher ed institutions.

Whatever area you decide to focus on, you’ll need to have a passion for learning and teaching, as well as an aptitude for technical skills.

Polish your resume

Once you’ve earned a certification or degree in instructional design, it’s time to update your resume.

As a former teacher, your instructional designer resume can really shine.

Highlight your related experience, such as classroom management techniques, lesson plan development, and any relevant projects you’ve completed.

In addition to traditional teaching experience, include any volunteer work or outside activities that showcase your ability to design and deliver effective instructional materials.

It’s also a good idea to create an instructional design portfolio online that you can link to in your resume and include samples of your work.

This will demonstrate your creativity and show potential employers that you bring a unique perspective to the field of instructional design.

Start networking

Networking is an important part of any career transition, so be sure to take full advantage of the contacts and networks you’ve built up over the years as a teacher. A lot of people I’ve come across in instructional design tend to overlook this.

Reach out to colleagues, former students, and other professionals in your field who can provide guidance and advice on how to make the switch from teaching to instructional design.

You’ll also want to start building relationships with employers in the ID field.

Attend industry events, join professional organizations, and connect with recruiters to start networking in the instructional design space.

These connections will be invaluable as you look for available positions or freelance opportunities.

Apply to Relevant Jobs

The field of instructional design is growing rapidly, and there are lots of job opportunities out there.

Be sure to apply to all applicable positions that you find online or are referred to by your contacts in the industry. There are lots of instructional design adjacent jobs out there, so be on the lookout for listings for more than just ID positions. Job listings for curriculum designers, learning and development specialists, and similar positions may also be worth applying to.

When interviewing for an instructional design position, don’t hesitate to share examples of past teaching experiences and relevant projects you’ve completed.

Highlight how your background as a teacher will enable you to make a successful transition into instructional design.

Final Thoughts

If you’re a teacher exploring new career possibilities, the field of instructional design is definitely worth a look. It’s a great way to use your knowledge and experience to design effective learning solutions for any audience.

With the right preparation and dedication, you can make a successful transition from teaching to instructional design and pursue an exciting new career in the field.

Have any questions about making the switch from being a teacher to becoming an instructional designer? Share them by leaving a comment below.

The post How to Make the Transition from Teacher to Instructional Designer appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

From my experience, choosing the right virtual conference platform is crucial for guaranteeing a successful and seamless experience, not only for you as the organizer but also for the participants attending your event. The quality of the virtual events is an important factor to enhance attendee engagement and pull off a successful lecture, meeting, or event. Choose the wrong virtual conference software, and your meeting could turn into a disaster.

As an eLearning professional who’s hosted countless live online events over the years, I’ve reviewed and ranked the best virtual conference platforms available in 2024 — like vFairs, Zoho — and others comparing their features, performance, cost, and other factors (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews).

What is the Best Virtual Conference Platform?

1. vFairs
2. Zoho Meeting
3. WebinarJam
4. GoToWebinar
5. Livestorm
6. Eventzilla
7. Demio
8. Airmeet
9. Click Meeting
10. Accelevents
11. Zoom
12. Cisco Webex
13. Hopin
14. Big Marker

1. Best Overall: vFairs

Did you know that vFairs is one of the most highly rated virtual conference platforms on G2? They’ve maintained a 4.7/5 star rating with over 1,500 reviews from happy customers.

It’s not your average video conference tool.

vFairs offers state-of-the-art features and fast-paced technology to take your event to the next level.

We’re talking about 3D virtual events. vFairs is a rare platform allowing us to create 3D immersive environments which make us feel like we’re actually standing inside the event venue.

Intuitive 3D visuals not only allow for easy navigation, but also make the event a whole lot enjoyable. Virtual lobbies give rise to high-impact visibility and better audience engagement.

Moreover, exhibit booths are also designed to enable sponsors and recruiters to design their space with customized branding tools.

vFairs also offers more event management solutions including in-person and hybrid events. Their mobile application & onsite tech offer a full end-to-end event solution to support easy event marketing and registration, user management, badging, check-in, networking, and personalized experiences for attendees onsite.

Top Features & Benefits

• Immersive 3D event environment
• Mobile event application
• Event registration and ticketing
• On-site badge printing and check-in
• Provides value to event exhibitors and sponsors
• In-person event technology & support
• Easy virtual networking through multifunctional chat, roundtables, and even smart matchmaking features
• Access to downloadable presentations, datasheet before or during the event
• Ability to integrate CRM tools
• Customized event landing pages
• AI event marketing modules
• Use multi-lingual support to facilitate a diverse, ethnic audience
• Accessibility support
• In-event gamification
• Conduct breakout sessions
• Organize virtual graduation ceremonies, alumni meetups, orientation days
• Conduct recruitment drives to speed up hiring and attract talent from around the globe

Cost

vFairs offers custom quotes for each client so that they only pay for what they need. For pricing, you can contact the vFairs team.

2. Also Great: Zoho Meeting

Great Choice

Zoho Meeting

Zoho Meeting is a powerful online meeting platform that makes it easy for teams to collaborate online easily and securely.

Try It Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Zoho Meeting is a great solution users looking for a single platform to host marketing virtual conferences, webinars, internal team meetings, one-on-one meetings, and more.

As one of the best virtual conference platforms, Zoho includes a ton of features, including interactive elements like audience Q&A, polling, making attendees presenters, and allowing participants to “raise a hand” to talk during the event (I really like this feature).

But where Zoho Meeting really shines in my experience is with its advanced security features. Zoho goes above and beyond to keep your virtual events protected against people who shouldn’t be in there, including encryption, two-factor authentication, notifications for entry requests, and more. I can’t stress how important this is.

Key Features And Benefits

• Advanced security features to keep your meetings safe and private
• Share multiple video feeds with your audience as you present
• Record and share your virtual events
• Download your events for offline viewing
• Get detailed analytics to assess your virtual event’s performance

Pricing

Zoho is one of the most affordable virtual conference platforms, offering a freemium plan and 2 paid plans for professionals:

• Free ($0)
• Meeting (starting at $1/mo & up depending on number of participants)
• Webinar (starting at $8/mo & up depending on number of participants)

Click here to try Zoho Meeting for free.

3. Also Good: WebinarJam

Looking for a virtual conference platform to amplify attendee engagement?

WebinarJam brings you the opportunity to host 4-hour webinars, meetings, and live streaming with a group of up to 5,000 participants and 6 presenters! 

It is a cloud-based virtual event platform providing high accessibility and compatibility with smartphones, laptops, or tablets. Just get a fast broadband internet connection and you’re good to go!

Dynamic business environments call for regular reports on sales, marketing, and demand conditions. You can capture analytics and translate them into actionable business strategies.

Simply put, this is the all-in-one software for virtual conferences and it’s one of the best webinar software tools out there.

WebinarJam comes in pretty handy here as it enables subordinates to participate as presenters by sharing their screens and broadcasting directly.

Top Features & Benefits

• Up to 5,000 attendees for your virtual events
• Great for hosting remote onboardings of new employees
• Up to 6 presenters
• Provides pre-designed templates to create registration pages
• Unlimited free hosting and split testing
• High-quality audio and video streaming in 30 FPS.
• Use the ‘Replica ‘Replay’ button to playback all live sessions with minute details
• Click on the ’Panic Button’ in case an incident occurs during live meeting
• Real-time polls and surveys allow for interaction with participants
• Give presentations by just importing the file and sharing it on your screen
• Annotation, drawings, and notes can be used to convey the message in detail

Cost

WebinarJam offers 4 paid plans:

• Starter Plan: $39 per month for up to 100 Attendees
• Basic Plan: $79 per month for up to 500 Attendees
• Professional Plan: $229 per month for up to 2000 Attendees
• Enterprise Plan: $379 per month for up to 5000 Attendees

There’s also a 30-day money-back guarantee, and they offer a 14-day trial to test things out.

4. Easiest to Use: GoToWebinar

GoToWebinar is another well-integrated virtual event software used by renowned corporations with a maximum of 2,000 attendees at once. It’s a super easy to use, unified communication platform to operate your business from anywhere in the world!

With extensive features and a myriad of engagement tools, I think this is one of the best virtual event platforms is for medium and large organizations. You can integrate it with MS Office, Slack, etc.

As a cherry on top, GoToWebinar allows you to amp up your virtual event promotion through GoToStage.

If your virtual event makes it to the top, you can generate better leads and drive massive traffic.

Top Features & Benefits

• Flexible webinar modes
• Fast, automated communication is possible through timely reminders, emails, and follow-ups
• Easy payments processing through Stripe
• Powerful data encryption and privacy features
• Record webinars with ‘GoToStage’ and allow users to watch at a later date
• Create customized dashboards and registration pages depicting the brand’s logo.
• Enhance your marketing strategy by tracking engagement through an analytics dashboard.

Cost

GoToWebinar offers 4 payment plans:

• Lite Plan costs $49 per month to host webinars that can hold up to 250 participants.
• Standard Plan costs $99 a month for 500 participants.
• Pro Plan is $199/month to host webinars for 1,000 participants
• Enterprise Plan is $399 a month for 3,000 participants.

You can try GoToWebinar free for 7 days — no credit card required.

5. Best for Analytics: Livestorm

Livestorm is a super versatile online video communication platform enabling organizations to host virtual events on a large scale with smooth workflows. It is a browser-based software with the main focus on growth acceleration.

It is ideal for high-pressure working environments where detailed analysis plays an important role in achieving performance objectives.

Whether you prefer simple online meetings or a full-fledged automated webinar, Livestorm has got you covered!

With a streamlined video communication platform and options for customization, you can produce engaging webinars to collaborate internally and leverage your brand.

With Livestorm, you benefit from a multi-language support team and GDPR compliance.

Top Features & Benefits

• Enables end to end engagement
• Provides on-demand, live, and pre-recorded online events
• Requires minimal setup and fewer technical tools
• Allows you to integrate the software with Slack and Zapier
• Supports dashboard analytics
• Schedule on-demand and automated webinars to expand reach
• Evaluate meeting report with intricate details about participants, attendance, deadlines
• Create registration pages, send emails, and chat in real-time with team members

Cost

Livestorm has a limited free plan, and paid plans start from $79 a month and up.

You can try Livestorm free to see if this is the right conference software for your needs.

6. Best for Marketing Your Event: Eventzilla

Eventzilla is an all-in-one registration platform aiming to improvise the way in which virtual and in-person events are marketed. It provides a solution-oriented approach to simplify registration, attendees, payments, and check-ins.

Simply put, event marketing has become a lot easier with Eventzilla.

You can create a mobile-friendly virtual event website in no time. The best part is Eventzilla does not require any coding, so the whole registration process becomes quicker.

From conferences, virtual events to educational training, Eventzilla provides a one-stop solution to organize any event in a systematic manner.

With a targeted marketing campaign, it becomes possible to convert potential visitors into event attendees, increasing your ROI!

Top Features & Benefits

• No coding required for designing registration workflows
• Use event agenda builder to publish agendas in a short span of time
• Schedule multiple guest speaker sessions
• Use discount codes to boost event attendance
• Get real-time feedback through polls and surveys
• Seamless check-ins by scanning barcode or entering attendee’s name

Cost

Eventzilla offers 3 payment plans:

• Basic: $1.50 per registration
• Pro: $1.50+1.9% per registration
• Plus: $1.50+2.9% per registration

Click here to learn more.

7. Best for Easy Customization: Demio

Demio is all about hosting a distraction-free, smooth webinar and virtual event.

This platform is all about creating ‘effective webinars’ with less work.

By following a solid structure of registration, promotion, and marketing, you don’t have to worry about technical glitches on the event day.

Demio offers separate campaigns for each event type: live streaming, live scheduled sessions, or even automated webinars.

Automated webinars are on autopilot which means there is less human intervention required, hence saving time and allowing you to focus on other significant matters.

Attendance management has also become easier with maintaining databases of members, checking their registration status, etc., and exporting them into a CSV file.

Another advantage of Demio is the fact that it supports all web browsers ( Google Chrome, Microsoft Edge, Safari)  which isn’t always the case with other virtual event platforms.

Top Features & Benefits

• Opportunity to network and build long-term relationships with customers and leads.
• Customize your domain with logo and other branding elements
• Vibrant, event platform appeals to the attendees and boosts interaction
• No need to download heavy application software
• Upload presentations and videos directly from Demio

Cost

Demio offers 2 payment plans:

• Starter Plan costs $59/month for a 50-person room
• Growth Plan costs $109/month for a 150-person room with customized branding and has options for more visitors.

You can try Demio free for 14 days.

8. Best for Sponsorships: Airmeet

Airmeet is a platform that supports extensive sponsorships and aims to build sustainable social interactions.

This software enables you to maintain the profile of keynote speakers so attendees can identify those they would like to engage with.

This is called one-to-one networking.

With just one click, you can join networking booths and connect with people of similar interests.

If you’re a virtual event organizer on the lookout for good sponsorships, Airmeet is definitely your go-to option. Additionally, sponsors have the option to sell the tickets directly from Airmeet and gather feedback.

The software also consists of a private virtual backstage so members may rehearse or have discussions right before appearing in front of the audience.

Top Features & Benefits

• User-friendly platform
• Fast, one-to-one networking
• Easily integrates with every MarTech tool
• Stream your events to various platforms ( Facebook, LinkedIn, YouTube)
• Use interactive emojis- ‘raise hand’ button to ask questions
• Use real-time analytics and record sessions
• Connects with Stripe for processing payments for event tickets
• Private virtual backstage

Cost

Airmeet offers a few types of plans, including a free plan for up to 100 participants. All other paid plans have pricing available by request.

Get started for free.

9. Best for Large Events: ClickMeeting

Events like trade shows and career fairs are often massive, and accommodating a huge audience becomes a daunting task. It requires strategic planning relating to networking features, booths, marketing, registration, etc.

All of these issues are resolved with the outstanding ClickMeeting software.

Its ‘Huge Virtual Events’ feature allows you to incorporate 10,000 participants and also include a multi-user account to interact with peers.

On top of that, heavy workflows will run smoothly without having to worry about small technical glitches.

ClickMeeting also gives the option to create webinar rooms when you host virtual events for product demos, recruitment drives, training, etc.

There’s even a waiting room where the host can present the agenda of the virtual event before starting off.

Top Features & Benefits

• Customizable email templates
• Simultaneously live stream on Facebook and YouTube
• Use an address book to record contact details
• Use report analytics for attendance statistics.
• Real-time translation into 52 different languages
• Private chats and Q&A sessions are moderated

Cost

ClickMeeting offers 3 payment plans

• Live: $26/month
• Automated: $42/month
• Enterprise: Custom packages

You can try ClickMeeting free for 30 days.

10. Best Basic Virtual Conference Platform: Accelevents

Want a cost-effective yet interactive platform? Accelevents is your way to go!

Specially designed for small and medium-sized enterprises, Accelevents is a user-friendly software enabling you to create host virtual events and hybrid events.

It is robust and consists of all interactive features necessary to keep your business thriving.

The best part is Accelevents is not just limited to corporations, but can also be used for educational purposes, product launches, trade shows, career fairs, or even fundraisers.

It is an all-in-one effective communication tool to fulfill everyone’s diverse needs.

Top Features & Benefits

• Create customized events
• Integrate with Salesforce and HubSpot
• Segment audience according to demographics
• Active your event hub and monitor regularly
• Create multiple ticket-tiers (paid, free, donation-based)
• Interact with people from different exhibitor booths
• Live sessions can be moderated
• Evaluate the success of the event through exhibitor-led reports

Cost

Accelevents offers multiple payment plans, including the ability to pay per event (starting at $500 per event) or to subscribe for an unlimited events plan at a better value.

Unlimited events plans include:

• Professional- $5000/year
• Business- $12,000/year

11. Most Popular: Zoom

Zoom is one of the most versatile virtual conference software, and it has a huge user base.

It’s super robust, easy to use, and offers all features necessary to conduct meetups, classes, summits, training, etc.

When COVID-19 struck the world, Zoom was one of the most widely used virtual event platforms worldwide.

Now that many advanced software platforms have flooded the market, its customer base has reduced a bit, but it’s still a great option for many.

It may not be the best option for large-scale high-performing virtual events (there are other Zoom alternatives better for this), but it still works well if you prefer something basic yet effective in conveying the message.

Zoom Rooms for Touch is a prominent feature that helps attendees share their desktop or mobile screen.

Whiteboards and annotations are also pretty useful during calculation-based discussions. Other participants can pitch in their ideas with the co-annotate option.

Plus, you can open up to 12 whiteboards at a time and their content would also be saved automatically.

Make sure to check out our guide to the best Zoom microphones for presenting your online event.

Top Features & Benefits

• Multiple breakout rooms for your virtual event
• Detailed report on participants’ entering and leaving time
• Use ‘raise hand’ button to ask questions
• Multi-desktop, wireless sharing
• Ability to record sessions and conduct polls
• Mute/unmute participants to keep virtual events orderly
• Integrates smoothly with Pardot, Salesforce, and Kaltura
• Uses adequate data protection and encryption techniques

Cost

Zoom’s pricing plans for webinars and events includes the following plans:

• Pro: $149.90/year
• Business: $199.90/year
• Enterprise: $250/year

12. Best for Scalability: Cisco Webex

WebEx is all about productivity! Take advantage of this cloud-based suite of productivity and attain your corporate goals with a diversified and well-connected team.

An interactive virtual conference with a collaborative environment and the right communication forms are the basis of conducting a successful webinar.

With WebEx, you can host webinars and virtual events with up to 3,000 participants and get access to many innovative features.

To facilitate users, WebEx offers remote support in case of any technical difficulties pertaining to audio or video quality.

WebEx Training is another brainchild of Cisco. It is specially curated to accommodate training for new and existing employees around the globe.

WebEx mobile app is another convenient solution to eliminate the problem of mobility. Now, you can stay connected whether you are offshore or on a bus.

Top Features & Benefits

• Get access to live and pre-recorded session
• Post-event survey through Q&A, polls and forms
• Visual enhancement tools such as white digital boards
• Smooth broadcasting and screen sharing
• Use Webex Cloud Calling
• Firewall protection to prevent breach of privacy
• Supports Android and iOS
• Crisp, uninterrupted audio system

Cost

WebEx offers 2 payment plans:

• Meet plan: $14.50/month
• Meet + Call plan: $25/month

13. Best for Networking: Hopin

What’s better than getting the opportunity to interact with like-minded individuals during a virtual event?

While this idea may seem vague at first, Hopin has actually made wireless interaction a possibility.

Its high-speed network algorithm drives the software and matches people according to pre-set criteria. Pretty cool, right?

In addition, Hopin accommodates up to 2,000 attendees which is a substantial advantage for large-scale events. A big audience with better engagement ultimately results in yielding higher ROIs.

Top Features & Benefits

• Provides virtual stage and backstage or pre-event preparation
• Sponsor exhibition hall
• Use multiple breakout sessions
• Use flexible branding elements
• Ability to conduct hybrid events to nurture company culture
• Create captivating landing pages
• Consists of powerful data encryption standards.

Cost

Hopin offers 2 different plans

• Free
• Starter – $67/month
• Business – starts at $6,000

Business and enterprise plans require quotations.

14. Best No-Download Platform: Big Marker

Don’t we all despise downloading heavy software only to find our laptops and smartphones hanging afterward? Big Marker solves this problem!

Now, you can conduct value-driven events with this no-download video conference platform compatible with all web browsers.

With this streamlined AI-driven virtual events platform, you can conduct video-based series, summits, expand your customer base and sell products through automated funnels. Overall, it’s a win-win situation!

Big Marker has got its own embeddable video player that can be customized to portray your brand. Whatever content you display will help in generating leads. Besides, other interactive features such as Q&A, polls, and offers provide an unforgettable webinar experience.

Top Features & Benefits

• Automatic and manual pop-ups displays
• Create landing page templates
• Built-in marketing and growth tools
• Automated video marketing and training
• Embedded registration forms on the website
• Gather feedback through Google Forms
• Host multi-media events by connecting to Facebook and YouTube
• No need of special equipment

Cost

Big Markers offers 3 payment plans, all of which require reaching out for a quote:

• Basic
• Enterprise
• Enterprise+

What is Virtual Conference Software?

Virtual conference software is a communication tool that allows two or more parties to conduct real-time face-to-face virtual events and interact through audio and video transmission. It resolves the problem of mobility and enables people around the globe to work and study from anywhere in the world.

With inclusive virtual lobbies, report analytics, and other interactive features, you can easily gauge the feedback on virtual events. All you need is a laptop or smartphone and a fast internet connection to reconnect with the world!

The Pros and Cons of Using Virtual Conference Platforms

If you’re thinking of hosting a virtual conference or meeting, it’s important to understand some of the benefits and drawbacks the various virtual event platforms provide:

Pros

• Inclusive approach to business communication
• Saves time involved in commuting from one place to another
• Saves costs relating to logistics, rent, food, etc
• Facilitates people with disabilities
• Analyze attendance and devise marketing plans accordingly

Cons

• Possibility of the audience getting bored without in-person interactions
• Time zones may lead to ineffective, one-way communication

What Types of Virtual Events Can You Host?

With the right virtual event software, you can host all types of functions online, including:

Webinars

• Communicate ideas, goals, and proposals with an external audience
• Entails registration process
• Broad marketing goals

Virtual conferences

• Completely remote
• Internal virtual events with no marketing functions
• Multiple break-out sessions

Hybrid events

• Most sustainable option
• Combination of in-person and online event
• Convenient for stay-at-home mothers

Educational events

• Lectures
• School functions
• Orientations
• Business trainings

How Much Does a Virtual Conference Platform Cost?

Virtual event platforms come in a wide range of prices. The exact cost of putting on a virtual conference depends on a number of factors, including how many attendees you’ll be hosting, how many presenters there will be, what additional features you might need (e.g. interactive elements like quizzes, live captioning, etc.).

Most virtual events platforms charge by the month and have different packages based on the features you choose.

What To Look For When Choosing The Best Virtual Conference Platform

As someone who’s hosted a number of online events, I’ve learned there’s no one-size-fits-all solution for choosing the right virtual event software.

While all of the options above are great, the right virtual conferencing software for your organization will depend on a number of factors, such as:

What Features Do You Need?

Some common features you may want your virtual event platform to include are:

Breakout rooms

These rooms enable to divide a large meeting into smaller subgroups so that teamwork and brainstorming are made possible with breakout sessions. The whole team can work on their projects separately with any overlapping or distortion of messages.

Networking functions

An engaged audience is a vital part of a successful virtual event.

Although the traditional purpose of a virtual event is to communicate and present information to the attendees, nowadays participants also look for networking opportunities with fellow attendees.

This keeps them engaged, provides variety, and enables them to build valuable connections which continue even after your online events have completed.

Networking sessions help participants regain focus after long presentations and workshops.

Live tech support for event organizers and the attendees.

We all may know how to browse the web but not all of us are capable enough to seamlessly host virtual events.

When deciding on a virtual event platform, don’t underestimate the importance of having on-demand tech support available to the organizer which can assist in setting up your online events in real-time.

Similarly, the presence of live chat support to the attendee can make the experience more eventful as now they would have to spend less time figuring out the tech. Attendee engagement levels can be negatively impacted if guests feel agitated while trying to explore the platform.

Integration capabilities

Regardless of whether your virtual event has simple webinar sessions or full-fledged multi-stream seminars, you will need to make use of some integration systems.

It’s a good idea to create a list of all the other systems you would use alongside the event management platform to keep an eye out when comparing their integration capabilities.

For instance, if you are using an app simultaneously with your virtual event, you would want to know if the data is automatically updated across both systems.

Choosing a virtual event platform that caters to most of your integration needs will make the data transfer processes seamless and also provide an overall pleasant experience.

Event insights and analytics

With all the other benefits that an online events management system provides, access to insights about attendees’ experience is a great tool to plan future virtual events to be more successful and effective.

Data and analytics to help event organizers find improvements to current practices to make future events even more engaging and eventful.

Meaningful data is also the main incentive for sponsors to continue funding your event as they gain highly valuable insights which help them make informed decisions about their products and services. Some conference platforms allow you to view attendee activity such as the documents they download, the different booths they visited and the time spent at each of them, and so on.

Depending on the type of data and reports that you need, you can compare different event platforms. Data protection and privacy should be kept as the topmost priority.

Customizable Features

The most significant customizable feature to consider would be “Branding”. Making the attendees feel like they are in a specific environment will distinguish your brand from others and will also create a sense of belonging.

Branding features should preferably include the ability to integrate your organization’s messaging and infographics to be consistent across all channels of communication (websites, registration forms, and emails).

Concurrently, customization should also be available to the attendee to make the virtual event as accessible as possible.

For example, attendees can be given the option to adjust font size, sound mode depending on room environment, etc.

You could set up an option to make certain sessions visible to specific people, for instance, making breakout sessions within a virtual event exclusive to only those who used a certain voucher code.

Ticket management

Conference ticketing is another handy feature especially when you’re marketing your virtual event on a large scale. Software integrated with end-to-end ticketing services makes registration a lot easier.

How easy is it to use?

The easier your virtual conference platform is to use, the greater the participation will be and the better your results will be.

Making your virtual events easy to attend will increase the number of participants hence enabling a great potential for conversion.

One common problem is that people who register for an online event are unable to locate the registration link or joining details. This eventually leads to either losing the attendee completely or missing out on information due to delays both of which promote loss and inefficiency to the event organizer and the attendee.

A virtual events platform that has built-in ticketing and registration features can make it much easier for your audience to attend your event.

The platform should also have a simple, easy-to-understand interface for both the presenters and the attendees.

How many attendees will you have?

Different platforms and plans allow for different numbers of maximum participants. If you’re hosting a large virtual event with thousands of attendees, make sure you choose a platform and plan that will allow this.

What’s your budget?

Virtual event platforms are available at a wide range of prices, from free plans with limited to robust packages that cost hundreds per month but boast a bevy of features. Know your budget and match that with your needs.

Final Thoughts

The best virtual conference platforms can make all the difference for the success of your online events. Choosing the right platform is critical for the success of your virtual and hybrid events, so take your time and do some research before making a decision.

And remember, many of these online conference platforms offer free trials, so feel free to test a few out before committing to any single one.

Hopefully, this guide has provided you with everything you need to know about the best virtual conference platforms.

To recap, our top 3 picks for virtual event platforms:

• vFairs
• WebinarJam
• GoToWebinar

Let’s not wait for the perfect time when on-ground, physical events are back. Now is the time to scale up your business or improve your teaching capabilities using the best virtual conference software platforms available today!

Have any questions about choosing the right virtual events platform? Leave a comment below and we’ll help you out. 

The post 14 Best Virtual Conference Platforms for Events & Meetings (2024) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Employers in a range of industries — not just instructional design — have started to accept bootcamps as a valid means of training. In fact, a recent report from the University of New Hampshire found that 80% of hiring managers surveyed in the tech industry have offered jobs to bootcamp students within their company, and 99.8% would do it again.

I’m a living, breathing testament to the power of instructional design bootcamps. Ever since the rise of eLearning technology caught my attention some 20 years ago, I’ve taken countless online bootcamps, courses, webinars, and other virtual training programs to gain knowledge and experience in the field. And it hasn’t slowed down my success in the field one bit.

From teaching you essential foundational instructional design principles to covering the latest technological breakthroughs, bootcamps are a great way to get the training you need on a short timeline.

I’ve put together this list of the best instructional design bootcamps online with picks from Emeritus, Devlin Peck,  and more. I’ve taken into consideration factors like program length and cost, curriculum depth, student feedback, and instructor qualifications when ranking these programs (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews).

What are the Best Instructional Design Bootcamps Online?

Here are our picks for the top ID bootcamps worth enrolling in right now…

1. Professional Certificate in Instructional Design (Emeritus)

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

$3,500 total (early-bird discounts may be available at certain times during enrollment; flexible payment options also available)

Duration

5 months

Pros

• Details, current instructional design training gets you career-ready fast
• This course is very new and is totally up to date with lessons on the latest technology, tools, and instructional design methods
• Hands-on, interactive instruction helps students learn more effectively
• Cohort-style learning lets you connect with other students for feedback and networking

Cons

• Class is only offered a few times a year

Overview

Want to build all the skills you need to confidently launch a career in instructional design? The Professional Certificate in Instructional Design from Emeritus is the bootcamp course you’re looking for.

This 5-month intensive program goes deeper than I expected into the foundational principles of instructional design, covering topics like learner engagement, developing content and assessments, recognizing learning objectives, accessibility, and more. It’s impressively comprehensive for such a quick program.

Led by experienced instructors teaching current best practices, you’ll gain an in-depth understanding of instructional design theory and application.

Simply put, I really think this is the most comprehensive ID bootcamp out there, covering all aspects of instructional design in a single program.

You’ll learn along with a cohort of like-minded peers and have access to plenty of support throughout your journey.

Another thing I liked is that at the end of the bootcamp, you get to create a portfolio showcasing your instructional design work that you can share with prospective employers to help you land a job in the field.

This bootcamp is great for teachers and educators who are thinking about transitioning into a career in instructional design, recent graduates and early career ID professionals, human resources/learning development teams at businesses, and anyone else looking to expand their skillset and upskill.

Click here to learn more about the program and request a free brochure.

2. The Instructional Design Bootcamp (Devlin Peck)

Price

$7,400

Duration

5 months

Pros

• Get paired with a bootcamp pro for additional 1-on-1 support
• Bootcamp is led by a full team of seasoned pros
• Great networking opportunities

Cons

• The course is more expensive than others on the list
• Some students have said they feel it focuses too much on eLearning development as opposed to purely instructional design

Overview

This instructional design bootcamp from Devlin Peck promises to “help you transition from burnt-out educator to remote instructional designer” and says their graduates “land corporate instructional design roles where they can work from home and earn, on average, $85k per year.”

Devlin and I have both been blogging in this space for several years now. I love his work and can definitely say he’s the real deal.

His bootcamp is designed to make it easy for aspiring instructional designers to get the skills and knowledge they need to enter the industry while also helping them build portfolios that can help them stand out in the job market.

The 5-month program gives students hands-on experience with the tools used most in instructional design.

One of the things I really like about it is the lectures are presented in short, easy-to-follow videos, rather than long, drawn-out hourlong sessions. This makes it easier for busy professionals to stay on top of the course material.

The bootcamp also offers plenty of support throughout with one-on-one mentorship, feedback, and guidance from instructors who are experts in their fields.

They also provide a money-back guarantee that pledges they’ll offer “a full, 100% refund if you’re not able to land paid instructional design work after completing the bootcamp and applying our feedback.”

3. Instructional Design Bootcamp (24/7 Teach)

Price

$1,865.55 for the short 10-week bootcamp or $6,713.55 for the full 10-month program

Duration

10 weeks or 10 months, depending on the program you choose

Pros

• Offers live 1-on-1 mentorship
• Helps you gain experience by doing real projects
• Comes with a job guarantee

Cons

• The short bootcamp probably isn’t comprehensive enough for those just starting out
• On the pricier side

Overview

Are you ready to kickstart your career as a professional instructional designer? Look no further than this bootcamp!

Through this program, you will gain the innovative skills needed to create engaging and effective learning experiences.

You’ll begin by mastering basic Instructional Design theories and frameworks, then move on to Project-Based Learning strategy and design.

With this foundation, you’ll learn how to analyze learning needs, define solid instructional objectives and goals, and create storyboards for your instructional projects.

From there, you’ll delve into writing effective and engaging content and incorporating interactivity and multimedia elements like graphics and video into your work.

And finally, you’ll learn how to evaluate learning and ensure your projects are making a real impact.

In this exciting and dynamic instructional design bootcamp, you will have the opportunity to collaborate and problem-solve with a team of like-minded individuals.

Together, you will put your heads together to complete learner analyses, develop learning goals and objectives, and devise engaging lesson scenarios using popular instructional design models.

Armed with cutting-edge instructional design tools, you will then set out to design compelling storyboards and formulate assessments and discussion questions that will put your learners to the test.

You will also have the chance to work alongside Subject Matter Experts (SMEs), and get hands-on experience working with a variety of authoring tools and Learning Management Systems (LMS).

And when all is said and done, you’ll walk away with a stunning portfolio of real projects that will serve as a powerful testament to your skills and expertise in the field of instructional design.

4. The eLearning Freelancer Bootcamp (IDOL Courses)

Price

$497 or 3 payments of $185

Duration

8 weeks

Pros

• Great advice for those looking to launch an ID business
• Self-paced study offers flexibility
• Lots of helpful resources

Cons

• The community lacks substance

Overview

This instructional design bootcamp is aimed at those who already have ID skills and are looking to start their own freelance business as an eLearning professional.

Across 8 in-depth modules, you’ll learn how to identify your target audience, price your services, find clients, manage contracts and accounts, provide excellent customer service that drives repeat business and referrals, and more.

Led by 3 experienced eLearning professionals, this bootcamp offers 8 weekly workshops, coaching and mentoring from the instructors, and access to a private community (basically a Facebook Group) where you can connect with other freelancers.

At the end of this bootcamp, you’ll have a comprehensive understanding of how to build and run your own successful eLearning freelance business.

Tips for Choosing the Right Instructional Design Bootcamp for Your Needs

While I’ve presented a short, curated list of what I believe are the top ID bootcamp programs available today, I realize that not everyone is the same. What’s best for one person might not be best for someone else.

To help ensure you enroll in the right bootcamp for your specific needs, consider the following:

• What are your goals? Are you looking to learn instructional design from the ground up? Want to land a corporate job in the field? Or do you already have a handle on instructional design theories and need info on how to build your own business? Understanding your specific goals will help you choose the right bootcamp for you.
• How much time and money can you invest? Different bootcamps require different amounts of commitment in terms of both time and money. Make sure to factor these into your decision-making process before committing to a particular program.
• Are there any prerequisites? Some bootcamps may require you to have prior experience with instructional design before enrolling. This is not the case for all bootcamps, but be sure to check each one’s prerequisites before signing up.
• What type of support do they offer? I highly recommend enrolling in a bootcamp that offers plenty of support throughout, such as one-on-one mentoring and feedback from instructors who are knowledgeable in the field. This can go a long way in helping you get the most out of the program.

Useful Resources

• What is Instructional Design?
• Instructional Designer Job Description
• Instructional Design Masters Programs
• Instructional Design Certificate Programs
• How to Write an Instructional Design Cover Letter
• Instructional Design Career Path & Roadmap
• Common Instructional Designer Interview Questions
• Where to Find Instructional Design Jobs
• Instructional Design Salary Statistics
• Instructional Design Resume Tips
• Instructional Design vs Curriculum Development

Final Thoughts

The right ID bootcamp program can help you quickly gain the skills and knowledge you need to become a successful instructional designer.

Before signing up for any program, however, I can’t stress enough how important it is to assess your own goals and needs as well as the program’s prerequisites and support offerings. While I’m a big proponent of bootcamps, they aren’t for everyone, and they’re not always some magic bullet that’s going to propel you to your dream job just because you worked your way through it. Taking all of these factors into consideration will help ensure that you get the most out of your investment in the bootcamp.

By learning from experienced instructors and collaborating with a team of like-minded professionals, you can build a strong foundation for your instructional design career.

Have any questions about our guide to the best instructional design bootcamps online? Let us know by commenting below.

The post The Best Instructional Design Bootcamps Online (2023 Rankings) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As someone who’s worked in the industry for nearly 20 years, I can tell you an instructional design career path can go in a lot of different directions. From working in academia to designing corporate training programs, the possibilities are endless. In fact, a current search for instructional design jobs on Indeed finds nearly 10,000 open positions of all types. It’s important to understand your skills, interests, and goals so you can decide which direction is right for you.

In the guide below, I’ll take a look at some of the different career paths and pivots an instructional designer can take and discuss some practical tips to help you reach your goals.

What Sectors Can Instructional Designers Work In?

As an instructional designer, you have the opportunity to work in a variety of sectors, such as:

• Education: Instructional design is often used in education settings to create courses and curriculums for schools, universities, and other learning institutions.
• Corporate Training: Many organizations use instructional design to create training programs for their employees.
• Government: Instructional designers are sought-after in the government sector, where they develop courses and training materials for public servants.
• Nonprofits & Charities: Instructional designers can help nonprofits and charities spread awareness by creating content that expands knowledge or promotes certain causes.
• Medical: Instructional designers are increasingly being used in the medical industry to create things like training modules for healthcare professionals.
• Technology: Instructional design can be used to create technical documents, software tutorials, and other materials related to technology products and services.
• Public Speaking & Consulting: As an instructional designer, you may also have the opportunity to speak at conferences or offer consulting services in your field of expertise.

The type of work you might be tasked with as an instructional designer can vary greatly depending on the organization you work for.

One aspect that plays a big role in dictating your responsibilities is the mission and purpose of the organization. For instance, if you are working in a corporate environment, you may find yourself working on training programs aimed at improving employee performance or growing sales.

On the other hand, if you are working in a university setting, you may be tasked with creating courses and curriculums that help students learn more effectively. This will likely involve collaborating with faculty members to enhance their curriculum, whether it be for classroom or remote learning.

Job Opportunities for Instructional Designers

Now that you have an idea of the different industries you can work in as an instructional designer, let’s take a look at some of the specific types of jobs you can pursue.

• Instructional Designer: An instructional designer oversees the entire design process from conception to implementation. This may involve conducting needs analysis, designing course materials, and developing assessments.
• Course Developer: A course developer is responsible for designing, creating, and delivering educational content in a variety of formats. This may involve developing online courses, creating video tutorials, or writing technical documents.
• eLearning Curriculum Developer: A curriculum developer works with faculty members to create eLearning course curriculums. This may involve designing lesson plans, selecting resources, and developing assessment materials.
• Distance Educational Specialist: A distance education specialist typically works with other university staff members in the development, implementation, and maintenance of the institution’s online learning programs.
• Instructional Technology Specialist: An instructional technology specialist helps organizations develop and implement learning technologies to improve performance and efficiency. They must have an understanding of the organization’s mission and purpose, as well as the ability to create solutions that help them reach their goals.
• Instructional Systems Designer: An instructional systems designer is responsible for designing instructional materials and programs to meet the needs of learners. This may involve developing courses, creating learning activities, or providing instructional support.
• Training & Development Manager: A training and development manager is responsible for creating and managing training programs in an organization. This may involve developing courses, writing job aids, or providing technical support to staff members.
• Learning Experience Designer: A learning experience designer is responsible for creating interactive learning experiences that engage and motivate learners. They must have the ability to create engaging content, utilize multimedia technologies, and apply best practices in instructional design.
• Learning & Development Specialist: A learning and development specialist assists organizations in creating and executing training programs with the goal of enhancing employee productivity and efficiency. The specialist’s responsibilities include identifying training needs, creating training programs, preparing teaching materials, providing training sessions, and assessing training program results.
• Project Manager: As a project manager, you will be responsible for overseeing the instructional design process. This may involve managing budgets, timelines, and personnel in order to ensure that projects are on track and meeting goals.
• Chief Learning Officer: A chief learning officer is responsible for leading the organization’s strategic efforts in education and training. They must be able to create effective learning strategies, manage resources, and develop innovative solutions.

These are just a few of the many job opportunities available to instructional designers. As the demand for educational content continues to grow, so does the need for talented professionals who can create and deliver engaging instruction. With the right skills and qualifications, instructional designers can make a meaningful contribution to any organization in a variety of ways.

Moving Ahead in Your Instructional Design Career Path

If you’re looking to progress in your instructional design career, there are a few steps you can take to stand out from the crowd.

Gain New Skills

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

First, focus on continuing your education and developing your ID skills. Consider taking courses or workshops related to instructional design, as well as learning about new technologies that can make instruction more engaging and effective.

For instructional designers, keeping up with emerging educational technologies and techniques is essential for staying relevant. Over the 20 years I’ve been in the industry, I’ve seen how things evolve over time. What was relevant a few years ago may no longer be relevant today.

Fortunately, Emeritus’ Professional Certificate in Instructional Design program offers a comprehensive solution for those looking to build their skills and progress in their field.

With a curriculum designed to meet the unique needs of instructional designers, this program provides students with cutting-edge insights and practical hands-on experience. Whether you’re a seasoned professional or just starting out in the field, Emeritus’ Professional Certificate in Instructional Design program has everything you need to take your career to the next level.

In just five months, you’ll learn foundational theories, best practices, and practical tips for designing better eLearning experiences.

Click here to learn more about the program and request a free brochure.

Build Your Network

Another way to progress in your instructional design career is to build a strong professional network.

I’ve found that joining industry organizations, attending conferences and events, and connecting with colleagues can help you stay up-to-date on new trends and developments in the field.

Additionally, networking can open the doors to new opportunities for advancement.

By connecting with professionals who are further along in their careers, you can get advice and gain valuable insight into the hiring process.

Create a Portfolio

Don’t forget to share your accomplishments and show off your skills by publishing an instructional design portfolio online. I’m constantly preaching the importance of having a good portfolio to my fellow instructional designers.

Create a portfolio website that showcases your work or make sure to include relevant projects on your resume. This will help demonstrate to potential employers that you have the knowledge and experience necessary to create engaging instruction.

Practice Effective Communication

Develop strong communication skills, both verbal and written, to interact effectively with stakeholders, clients, and learners. This includes being able to explain complex concepts in a clear and concise manner.

Have a Clear Career Goal in Mind

Finally, it’s important to have a clear goal in mind when it comes to your instructional design career.

Do you want to move up in the current organization or look for opportunities outside? Do you plan on specializing in a particular field of instructional design or focus on continuing education?

Having a plan – and the dedication to carry it out – will help you create and follow the ideal instructional design career path for your goals.

Useful Resources

• Instructional Designer Job Description
• Instructional Design Masters Programs
• Instructional Design Certificate Programs
• Instructional Design Bootcamps
• How to Write an Instructional Design Cover Letter
• Instructional Design Career Path & Roadmap
• Common Instructional Designer Interview Questions
• Where to Find Instructional Design Jobs
• Instructional Design Salary Statistics
• Instructional Design Resume Tips

The Bottom Line

Instructional design is a growing field that offers numerous opportunities for professionals to make an impact.

Whether you’re looking for a new job or want to progress in your existing role, following the tips outlined above can help take your career path to the next level.

With the right skills and qualifications, instructional designers can make a fantastic living in a number of different industries.

So, take the time to develop your skills and create a plan for success – and you’ll be sure to find success in the field of instructional design.

Have any questions about this guide to the instructional design career path? Let me know by commenting below.

The post Instructional Design Career Path & Roadmap: Everything You Need to Know appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Simply put, an instructional designer is a professional who specializes in creating, designing, and structuring educational content and experiences, often using principles of learning theory and technology to enhance teaching and learning outcomes.

In the guide below, I’ll explain in more depth what an instructional designer is, what they typically do on a daily basis, who they work for and with, and more.

What is an Instructional Designer?

An instructional designer, also called an eLearning designer, is a professional responsible for designing educational content and experiences that are intended to improve the performance of individuals in particular tasks. Instructional designers bring together principles of design, instruction theory, and technology to create effective learning materials.

They use their knowledge of learning theories and instructional design principles to create engaging educational content and activities.

Instructional designers work collaboratively with subject matter experts, instructional technologists, and project managers to ensure that their designs meet the learning objectives and needs of the target audience.

They are skilled in using various technologies and multimedia tools to enhance the learning experience, and they continuously evaluate and revise their designs to improve the quality and effectiveness of their instructional materials. Overall, instructional designers play a crucial role in the education and training of individuals and teams, and they are dedicated to promoting continuous learning and growth in various fields.

Instructional Designer Job Duties

The daily responsibilities of an instructional designer are numerous and include:

• Analyzing the current performance level and learning needs of the target audience
• Developing instructional objectives and assessments to evaluate content efficacy
• Designing engaging learning materials, activities, and resources using various multimedia tools
• Creating interactive media elements such as simulations, games, quizzes, and videos
• Integrating instructional design principles into all aspects of the learning experience
• Collaborating with subject matter experts to ensure content accuracy and relevancy
• Testing and revising instructional material as needed
• Providing feedback on created materials
• Taking user feedback to improve learning programs
• Implementing user-centered design processes such as usability testing
• Monitoring student engagement levels throughout the course
• Managing online learning communities
• Working with other key stakeholders to ensure training programs are meeting organizational goals and objectives
• Training others to deliver learning programs

Key Tools Used by Instructional Designers

As an instructional designer, we use a range of technology-based tools to create and deliver effective educational materials. These can include:

• Learning Management Systems (LMS) – used to organize and manage course content, assignments, tests, quizzes, etc.
• Software such as Photoshop and Adobe Creative Suite – used to design visuals for the learning material
• Video Editing Software – used to create videos and other multimedia materials
• Authoring Tools – used to create interactive activities such as simulations, games, and quizzes
• Analytics tools – used to track and analyze user engagement with the material

Who Does the Instructional Designer Report To?

I’ve worked on a number of instructional design jobs over the years, and the person I’ve reported to for each project sometimes varies.

The instructional designer typically reports to a Learning & Development Manager or Training Supervisor, depending on the size of the organization.

In smaller companies, they may report directly to the CEO or COO. In larger organizations, they often report up through several tiers of management.

They also work closely with subject matter experts and instructional technologists throughout the design process.

The instructional designer acts as the bridge between these stakeholders, ensuring that all components of the training program are properly integrated and working together towards the desired outcomes.

Additionally, they may also work with other departments such as marketing, customer service, or IT to ensure that learning programs align with organizational goals and objectives.

Simply put, the instructional designer’s primary responsibility is to create effective and engaging learning materials that are tailored to meet the needs of the target audience.

Other Resources

• How to create an instructional design portfolio
• Instructional designer salary guide
• The best instructional design courses online
• Instructional design resume tips
• Common instructional designer interview questions
• Where to find instructional design jobs
• Instructional design job listings
• Instructional design career path
• Instructional design masters programs
• Top instructional design bootcamps
• How to write an instructional design cover letter
• Instructional design vs curriculum development

Thinking About Pursuing a Career in Instructional Design?

Now that you know what an instructional designer is and what the job entails, you might be interested in pursuing a career in the field.

Your best bet to get started is to enroll in an online certification program that will give you all the training you need to become an expert in instructional design.

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

The Professional Certificate in Instructional Design from Emeritus is the gold standard when it comes to online ID certificate programs.

In only 5 months, you’ll learn the fundamentals of ID, including how to set learning objectives and create engaging digital content.

This program offers in-depth instruction on the latest methodologies and analytics to help you craft effective learning solutions for your intended audience. Under the guidance of industry professionals, you’ll gain the knowledge and skills needed to succeed as an instructional designer in today’s fast-paced job market.

In fact, 94% of Emeritus students report a positive impact on their professional development after taking a course on the platform.

Click here to learn more about the program and request a free brochure.

Have any more questions about what an instructional designer is or what they do? Comment below and I’ll help you out.

The post What is an Instructional Designer? Job Description & Duties appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

If you’re a beginner to recording, it might seem like a good idea just to place your equipment on shelves and go from there. But here’s the thing I’ve learned over the years, doing this compromises the very sound quality you are trying to produce. Every piece of equipment has a vibration signature. Placing them on a shelf magnifies that signature.

Studio equipment also produces considerable heat. Placing them on a solid object of any type creates a barrier that reduces the exhaust of heat. Take it from the professionals: the only way to combat these two critical concerns is to use a recording studio rack mount or studio rack cabinet.

I’ve reviewed and ranked the best rack mounts for studio equipment based on numerous key factors, including quality, size, style, and price (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews). This guide has been fully updated for 2023, so you can be sure you’re getting the latest information on the best current products to help you make an informed buying decision.

And if you don’t feel like reading the whole guide, you can see my top pick for a rack mount here:

On-Stage RS7030 Rack Stand

$44.53

This 12-space studio rack can securely hold several pieces of gear of up to 115 pounds. The black powder-coat finish also makes it very durable and prevents it from chipping over time.

Check Price on Amazon

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/17/2024 04:22 am GMT

What are the Best Studio Rack Mounts?

Here are our picks for the best audio racks for a home studio environment:

1. On-Stage RS7030 Rack Stand
2. Odyssey Carpeted Studio Rack
3. Samson SRK-12 Rack Stand
4. StarTech.com Wall Mount Bracket
5. KENUCO Vertical Wall Mountable Rack
6. Procraft Equipment Rack
7. StarTech.com 12U Open Frame Rack

1. On-Stage RS7030 Rack Stand →

On-Stage RS7030 Rack Stand

$44.53

This 12-space studio rack can securely hold several pieces of gear of up to 115 pounds. The black powder-coat finish also makes it very durable and prevents it from chipping over time.

Check Price on Amazon

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/17/2024 04:22 am GMT

What’s Inside: Support bars and braces with screw fasteners and additional rack screws to fasten up to 12 equipment modules.

Top Features: I am choosing the On-Stage RS7030 Rack Stand first because it is an excellent example of the bare-bones or basic approach to the issue of mounting home studio equipment.

The stand offers space for up to 12 units, so all your basic home studio equipment should comfortably fit with a good amount of room to spare.

The steel tubing supports a maximum of 75 pounds of equipment without bending, and its angled style provides easy access for the user to every module.

The rack is usable anywhere in a studio or on stage. It can be placed beside a desk, on a platform, or elevated near musicians on stage for easy access during performance.

One of the things I like is this frame is easy to assemble and can be broken down and reassembled in minutes with each gig stop.

Best Use: This rack mount is best used in a home studio but sees a lot of use on performance stages.

2. Odyssey Carpeted Studio Rack →

Odyssey CRS08 8 Space Carpeted Studio Rack

$169.79

This carpeted studio rack is built from 3/4" Plywood and offers an angled face so you can easily see and access your gear. 

Check Price on Amazon

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/17/2024 02:57 am GMT

What’s Inside: The rack-mount system is already assembled and ready to receive equipment. Unfortunately, the kit does not include rack screws, so you need to purchase those separately.

Top Features: Rated as a portable system, Odyssey URS08 8 Space Carpeted Studio Rack comes in only one size.

Though the design features a slanted front to allow easy access to equipment controls, the back is vertical, creating an ever-diminishing space for equipment. The bottom of the cubicle allows equipment up to 15.9 inches in depth while the top of the cabinet only allows 12-inches.

You should consider these dimensions while choosing your devices to ensure you have room.

The cabinet is completely enclosed with one-inch thick plywood making a sturdy structure in which to house your equipment.

The structure is 19 inches in height with apertures that accept up to eight devices.

The outside carpeting serves as an insulator and presents an attractive appearance.

The item is portable and wears well when shipped from one place to another. It is priced in the mid-range of the rack mount market.

Best Use: The Odyssey URS08 8 Space Carpeted Studio Rack is best used in a home studio environment and is small enough to be placed on the side of your desk for easy access to the control units. Some traveling musicians use the rack on stage as it has wheels and is portable. With its laptop computer-sized flat top, I have seen this rack used as a multifunctional podium in classrooms and churches.

3. Samson SRK-12 Rack Stand →

Samson SRK-12 Universal Equipment Rack Stand

$179.99

The Samson SRK12 is a universal studio equipment rack designed to easily accommodate all of your rack-mounted gear. It's made from heavy-duty steel built to last and has fully enclosed side panels and front and rear rack rails. It's compatible with both US and metric screw thread sizes and both sets of screws are included.

Check Price on Amazon

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/16/2024 07:37 am GMT

What’s Inside: The kit comes in a flat pack that includes two steel side panels, a steel plate bottom and top panel, two steel rack posts, and a package of screws in both US and European sizes to accommodate equipment purchased from either source. The rack comes with four 3-inch casters and a single-space blank panel.

Top Features: The Samson SRK-12 Universal Equipment Rack Stand comes in four sizes including eight-unit, 12-unit, 16-unit, and 21-unit versions and is the costliest of the racks I considered for this list.

The rack accommodates the standard 19-inch equipment packages and has a consistent depth of 18 inches with an allowance of overlap beyond that if needed through the open back.

The casters are large enough to roll across carpet even when the rack is fully loaded.

I found this rack a pleasant surprise when using it in my home studio as the smaller eight-unit size fits beneath a desk, and the largest 21-rack size works well as a high-end rack that sits against a wall.

The rack-mount is easy to assemble with clear instructions and plenty of screws and cage nuts to support any equipment you wish to include.

When the casters are attached, this sturdy unit can handle up to 350 pounds of equipment. Removing the casters lets you upgrade to nearly 500 pounds.

Best Use: The best use for this rack mount system is in a home studio. Many musicians gravitate to this rack as the large casters allow easy movement across a stage, or from transport to the stage, and the casters are lockable once the rack is in place. The largest version is seeing use in customer service sites.

4. StarTech.com Wall Mount Bracket →

StarTech.com 6U Wall Mount Network Equipment Rack

$63.99

This sturdy studio rack allows you to safely wall mount your equipment to save space and make it more accessible. It's 14" deep and can handle up to 44 pounds of equipment.

Check Price on Amazon

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/15/2024 11:47 pm GMT

What’s Inside: The kit includes a fully assembled wall-mountable rack system and the screws needed to mount the rack on the wall. Each kit also includes enough screws and cage nuts to install the highest number of rackable devices dependent on the size of the rack ordered.

Top Features: The StarTech.com Wall Mount Patch Panel Bracket comes in three sizes—6-unit, which can handle up to 44 pounds, 8-unit that takes as much as 80 pounds, and 12-unit, which handles 120 pounds of equipment.

These racks are constructed to be mounted on a wall. If you place them on a desk or other flat surface without mounting them, then the weight capability drastically drops.

Bear in mind when purchasing these racks that they are only 12 inches in depth. If your equipment is deeper than that, then it will not fit.

Remember, you also must allow for cable attachments in the rear of the devices, so the 12-inch limitation is further reduced, especially if you are using a high-grade stiff cable to shield from interference.

My recommendation when purchasing these racks is to find some four-inch mount extensions or build your own but cutting sections from a 4×4 block of wood. Using the extension allows you to use deeper equipment and makes it easy to attach or detach your cables.

Yes, there are convenient cutouts in the back of the rack where you can run your cables.

The advantages of these racks are that they are cheap, permanently installed, and look great when filled.

Best Use: These racks are not portable. That factor alone restricts their use to home studios or small businesses.

5. KENUCO Vertical Wall Mountable Rack →

KENUCO 19 Inch Steel Vertical Rack and Wall Mountable Server Rack Mount (Black-2U)

$39.99

This low profile, highly durable wall rack can handle up to 75 pounds of gear, including studio equipment, server gear, telecommunications devices, and more. It offers open airflow to ensure gear is properly ventilated.

Check Price on Amazon

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/16/2024 08:17 am GMT

What’s Inside: The kit includes the rack, eight screws, eight connectors, four wall-mounting bolts, and an Allen wrench of the appropriate size.

Top Features: The KENUCO 19-Inch Steel Vertical Wall Mountable Rack is an original and unique product in the rack mount market. It is a step above the StarTech.com version that holds equipment in a vertical format, which allows you open access to the connections and controls.

The solid steel construction lets you hang up to 175 pounds of equipment in a small space within your home studio, freeing up more space in cramped studio environments.

The product costs nearly double that of the StarTech.com wall mount rack but more than makes up for it in convenience.

Best Use: The vertical rack mount is a perfect fit in a home studio or a small business where space is at a premium.

6. Procraft Equipment Rack →

Procraft 4U 12" Deep Equipment Rack 4 Space - Made in the USA - With Rack Screws

$93.00

Check Price on Amazon

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/15/2024 11:52 pm GMT

What’s Inside: The kit includes the rack and a set of screws and washers to attach up to four pieces of equipment.

Top Features: The Procraft 12-Inch Equipment Rack is one of the most portable racks on the market. Housing up to four units, this rack, when filled with equipment, is light enough to be carried by the leather strap conveniently attached to the top.

When using this rack, you will find yourself limited to mounting equipment that is only nine inches in depth.

The original intent that drove Procraft to create this rack was to perfect a commercial rack that would sit easily on a desk.

Of course, musicians and other performers found other advantages for its use as its visible presence on stages across the globe attest.

Some users find themselves removing the back rails to install deeper equipment.

The rack consists of an attractive birch plywood and sports a carpeted bottom to reduce vibrations wherever it is placed.

Best Use: The Procraft 12-Inch Equipment Rack is best used as a desktop rack in a home studio.

7. StarTech.com Open Frame Rack →

12U 19in Open Frame Server Rack 22-40in - Server-Racks | StarTech.com

Check Price

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

What’s Inside: The kit includes two support flanges, two post bars, and a structural support brace. It comes with 20 M5 screws and cage nuts, allowing you to install up to five devices immediately after assembly.

Top Features: The StarTech.com 12U Open Frame Rack comes in a variety of sizes—eight-unit, 12-unit, and 16-unit. I chose this rack because it is constructed with strong steel posts to support even the heaviest of equipment in a compact and limited space.

The modern design takes advantage of physical laws to provide the type of support that an entrepreneur appreciates.

The eight-unit rack stands a mere 24 inches in height, the rack takes up little room while providing easy access to the equipment for performers and producers alike.

The 12 and 18-unit racks stand 36 and 48 inches in height respectively and require placement other than under a desk.

Sturdier than the On-Stage rack stand, the rack supports up to 140 pounds of equipment without a grunt.

Coming in a hinged design, the rack is easily moved from one place to another.

Best Use: This rack is built for use in tight spaces, making it ideal for the small home studio. I recommend you consider purchasing it for your second generation of equipment, which is normally heavier than your beginning set of devices.

Additional Equipment for Your Studio Rack

I have included this section as information for any new home studio builders. The section includes essential rack gear for your home studio.

NavePoint Ventilated Shelf →

The NavePoint Cantilever Ventilated 10-Inch Shelf is a useful piece of equipment that takes up only one unit of space in your rack. Its ventilated design allows airflow, and it fills any of those ugly spaces you may have left between equipment while constructing your rack. If you need more depth, it also comes in a 14-inch version.

PDU Power Strip Surge Protector →

Another piece of equipment that covers an unused space is the PDU Power Strip Surge Protector. Instead of using a vulnerable external protector that may unplug or disconnect without notice, this protector fits directly into your rack.

Power Conditioner and Surge Protector →

The Furman M-8X2 Merit Series 8 Outlet Power Conditioner and Surge Protector serves the same purpose but is a bit more expensive.

NavePoint Blank Rack Mount Panel →

The NavePoint 1U Blank Rack Mount Panel serves as a less costly cover for blank spaces and comes with a ventilated surface to encourage airflow for your studio equipment.

NavePoint Lockable Drawer →

To add security along with the convenience of accessibility to your blank space, the NavePoint Server Cabinet Case Lockable Drawer works well to hold those small necessities that every home studio discovers. Pencils, pens, pads, and cards are among those things that litter desks in home studios. Mounting storage drawers in the blank space in your rack cleans your desk while organizing your extra studio equipment.

The DIY Alternative

There are two DIY YouTube videos by Richard diZerega, that I find interesting. They inform you how to build your studio equipment. If you are an avid DIY addict like I am, then you will enjoy these videos. The first is an instruction video on how to build a Studio Equipment Rack. The video includes the sizes of the parts, how to put them together, and how to mount your equipment easily.

The second video involves instruction on how to build a Studio Desk. In this video, Richard includes how to find the correct measurements for the design you favor, how to protect the surface, and how to adjust measurements to accommodate either square or angled rack mounts. After watching these videos, you will appreciate the time and effort that goes into constructing these essential pieces of home studio equipment. The challenge may influence you to purchase a ready-made product, or may, if you are anything like me, set you on the road toward building your own.

What is the Rack Mount Size?

What I find interesting about the standard sizes in-studio rack mounts is the consistency that they employ.

The consistent element has created a market where rack-mounted equipment is restricted to the width of the traditional rack mount, 19-inches, with the height occupied by the module inside of the rack regulated in units. Each unit is 1.75 inches in height.

Many modules are built higher, with some reaching more than ten-units in size.

For the home recording studio, the largest device that you will use is likely four-units.

The Proper Order of Installation on Your Rack Mount

For most of us, our home studio does not include the advanced airflow systems found in production studios.

The unwritten rule is to keep the ambient temperature around your studio equipment below 85-degrees Fahrenheit.

Your home studio rack mount provides the area necessary to allow for heat dissipation.

The rack design configures 0.5 inches of open space between each unit and 0.24-inches of space on each side, allowing for air to flow naturally and cool the equipment.

The trick is to place a module that generates the most heat at the top of the rack creating a chimney type of effect that draws cool air from the bottom and sides of the rack. The order of installation, then, is determined by the module’s heat signature.

Here is the correct order of module installation in a home studio rack mount from top to bottom:

• The power conditioner regulates all power that runs through your equipment. Since all power runs through this module, the heat signature is significant and continuous
• The multi-channel mic preamp is filled with micro-circuitry that produces a tremendous amount of heat. Placing it near the top helps in establishing a chimney airflow effect that whisks away heat
• The headphone amp is a key component of the home studio system. It allows the operator to increase or decrease pure sounds coming through the device to get the perfect aural quality. The device generates little heat
• The monitor management system is a light-weight module that basically distributes the volume to create the stereo effect. Its heat signature is virtually non-existent
• The audio interface works to condition sound and removes noise through a series of in/out cables and switches. The process generates so little heat that the module is the perfect choice to occupy the bottom position of your rack

How to Install Equipment on Your Studio Rack Mount

Rack-mountable equipment has ears installed at the factory. These ears are placed appropriately to fit the standard frame.

Looking at the ears, you can see the tapped holes that match the holes drilled into your rack.

With an assist from another person, these modules are easy to install as you have someone to hold the equipment in place while making the attachment.

If you are alone, the process is more daunting. It is difficult, at best, to hold the equipment in place while screwing in the fasteners. Heavier modules may be simple for a modern Hercules to install but are nearly impossible for most of us.

Many first-time designers of their home studio lay their racks with the back to the floor and place the equipment into the rack, screwing them into place before setting the rack upright.

This technique works well during your initial efforts to construct your studio. If you are adding equipment later, using such a method would require you to disconnect all your existing equipment before laying the back of the rack on the floor.

Types of Studio Rack Mounts

The main types of rack mounts and studio rack cabinets for homes studios come in three categories, including:

• Basic studio racks are the cheapest available and works well in the home studio where the function is more valuable than fancy design
• The portable rack is designed for use by musicians and groups while on the road. Portable racks are more expensive as portability requires a stronger framework and reliable, lockable wheels
• The high-end studio rack is the most expensive on the market. I do not recommend these for a home studio due to the cost. These racks are insulated with a soundproofing material that does not conduct heat and therefore requires a silent fan to create airflow to protect your expensive equipment from heat damage

A Final Word

There are innumerable reasons for setting up a home studio.

Whether you’re looking to record music, do voiceover work, make a podcast, or do something else, having the right equipment is essential.

Whatever drives you to build a home studio, don’t get discouraged by the complexity you find there.

When you are stuck, go to My Voiceover Equipment to find an answer.

If you are looking for equipment beyond audio racks, then check out some of my other guides below for my analysis of those important pieces that add so much to your home studio:

• The Best Voice Over Microphones
• The Best Wireless Microphones
• The Best Acoustic Foam Panels for Home Studios
• The Best Cheap Studio Desks
• The Best Studio Headphones 
• The Best Microphone Reflection Filters

The post 7 Best Studio Rack Mounts & Cabinets for Home Recording (2023 Guide) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Whether you’re recording voiceovers, podcasts, or instructional videos, a clean microphone ensures that your audio is crisp and clear, free from any interference that dust or dirt might cause. Not only that, regularly disinfecting microphones is an important for helping keep everyone healthy and avoiding cross contamination.

In this article, I’ll cover the importance of practicing good hygiene with audio gear, how to clean both condenser and dynamic microphones, the tools and products to use for microphone cleaning, the things to avoid, and the steps to follow during the process. Knowing this valuable information will greatly benefit you, your devices, and anyone else who uses them.

The Importance of Hygiene When It Comes to Audio Equipment

Since we speak into microphones and our mouths spread germs quickly, these devices can become extremely dirty. 

It is also common for handheld microphones to frequently be passed around, used, and held by different people.

Even if you may be unable to see it, this causes saliva, sweat, makeup, and skin particles to land on the devices.

If you do not clean your microphone often, it will cause a build-up on it. You can determine if your audio equipment has a build-up by opening the top part and taking a look inside. By choosing to continuously ignore this build-up, the particles will continue to accumulate, and your device may begin to sound muffled.

The reason for this is because build-ups in a mic can significantly reduce its frequency response, which will cause the device not to perform to its best ability. Therefore, if your device is sounding unusual and has not been cleaned in a long time, you should check to see if it has a build-up.

To keep everyone safe, healthy, and happy, you should practice good hygiene with devices just like you would with any other item in your home or office space.

Cleaning a microphone consists of fully removing germs and dirt with soap and water, and disinfecting a mic consists of eliminating germs with chemical products to kill bacteria. Most people choose to first clean the device then disinfect it for extra protection against germs, bacteria, and dirt.

It’s important to keep in mind that there is no single wrong or right way to clean your device as long as you thoroughly clean it as often as possible. However, there are some recommended cleaning dos and don’ts for taking care of your mics as best as possible.

Below, I will provide a guide on how to clean two popular types of devices, the dynamic and condenser microphones, in which you can follow for inspiration.

How to Clean a Dynamic Mic

In my experience, dynamic microphones are the easiest to clean. Most of the dynamic mics have a grille that is very easy to unscrew and separate from the body of the device, making microphone cleaning pretty simple.

Tools and Products for Cleaning a Dynamic Mic:

• Washing liquid which is typically used to wash dishes
• A toothbrush
• Cleaning surface disinfectant wipes
• A paper towel roll

Things to Avoid while Cleaning a Dynamic Microphone:

• Avoid using any cleaning product that contains bleach
• Avoid using hydrogen peroxide
• Avoid using hand sanitizers
• Avoid using abrasive cleaning materials that may be too rough on the device, such as a scouring pad or scrub brush
• Avoid excessively hot water. Warm water works best.
• Avoid placing the device back together before it is completely dry to avoid rust

5 Steps of Cleaning a Dynamic Mic:

1. Remove the Grille

The first step is to gently remove the grille from the body of the device. It should easily come off with a firm twist and unscrewing. Do not use too much strength or you could permanently damage the device.

After you have successfully detached the grille, remove the foam windshield as well. You may begin to notice that the foam windshield has saliva build-up, and the grille has lipstick, dirt, and saliva build-up.

2. Wash the Grille

Next, you will need to use the toothbrush to apply warm water and washing liquid. Begin scrubbing the grille of the device to get rid of any build-up. Be gentle and ensure that you get into all corners and edges.

3. Dry the Grille

Completely dry the grille with paper towels before reattaching it to the device. If you do not make sure that it is entirely dry, you may cause the device to rust. Air drying is another method you can use if you have the extra time.

4. Wash the Windscreen

Now, you will need to wash the foam windshield with water and washing liquid until you are sure that all build-up has been completely eliminated. Again, you will need to make sure that the foam windshield is entirely dry before putting it back on the device. I would recommend letting it air dry overnight or using a blow dryer if you need it to dry quickly.

5. Clean the Mic Body

Use the surface cleaner disinfectant wipes to wipe down and clean the body of the device.

If you need to clean your dynamic audio gear quickly between multiple people using it, use a mouthwash that has been diluted with water. Make sure the device stays upside down while scrubbing the grille to ensure that all particles fall out. This will not be an extensive cleaning, but it will at least assure the next user that the equipment is clean for them to use.

For a visual look at how to clean a dynamic microphone, watch Worship Leader Hangout’s YouTube video. The individual in the video gives an in-depth guide on how he sets up a routine to clean and sanitize his dynamic devices to prevent the spreading of germs.

How to Clean a Condenser Mic

Cleaning a condenser device is usually a little more difficult than a dynamic one. This is because condenser devices are more fragile which means you must be very careful.

Tools and Products for Cleaning a Condenser Microphone:

• A toothbrush
• Cleaning surface disinfectant wipes
• Paper towel roll
• Washing liquid which is typically used to wash dishes

Things to Avoid while Cleaning a Condenser Mic:

• Avoid using any liquid products directly on the condenser microphone element itself. Only clean the grille and windscreen.
• Avoid using any cleaning product that contains bleach
• Avoid using hydrogen peroxide
• Avoid using hand sanitizers
• Avoid using cleaning materials that may be too rough on the device, such as a scouring pad or scrub brush
• Avoid excessively hot water. Warm water works best.
• Avoid placing the device back together before it is completely dry. Even a tiny bit of moisture will permanently damage the condenser device.

5 Steps of Cleaning a Condenser Mic

Depending on if the grille of your condenser device is able to be removed or not will determine how you should clean it.

1. Remove the Grille

Carefully remove the grille from the body of the device if possible. This may be tedious and require removing screws. Ensure that the device itself never comes into contact with any water or liquid products. A tiny amount of moisture can cause permanent damage to the device.

2. Wash the Grille

If the grille is able to be removed from the device, take the windscreen off as well. Begin washing the grille with a toothbrush and washing liquid just like you would for the dynamic device. Use warm water and focus on eliminating the build-up that may be on the grille. Also, check the corners and edges for hidden particles.

If the grille is unable to be detached from the device, gently use a dry toothbrush to scrub the grille. Hold the device upside down to let any dirt and particles fall out onto the ground. Try not to push any grime or toothbrush bristles through the grille, or it will be stuck in the chamber forever.

3. Dry the Grille

If you have a detachable grille that you were able to wash, dry it completely before reattaching it to the device. This is an extremely crucial step because a wet microphone grill will significantly damage a condenser device. You can use a paper towel, but I would also recommend using a hair dryer or letting it air dry to ensure that it is 100 percent dry.

4. Wash the Windscreen

Next, you should begin washing the windscreen with water and washing liquid until you are sure that all build-up has been removed. As stated before, you will need to be sure that the windscreen is completely dry before placing it back on the device. This is very important. Air drying overnight or using a hair dryer is the best way to dry the windscreen.

5. Clean the Mic Body

Use the surface cleaner disinfectant wipes to wipe down and clean the body of the device.

If there are multiple people using the same condenser device and you are unable to clean it after each use, I would recommend using removable external foam windscreens that can be cleaned quickly and easily with soap and water. By using these, you will be able to switch out windscreens and clean them, which ensures that the audio gear will be protected from germs and grime.

However, it is important to remember to make sure that the removable external foam windscreen is completely dry each time by using a blow dryer because water cannot touch a condenser microphone at all.

To find out more information and see somebody clean a condenser mic, take a look at Eklo’s YouTube video. In the video, he takes the time to show how he cleans his large condenser device using simple products like a paintbrush and distilled water.

Additional Parts of Microphone Cleaning

These parts also collect a lot of bacteria and germs! When cleaning microphones, make sure you also sanitize these components…

Cables

Most people probably do not think about it, but cables do need to be cleaned every once in a while. They are typically on the floor, ground, or on a surface that can easily collect dirt, dust, and particles that have fallen. To clean them, gently rub them with coconut or olive oil. This is a simple, quick way to get rid of anything that may have fallen on the cables.

You can also use warm water and soap if you do not have any oil, but you should make sure that no water or soap enters the connectors or goes near the mics. After cleaning, let the cables air dry for a few days to ensure that all germs have been killed.

Another method to try is UV-C light which is known to eliminate any germs. By exposing your cables to UV-C light as much as possible, they will remain clean and germ-free. This type of light will not affect the functionality of the cables, but you should be sure to protect yourself when close to the light.

Do not sanitize cables, as it will cause the cable jacket to wear and tear.

Windscreens

As mentioned above, be sure to always remove foam windscreens from the devices and wash them carefully with warm water and soap. Air dry them for a couple days or blow dry them for quicker results.

It is not recommended to apply isopropyl alcohol (rubbing alcohol) or chemicals to the windscreen because it will damage it. Therefore, you should thoroughly wash the windscreen to ensure that all germs and dirt are completely removed.

Final Thoughts

As I’ve said, knowing how to clean a microphone is a great idea. You might feel like it’s an unnecessary step or that it adds to your daily tasks, but it’s worth taking the time to do.

Once you make the process of cleaning mics a part of your studio maintenance routine, it should become a normal part of your day. It is important for hygiene and cleanliness, which is important for you, your audio equipment, and others who may use it.

Have any questions about how to clean a microphone? Comment below and we’ll help you out.

The post How to Clean a Microphone in 5 Steps [+Useful Videos and Links] appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As an experienced eLearning creator, I’ve learned that the quality of your audio can make or break the effectiveness of your digital content.

In this article, I’ll guide you through the simple yet crucial steps to adjust your microphone sensitivity in Windows to ensure your recordings are clear and free from unwanted background noise or distortions. Whether you’re recording voiceovers for tutorials, lectures, interactive modules, or any other purpose, mastering this aspect of audio setup will significantly enhance the overall quality of your educational offerings.

A Primer on Mic Sensitivity

Mic sensitivity is the degree to which a capsule picks up sound.

A microphone capsule is usually comprised of internal components like a diaphragm and solid plate that measure changes in air pressure through sound waves. A sensitive device will have a diaphragm that vibrates easily, meaning it will measure smaller changes in air pressure resulting in more sensitivity.

By and large, condenser mics (b) tend to be more sensitive because they employ this type of internal design. As a result, condenser models are usually used in studio recording environments to capture natural sounds and sounds that require detail.

Dynamic mics (a), on the other hand, employ components that are less conducive to movement and electricity. As such, they tend to be less sensitive and are suitable for live recording and the audio recording of louder sounds.

One important thing to note about microphone sensitivity is that there is no way to increase or decrease sensitivity after a sound has been recorded.

While there are software solutions available that can clean up or restore damaged sound files, the audio has been recorded at a certain level. You can’t fix mic sensitivity after the fact, so what you’ve recorded is what you’ve recorded.

This is why it’s a good idea to understand the difference between mic volume and mic sensitivity in order to get a recording right the first time.

Microphone Volume vs Sensitivity

In the world of recording, there are plenty of times where certain jargon gets used in the wrong context. For the most part, this doesn’t cause too many issues for seasoned veterans, but if you’re just starting out in recording, confusing terms with one another can lead to problems in a hurry.

An example of this can be found when talking about mic sensitivity and microphone volume or gain. These terms may get used interchangeably as they relate to how loud a sound is during the recording and playback processes, but they have very different meanings.

If you’re confused about these terms, you may not know how to adjust microphone sensitivity settings or select the right mic for your needs based on sensitivity. In doing this, you may be adding more gain and causing distortion and clipping in your sound capture.

Volume can be understood as how loud a sound is perceived based on the magnitude of the sound waves of an audio source.

In simpler terms, volume is how loud a sound is to the listener.

If you’re standing in front of a jet engine when a plane takes off, you’re going to perceive the sound as much louder than someone who hears the same sound a mile away. This is because volume is about perception, and perception of sound is usually based on proximity to a sound source and how easily the sound waves can be captured by the listener.

Sensitivity, on the other hand, is based on the point at which sound waves begin to be perceived.

You can compare sensitivity in recording gear to how your ear drums work.

When you hear a sound, you only perceive the sound and its volume because sound waves cause your ear drum to vibrate. These vibrations are translated by your brain into sound. The stronger the vibrations and the closer you are to a sound source, the more volume is perceived.

So, mic sensitivity is based on how easily it perceives volume.

It perceives volume by using internal components like diaphragms that measure sound waves. The diaphragm can be thought of as your ear drum.

A very sensitive device will have a thin diaphragm that reacts to sound waves easily, but a less sensitive model will require sound waves to have a greater magnitude in order to register.

This is also why you can be farther away from a sensitive microphone and still capture audio, but you need to be loud and close to a dynamic one to get the same result.

Adding more volume or gain to a mic input signal only amplifies the perceived sound. It doesn’t actually make the device itself more sensitive to picking up sound.

Can You Change Mic Sensitivity?

For the most part, sensitivity is based on how the microphone was manufactured.

Typically, the mic sensitivity can only be altered by changing its polar pattern.

The polar pattern determines which part of the capsule is active and at what angle. Ultimately, this can change which areas of a capsule are energized to determine where sound sensitivity will be greatest and from which direction.

While you may not have many options to fix mic sensitivity, software can be used to control the volume input of most microphones in Windows to achieve greater control over gain levels. This emulates a change to sensitivity by reducing the potential for a mic to clip and distort recordings, allowing you to record a whisper and turn up the volume to make the sound equal to a yell.

Some sound cards and audio driver enhancements may also give you options to employ noise cancellation effects in the recording path.

How to Adjust Microphone Sensitivity Settings in Windows 10

Windows 10 offers a number of sound control features for audio professionals and beginners alike.

Unfortunately, failing to properly configure and fix mic sensitivity (actually, gain) in Windows 10 can lead to recordings that suffer from background noise, unwanted breath noises, sound pop-in, and other audio issues.

Thankfully, you can adjust mic sensitivity (gain) in Windows 10 by following these simple steps:

1. Left-click on the “Start” button on your desktop home screen. This button looks like the Windows logo and is usually located in the bottom left of the home screen by default.
2. Select “Settings” by left-clicking on the gear icon in the list that appears.
3. You then want to left-click on “System” to bring up a list of adjustable system settings.
4. Select “Sound” from the list on the left.
5. Under the “Input” section, make sure your preferred mic is selected as the current input device.
6. Left-click on “Device Properties”.
7. Left-click on “Additional Device Properties” which can be found on the right side of the screen.
8. This will open a new microphone properties window with options located in various tabs. Left-click on the option for “Levels”.
9. Here, you will have the ability to change the microphone level and possibly a microphone boost setting that can determine the volume of your mic signal coming into your computer.

Please note that your specific device may or may not have the ability to change all of the settings listed above. Some audio drivers and audio processing units will have their own proprietary settings. If you are unable to find settings to make changes to your microphone input or sensitivity, please contact your mic manufacturer for more details.

How to Reduce Background Noise and Buzzing in Windows 10

You may also be able to reduce background noise and buzzing in your microphone by ensuring that all cords are connected properly. A poorly connected or damaged cable can cause a connection not to be grounded properly, and this can lead to a buzzing in your sound output from the mic.

Some noise cancellation enhancements may also be available depending on your audio driver and sound card. These are usually proprietary add-ons that are accessed through a separate control panel that gets installed when you install your micropone drivers.

How to Check the Driver

If you want to know more details about the driver that is controlling your mic, you can check it by:

1. Follow steps 1-7 as listed above.
2. Instead of selecting “Levels”, make sure you’re on the “General” tab.
3. Left-click on “Properties” in the “Controller Information” section. This will open a new window.
4. Left-click on “Driver” in the tabs provided. This will display information about the audio driver controlling your selected mic.
5. You can also select “Driver Details” to get more in-depth information about the driver and its associated files.

If you have gone through all of the steps provided above to adjust sound settings, utilize enhancements and check the audio driver, but you’re still experiencing problems with microphone gain and sensitivity, you can run the Troubleshooter to have Windows automatically check for hardware and software problems.

How to Run the Troubleshooter

1. Follow steps 1-4 as described above for accessing the “Sound” settings.
2. Find the input device you want to troubleshoot and make sure it is selected in the drop-down menu.
3. Left-click the button that reads “Troubleshoot” under the “Input” section.
4. Follow the prompts. Windows will provide feedback and will attempt to automatically repair any problems it finds.

How to Change Mic Sensitivity in Windows 7

Although Windows 7 is a bit of an older version of the operating system, it is still used by many people across the world due to its efficient features, including its sound settings.

If you’re using Windows 7 to record and edit audio, you’ll be happy to know that you can also adjust mic sensitivity (gain) with ease.

Below are some easy steps you can take to fix mic sensitivity settings (gain) in Windows 7:

1. Left-click on the “Start” button from your desktop home screen. This is the icon that looks like the Windows logo and is located in the bottom left corner of your home screen by default.
2. Type “Sound” into the search bar.
3. Choose “Sound” from the list “Control Panel”.
4. In the window that opens, look for the tab labeled “Recording”. Left-click this option to see a list of audio input devices connected to your computer. The item with a green checkmark is the enabled input device.
5. Left-click on the device you want to change.
6. Once the item is highlighted, left-click on “Properties” in the bottom right of the “Sound” settings window.
7. A new window will open with additional tabs. Select the tab labeled “Levels”.
8. The “Levels” tab will provide you with options for “Microphone” and “Microphone Boost”. Use the slider controls to raise or lower the gain.
9. You can also select the tab labeled “Enhancements” if available. This tab will provide you with additional mic controls that may include noise cancellation features for additional control over mic gain and sensitivity.

As with Windows 10, you may not see all of these settings in Windows 7 due to differences in audio driver properties and microphone manufacturer specifications. If you are unable to find all of these settings when trying to adjust sensitivity or input gain, contact your mic’s manufacturer.

Useful Resources

• Understanding Microphone Sensitivity
• How to read microphone specifications
• How to Connect a Microphone to Your Computer
• Microphone Test
• The Best Voice Over Microphones
• What is a dynamic mic?
• How to clean a microphone
• How do wireless microphones work?

Final Thoughts

Although software can help when making adjustments to mic sensitivity, you should also consider your recording environment.

A device that is sensitive by design, such as a condenser mic, will produce better results when used in a recording studio that has been acoustically treated as opposed to being used in a noisy recording environment.

This is also good to know if using your mic for Zoom meetings and other online chat purposes.

By combining the right model and the right recording environment with the knowledge of how to adjust microphone sensitivity, you can have better control over your recording experience and the quality of your audio.

Have any questions about how to change mic sensitivity on your computer? Comment below and we’ll help you out.

The post How to Change Mic Sensitivity in Windows for Quality Recording appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As someone who’s been in this industry for nearly 20 years, I can tell you firsthand that eLearning development jobs are in high demand, and it can be a lucrative, fulfilling career to pursue. In fact, the Bureau of Labor Statistics reports that employment of training and development specialists will grow 6% from 2022 to 2032, faster than the average for all occupations.

In this article, I’ll explore the role of an eLearning Developer, including the skills and experience needed to succeed in this career. I’ll also discuss the different types of eLearning development jobs available.

What is an eLearning Developer?

An eLearning Developer is a professional who is responsible for the creation of digital learning content. This includes the design and development of the content itself and the delivery of that content to learners.

An eLearning Developer typically works with a team of instructional designers, Subject Matter Experts (SMEs), and other stakeholders to create compelling digital learning solutions. They use a variety of tools and software to create engaging, interactive content that meets the needs of the learners. In addition to their content development skills, eLearning Developers must also understand how people learn and instructional design principles.

The role of an eLearning Developer has become increasingly important as the demand for online learning has grown. With more and more businesses and organizations looking to create digital learning experiences for their employees and customers, the need for skilled professionals who can develop high-quality content is greater than ever.

If you’re interested in becoming an eLearning Developer, you should know a few things about what the job actually entails.

An eLearning Developer’s Responsibilities

The daily responsibilities of eLearning developers are numerous.

The eLearning developer is responsible for creating eLearning content that is engaging and interactive. They must be able to use various authoring tools to create eLearning courses that are visually appealing and conform to the instructional design.

Even though the instructional designer creates the storyboard and content outline, the eLearning developer has a significant role in the final product’s look and feel. They must be able to take the vision of the instructional designer and turn it into an engaging and interactive eLearning course.

The eLearning developer must be able to communicate with all stakeholders, including the instructional designer, subject matter experts, and other members of the development team. They must also effectively communicate with the end-users of the eLearning courses.

The eLearning developer must have a good understanding of adult learners and how they learn best. They should be familiar with different learning theories and instructional design models. This will enable them to create eLearning courses that are aligned with the learning objectives and meet the needs of the learners.

eLearning developers also have to spend time staying up-to-date with new technologies that can be used to create eLearning courses. They need to be familiar with different authoring tools and know-how to use them to create interactive and engaging eLearning courses.

eLearning development is generally a team effort. The developer must work effectively with other team members, such as instructional designers, graphic designers, and subject matter experts. They should also be able to take feedback from others and use it to improve the quality of their work.

When working in a team, it is also essential for the developer to be able to take on different roles as needed. For example, they may need to be able to lead the development of a project or take on more of a supporting role when necessary.

eLearning developers also spend the majority of their time using their technical skills. They should be able to use different authoring tools, such as Articulate Storyline, Adobe Captivate, and Lectora. They should also be familiar with different programming languages, such as HTML, CSS, and JavaScript.

While eLearning developers need to be able to work effectively in a team, they also need to work independently. This means that they should be able to manage their own time and resources effectively and meet deadlines.

Who Does The eLearning Developer Report To?

An eLearning developer usually reports to a project manager or other senior members of the eLearning team. However, they may also work closely with instructional designers, subject matter experts (SMEs), and other stakeholders in the development process.

Typically, an eLearning developer has a background in instructional design, educational technology, or a related field. They should also have strong technical skills and be able to use various authoring tools and software programs.

What’s the Difference Between an eLearning Developer and Instructional Designer?

While some people use the terms “eLearning developer” and “instructional designer” interchangeably, they’re not exactly the same thing, and there are some important differences to point out.

Here’s what each brings to the table:

The instructional designer will work with you to write learning objectives, gather information from subject matter experts, and create content for your facilitator guides, eLearning courses, or instructional videos.

Once the instructional designer has laid out the groundwork, the elearning developer will take over, using all the content and assets provided to produce the final product. eLearning developers will look over everything at the beginning of the development phase to see if there are any potential roadblocks that could impede their progress (e.g. the instructional designer is requesting something that can’t be developed properly). They will then use a range of development tools to build out the content in an interactive, engaging format.

Together, both experts can help create a truly engaging and effective learning experience.

That said, eLearning developers can benefit from learning more about instructional design. Understanding the why behind certain decisions can them better comprehend what is being asked of them. They can also collaborate more effectively with instructional designers to ensure that the end product matches their vision.

If you’re an aspiring eLearning developer interested in learning a bit more about instructional design, consider enrolling in the Professional Certificate in Instructional Design program from Emeritus. Covering everything from the basics to the latest theories and best practices, you’ll learn to design effective online learning experiences that engage and educate students.

You can learn more about the program and request a brochure at this link.

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Useful Resources

• How to become an eLearning developer
• How to become a chief learning officer
• What is a chief learning officer?
• Chief learning officer salary data
• Chief learning officer resume tips
• What is an instructional designer?
• How to become an instructional designer
• What is a learning and development specialist?
• How to become a learning and development specialist
• What is a learning experience designer?
• How to become a learning experience designer

A Final Word on eLearning Development

An eLearning developer possesses the necessary skills and qualities to develop successful eLearning courses.

To be a successful eLearning developer, it’s important to be passionate about learning and desire to learn. If you have these qualities, you may be well-suited for eLearning development.

Whether you’re just starting your eLearning development career or are a seasoned professional, always remember to keep learning and growing.

The eLearning field is constantly changing and evolving, so it’s important to stay up-to-date on the latest trends and technologies. By learning and growing, you can ensure that you’ll be a successful eLearning developer for years to come.

Have any questions about what an eLearning developer is or what they do? Comment below and we’ll help you out.

The post What is an eLearning Developer? Job Description & Responsibilities appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

The demand for CLOs has grown significantly in recent years as companies look to bolster their learning development initiatives, and the role of the CLO has grown to encompass a variety of duties related to employee development.

In the guide below, I’ll tell you everything you need to know about the role of chief learning officer, including defining the position, the roles and responsibilities of a CLO, who CLOs report to, and more.

What is a Chief Learning Officer?

A chief learning officer (CLO) is a corporate executive responsible for overseeing all aspects of employee learning and development within an organization. In conjunction with their learning and development teams, they help shape the minds of company employees through engaging online and in-person training programs. Instead of traditional classroom teaching, the CLO takes a comprehensive approach and encourage continuous learning throughout an employee’s tenure.

Simply put, the Chief Learning Officer, or CLO, is the ultimate authority on employee development and learning strategy for the entire organization. Their role is to design and execute training programs that cover everything from initial recruitment to the latest industry innovations, all with an eye on aligning everything with company culture.

The CLO leads the development of strategy and programs to ensure that employees have the skills and knowledge they need to be successful in their roles.

This might include everything from providing ongoing training and employee development programs to evaluating the effectiveness of these initiatives in achieving employee growth.

Additionally, the CLO often works closely with other executives to align workplace learning initiatives with the overall business strategy.

In recent years, the role of CLO has become increasingly important as organizations seek to stay competitive in a rapidly changing global economy.

As a result, chief learning officers are now responsible for leading some of the most critical learning and development initiatives within their organizations.

The data shows that around 90% of Chief Learning Officers have corporate experience, averaging 18 years. Like other executive roles, this position demands someone with extensive hands-on experience across various organizational and industry tiers.

Some companies may have a different job title for this role, like:

• VP of Learning and Development
• Chief Education Officer
• Learning Manager
• Head of Education
• Senior Manager of Learning and Development

Chief Learning Officer vs Chief Talent Officer: What’s the Difference?

The terms “chief learning officer” and “chief talent officer” are often used interchangeably, but are they actually the same?

In short, yes, CLOs and CTDOs are basically the same things. The terms are often used interchangeably because they both refer to the same set of responsibilities, which include managing and implementing learning and development initiatives within an organization.

The role of a learning leader is critical to a company’s success, regardless of whether they go by Chief Talent Development Officer (CTDO) or Chief Learning Officer (CLO).

However, CTDO may be a better fit for today’s learning leaders due to its all-encompassing nature. These individuals must possess an array of skills and exhibit foresight to shape and lead this vital aspect of organizational growth.

The Chief Learning Officer’s Responsibilities

The role of the CLO involves a number of responsibilities and day-to-day duties.

A chief learning officer (CLO) is responsible for the overall design, development, and delivery of corporate learning and development programs within an organization.

In addition to overseeing the creation of training content, the CLO is also responsible for ensuring that all employees have access to the resources they need to learn new skills and improve their performance.

To accomplish this, the CLO works closely with managers and HR professionals to identify employee training needs and assess employee learning styles.

The CLO also develops relationships with external trainers and instructional designers to create custom programs that meet the specific needs of the organization.

In addition to these responsibilities, the CLO also plays a key role in evaluating the effectiveness of organizational learning programs and making improvements as needed.

By working collaboratively with other members of the leadership team, the CLO can ensure that all employees have the opportunity to grow and develop professionally.

For crafting an effective organizational training strategy, a CLO must have a deep understanding of the knowledge requirements and timing for employees at different levels. They should also be adept at identifying potential challenges faced by staff and devising solutions to overcome these hurdles.

Who Does the Chief Learning Officer Report To?

In some organizations, the CLO may report to the CEO or another senior manager.

Typically, this involves working closely with department heads and other members of senior management on all aspects of learning and development.

Additionally, the CLO will often work with the chief human resources officer (CHRO) to ensure that all learning initiatives are aligned with the organization’s overall HR strategy.

By working together, the CLO and CHRO can engage in strategic planning for developing employees that meets the needs of both the individual and the organization.

Depending on the size and structure of an organization, there may also be other individuals involved in overseeing this process.

Regardless of who exactly the CLO reports to, however, it is critical that this individual has direct access to key decision-makers in order to execute his or her duties effectively.

After all, without support from senior leadership and collaboration across departments, a company’s ability to develop its workforce will inevitably suffer.

So whether you’re an aspiring CLO or simply someone looking to advance your career in corporate training, it’s essential to recognize just how important this role can be for organizational success.

Useful Resources

• How to become a chief learning officer
• Chief learning officer salary data
• Chief learning officer resume tips
• What is an instructional designer?
• How to become an instructional designer
• What is an eLearning developer?
• How to become an eLearning developer
• What is a learning and development specialist?
• How to become a learning and development specialist
• What is a learning experience designer?
• How to become a learning experience designer

A Final Word on Chief Learning Officers

If you’re interested in pursuing a career as a CLO, it’s important to understand this won’t happen overnight.

It requires a great deal of expertise, experience, and an in-depth knowledge of the corporate training environment.

You’ll need to develop your skills as both a leader and a teacher in order to effectively serve as a bridge between senior management and training staff.

But with dedication and the right training, you can become an invaluable asset for any organization. With the right strategies and insight, you can help empower employees to reach their full potential contribute to the success of the organization.

That’s why the role of chief learning officer should not overlooked or underestimated—it has invaluable impact on organizational growth, development, and prosperity.

A good place to start your journey is by enrolling in the Professional Certificate in Instructional Design program from Emeritus. This intensive program explores everything from the fundamentals to the latest best practices for online learning implementation in depth. In only 5 months, you can get the expert-led training you need to start building a career in the field of corporate learning and development.

You can learn more about the program and request a brochure at this link.

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Have any questions about what a chief learning officer is or what they do? Comment below and I’ll try my best to answer.

The post What is a Chief Learning Officer? Job Description & Responsibilities appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Many learners respond well to visual media, so using fun, educational videos can be a beneficial learning strategy. You can even present your record videos as live events using virtual conference software.

But if you’re new to using video, you may be struggling to sync your video and your audio files for smooth, coherent presentation. As someone who’s created countless eLearning videos over the last nearly 20 years, I’m going to share some of my favorite ways to get it done.

How to Sync Video and Audio: Top Options

Here are the reviews on the best software options for audio and video synchronization. Make sure to also check out our full guide to video presentations software options.

1. Loom

Loom

Loom is a powerful screen recording app that lets you create videos of whatever is on your screen or webcam. Easily record, add voiceovers, share, and interact with your videos.

Try It Free

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Using Loom to sync audio and video, especially for creating a voiceover for a presentation or video, is a straightforward and efficient process. Here’s how you could do it:

1. Prepare Your Presentation or Video: First, have your presentation, video, or any visual material you want to showcase ready on your screen. This could be a PowerPoint presentation, a software demonstration, or any other visual content.

2. Set Up Loom for Recording: Open Loom and choose the screen recording option. Ensure that you select the correct screen or application window that you want to record.

3. Record Your Voiceover: As you start recording with Loom, play your presentation or video on the screen. Simultaneously, narrate or provide your voiceover. Loom will capture both the audio (your voice) and the video (your screen) in real-time.

4. Utilize Loom’s Features: Take advantage of Loom’s features such as pausing and resuming the recording if you need a moment to collect your thoughts or prepare for the next section of your presentation.

5. Editing: After recording, Loom allows for basic editing. If there are sections where the audio and video are not perfectly in sync, you can trim these parts out. However, for more complex editing, you might need to use additional video editing software.

6. Share or Export Your Video: Once you’re satisfied with the recording, you can share it directly from Loom or download it for further use or editing in another program.

This method is particularly useful for creating instructional videos, tutorials, or professional presentations where you need to explain visual material. Loom’s simplicity and ease of use make it an excellent tool for syncing audio and video without the need for complex video editing skills.

Features

• Screen & Camera Recording: Capture your screen, webcam, or both simultaneously.
• HD Video Quality: Recordings are in high-definition for clear visuals.
• Instant Sharing: Share videos instantly with a link.
• Video Trimming: Edit your videos by trimming out unnecessary parts.
• Custom Thumbnails: Choose or upload a custom thumbnail for your video.
• Drawing Tool: Highlight or draw on your screen while recording.
• Viewer Insights: Track who watched your video and for how long.
• Comments and Reactions: Viewers can leave comments and reactions on videos.
• Privacy Controls: Control who can view your video with privacy settings.
• Integration with Popular Tools: Integrate with tools like Slack, Gmail, and more.
• Unlimited Storage: Store all your videos on Loom’s cloud without any storage limit.
• Closed Captions: Automatically generated and editable closed captions for accessibility.
• Noise Suppression: Reduce background noise in your recordings.

Click here to try Loom for free.

2. Camtasia

Camtasia is a software option that allows you to use a Microsoft PowerPoint plugin to create video presentations. You can also use a direct screencast to create great videos of your presentations! It is perfect for tutorials and other educational materials.

Download Camtasia here!

Features

• Pre-built video templates
• Whiteboard animation software capabilities
• Simplified editing
• Webcam capture
• Music
• Interactivity and quizzing
• Green screen
• Closed captions

System Requirements

• Microsoft Windows 10 (64-bit) 1607 version or later or macOS 10.13
• 2.8 Ghz 6th Generation Intel® Core i3 Processor with 2 CPU Cores or 2.8 Ghz 1st Generation AMD® Ryzen 3 Processor with 2 CPU Cores
• 8GB of RAM
• 4GB of available disk space
• 1366×768 monitor resolution

User Feedback
“It has just enough features/capabilities where you don’t feel like you’re missing anything key, but also isn’t bogged down by super granular customization.”

In this video, an expert gives great tips on how to use audio and video cues while recording to make it easier to sync your images and sounds perfectly.

This tutorial by Cam Answers is perfect for beginners looking to use Camtasia for the first time. You’ll learn how to access and use all of the different features of the program to get optimum results. The video pays particular focus to using Camtasia tools to sync audio and video.

3. Premiere Pro

Premiere Pro is an Adobe product used for editing video and sound. The software operates by allowing you to create a timeline for your videos, making it simple to edit and sync every aspect of your video.

Download Premiere Pro here!

Features

• Color management
• Quick export
• Import from any file format
• Trim footage precisely
• Add animations

System Requirements

• Intel® 6th Gen or newer CPU – or AMD Ryzen 1000 Series or newer CPU
• Microsoft Windows 10 (64-bit) version 1803 or later or macOS v10.14 or later
• 8 GB of RAM
• 2 GB of GPU VRAM
• 8 GB of available hard-disk space
• 1280 x 800 monitor resolution

User Feedback
“The program offers complete control over the videos with powerful features for any kind of editing. A novice can get in and import video, separate, edit, add text and splice very easily. Also the expert can make masterful edits for professional use in all different kinds of media.”

If you’re new to Premiere Pro, this is the tutorial for you! In this tutorial, you’ll learn the easiest method for syncing audio and video in a few simple steps using the Premiere Pro software.

For more advanced sound and video editing and syncing, Andrew Kan has the perfect tutorial. This video goes in-depth into the tools and features that are available in Premiere Pro. Following his tutorial, you can produce high-quality audio syncing for any video.

4. VideoPad

VideoPad is also designed for the average user; with an intuitive user interface, everyone from beginners to professionals can create professional-quality video quickly and easily. To get the most out of the software, you can add plugins for other NCH products.

Download VideoPad here!

Features

• Drag and drop video clips
• Effects and transitions
• Fast processors
• Fine-tune color
• Share directly to YouTube
• Video stabilization

System Requirements
Windows 7 and above or Mac OS X 10.5 or above

User Feedback
“I love that I can layout my videos on layers, something that the big players on the market have (being the heaviest and most expensive) but the simplest don’t.”

The VideoPad software is frequently used for music videos and podcasts. This tutorial gives a quick rundown of the tools and processes that you can use in the software to pull together video and audio for your video.

This is a much more straightforward tutorial, giving a basic overview of how to combine audio and video using VideoPad. This tutorial focuses more on the basic process and less on the intricacies of perfectly syncing your sound.

5. iMovie

iMovie was designed by Apple as a simple way for iPhone and iPad users to create stunning videos quickly and easily. This software allows you to easily add animations and other effects to your videos so you can dazzle friends and family.

Download iMovie here!

Features

• Unique templates and themes
• Soundtracks
• Video filters
• Green screen and split screen
• Create Hollywood-style video trailers

System Requirements
External display support requires iPhone 7 or later, iPad (6th generation) or later, iPad Air 3 or later, iPad Pro 12.9-inch (2nd generation) or later

User Feedback
“I have been having an absolute blast with this, especially since I’ve really gotten into drone photography and it’s the perfect tool to make for video editing. My favorite feature honestly is making the movie trailers, it’s so fun with a compilation of media. The ONLY issue I have with it is that I’d love more freedom. Once you pick the general theme it predetermines what you can do.”

In this tutorial, you’ll learn how to quickly and easily synch audio and video in iMovie. However, you’ll also get some great pro tips to make your video editing project a breeze.

For a more in-depth and detailed look at iMovie’s capabilities, check out Keithron Powell’s tutorial. With his tips and tricks, you can edit like a pro!

6. FinalCut

FinalCut is a software designed for quick project turnaround. It allows you to edit in a nonlinear fashion on highly complex projects without getting bogged down by a complicated user interface.

Download FinalCut here!

Features

• Accelerated rendering
• Multi-camera editing
• Advanced color grading
• 2D and 3D motion graphics
• Multi-channel audio edition

System Requirements

• MacOS 10.15.6 or later
• 4GB of RAM (8GB recommended for 4K editing, 3D titles, and 360° video editing)
• Metal-capable graphics card
• 1GB of VRAM recommended for 4K editing, 3D titles, and 360° video editing
• 3.8GB of available disk space

User Feedback
“I like the simplicity of the interface and I appreciate the more powerful features co-existing in one app. Typically it is one or the other. We can onboard a new editor in FCPx and they are productive within a couple of days thanks to the intuitive Ux. There are also more powerful tools and capabilities that more experienced editors might appreciate.”

Not a lot of software options can sync audio and video automatically. However, with this tutorial, you can learn how to set up your FinalCut software to sync your audio automatically!

For a more in-depth look at the tools and resources available in FinalCut, check out this tutorial by Will Chidlow. By following his guidance, you’ll unlock all of the best features that the software has to offer.

7. Wondershare Democreator

Wondershare Dreamcreator is one of the best software options available for screen recording. Professional gamers regularly use this product to make videos of their gameplay to share with millions of viewers. The software also provides a comprehensive suite of editing tools so you can tweak your videos until they’re perfect.

Download Wondershare Democreator here!

Features

• 4K video quality
• Green screen
• Noise removal
• Caption tools
• Voice-over
• Video speed control

System Requirements

• Windows 7 or later 64-bit
• Intel i3 or better multicore processor, 2GHz or above
• At least 3GB physical RAM (8GB required for HD and 4K videos)
• 1366×768 or better screen resolution
• 2GB free hard-disk

User Feedback
“Wondershare DemoCreator can deliver stunning performance and offer awesome video recording and editing experience to its end-users even though they belong to any niche in this modern era. This software is the best and ideal choice if you have a concern with the video content. You can download Wondershare DemoCreator and give it a try.”

Sometimes, you need to make edits to your sound separately from the video. This tutorial will show you how to detach your sound file using Wondershare Democreator, edit the file, and then re-sync it with the video.

8. VSDC

If you’re looking for a way to edit videos without a hefty price tag, VSDC might be the answer. This software is available as a free download and can edit large, high-resolution videos in a snap.

Download VSDC here!

Features

• Non-linear video editor
• Visual and audio effects
• Color blending
• Masking effects
• Motion-tracking
• Subpixel accuracy
• Video stabilization

System Requirements

• Microsoft Windows XP SP3 or later
• Intel, AMD or compatible processor with the work frequency at 1.5 GHz or higher
• 1024×768 pixels with 16-bit color or higher
• 1 GB RAM
• Microsoft DirectX 9.0с or higher
• At least 300 MB of free disk space

User Feedback
“You can’t beat the capabilities for the price. You can make many of the important adjustments for a basic video, as well as layering both video and audio clips and incorporating transitions.”

With VSDC, precision is key. This tutorial will show you how to use VSDC’s tools to precisely target specific points in your video and sync them exactly to the soundtrack.

9. FlexClip Audio Sync App Online

FlexClip is another great free option for editing videos. With this product, you can edit your videos directly on the webpage without having to download anything. The product is designed to be simple, yet comprehensive, so even beginners can create high-quality videos in a snap.

Download FlexClip Audio Sync App Online here!

Features

• Trim, merge, and split videos
• Text animations
• Voiceover capabilities
• Add logo or watermark to videos
• Upload background music

System Requirements

• Windows 10 version 14316.0 or higher
• 4 GB memory

User Feedback
“FlexClip is a solid platform for editing videos. It comes at a very reasonable price, too. We use it to create promotional materials in our company.”

This is a great tutorial for anyone who is new to online video editing. You’ll learn about all of the tools available in FlexClip to create professional-grade videos.

10. Kapwing

Kapwing is commonly used for creating viral memes and GIFs. However, Kapwing also has a host of options for creating amazing videos with a simple online video editor. Many of the tools are available online for free, so you can make great videos without a hefty price tag.

Download Kapwing here!

Features

• Combine videos
• Add captions
• Add audio to video
• Green screen
• Trim and resize videos

System Requirements
Windows, Mac, Linux, Cloud, iPhone, iPad, or Android.

User Feedback
“Love Kapwing. I’ve never made videos before, but I feel like I can with Kapwing for the first time. Not intimidating – really fast to get going.”

Kapwing has tons of tools that you can use to create amazing videos. This tutorial focuses on the tools necessary to perfectly sync audio and video.

11. Corel VideoStudio® Pro

Corel VideoStudio® Pro has a drag-and-drop video editing that makes creating videos fun and easy. There are hundreds of titles, filters, effects, graphics, and transitions. The editing tools are intuitive. There are instant project templates to use to create unique movies with your content quickly.

Download Corel VideoStudio® Pro here!

Features

• Easily crop, trim, and split video on an exact timeline moment.
• Rotate the video or change its aspect ratio.
• Correct imperfections to remove fisheye distortions from a wide angle lens, adjust color, and change light temperatures.
• Select from many instant project templates to easily get started.
• Add transitions and filters with drag-and-drop video editing.
• Look up table (LUT) profiles can change day into night or recreate color schemes of iconic movies.
• Boost colors and brighten scenes.
• Adjust hue, saturation, and white balance manually or by using an auto-tune adjustment.

System Requirements

• Operating System: Microsoft® Windows® 7/8/10, 64-bit only.
• Processor: Core i3 or AMD A4, Intel core i7 or AMD Athlon A10.
• RAM: 4Gb or higher 8GB recommended.
• Graphics Card: Minimum 512 MB VRAM.
• Display: 1024×768.
• Hard Drive: Minimum 6 GB for installation.

User Feedback
“I produce music videos, and this system has some amazing special effects.”
H. White.

This video, produced by Corel VideoStudio, shows a brief overview of how easy it is to use this video editor.

The Corel VideoStudio can be used with the easy project start templates and overlays to create an impressively good-looking video in just a few minutes. The short video is mostly hype, but it does show some cool videos made with this editor.

12. Movavi Video Suite

The Movavi Video Suite can be used to make videos, edit them, convert different video files and media file formats, do screen recording, and more. It is the perfect tool for remote work, video blogging, and creating distance learning projects. There is a free trial.

Download Movavi Video Suite here!

Features

• It is easy to create intros, use the chroma key, add transitions, and special effects.
• Store all your media in the media library.
• The program interface adapts to your preferences.
• Quickly converts files from one format to another.
• Edit videos, slideshows, and audio.
• Burn CDs or DVDs.
• Offers WI-FI file transfers from multiple devices.
• Has an online community of videographers sharing tips and tricks.

System Requirements
There is a Windows version and a Mac version.

Windows Version

• Operating System: Microsoft® Windows® 7/8/10.
• Processor: 1/5 GHz dual core processor such as Intel®, AMD®.
• RAM: 2 GB.
• Graphics Card: AMD Radeon R600, Intel® HD Graphics 2000, NVIDIA® GeForce® series 8, or higher graphics card.
• Display: 1280×768, 32-bit color.
• Hard Drive: 830 MB for installation and 500 MB for regular usage.

Mac Version

• Operating System: Mac OS X® 10.10 or higher.
• Processor: 64-bit Intel® processor.
• RAM: 256 MB.
• Graphics Card: AMD Radeon R600 Mobility Radeon HD 4330, Mobility FirePro series, Intel® HD Graphics 2000, NVIDIA® GeForce® series 8 and 8M, Quadro FX 4800, Quadro FX 5600, Radeon R5 M230 or higher graphics card.
• Display: 1280×768, 32-bit color.
• Hard Drive: 800 MB for installation and 500 MB for regular usage.

User Feedback
“I love the Movavi videos editing tools and have used them both on a PC and a Mac.”
R. Moda

In this video produced by JustAlexHalford, he shows how to use the Movavi Video Editor Plus 2021.

This video is a tutorial that shows the new features of the Movavi video editor, the interface, and the functions. He shows how easy it is to use this versatile video editor. He shares a few tips and tricks on how to make your videos look more interesting.

13. CyberLink PowerDirector 365

CyberLink PowerDirector 365 is part of a full set of image, audio, and video editing tools, including PhotoDirector, AudioDirector, and ColorDirector. This is one of the fastest video editors with over 3,000 special effects. It supports the latest formats of Ultra HD 4k HEVC H.265.

Download CyberLink PowerDirector 365 here!

Features

• Intuitive interface.
• New special effects.
• Constantly-growing resource library with templates, background music, and sound effects.
• Cloud-based editing tool sold on a monthly subscription.
• Integrated photo and video editing using PhotoDirector with PowerDirector.
• Theme templates.
• LUT color presets.
• Motion graphic titles.
• Multilanguage support in eight languages.

System Requirements

There is a Windows version and a Mac version.

Windows Version

• Operating System: Microsoft® Windows® 7/8, 8.1/10, 64-bit only.
• Processor: AMD Phenom® 11 and above, Intel® i-series.
• RAM: 4 GB required, 6 GB recommended.
• Graphics Card: 128 MB VGA VRAM graphics card, Direct X 11 compatible. AI plug-in requires 2 GB VGA VRAM or better.
• Display: 1280×768, 16-bit color or better.
• Hard Drive: 7 GB.

Mac Version

• Operating System: Mac OS X® 10.14 or higher.
• Processor: Apple M1 with Rosetta support, Intel® i-series.
• RAM: 4GB, 6 GB recommended.
• Graphics Card: A128 MB VGA VRAM or higher graphics card.
• Display: 1280×768, 16-bit color.
• Hard Drive: 7 GB.

User Feedback
“I saw the sterling review on Techcrunch before I decided to get this software. I am very happy with this video editor and got up to speed quickly.”
J. Baret

14. MAGIX Movie Edit Pro

The MAGIX Movie Edit Pro is simple enough for beginners to use and has plenty of outstanding features that please the pros. There are Plus and Premium versions available that have more features. It works with an intuitive storyboard and flexible timeline that allows video editors to complete projects up to twice as fast as before. There is a free trial.

Download MAGIX Movie Edit Pro here!

Features

• Includes 900 effects, titles, templates, and transitions. The Pro Premium version includes over 1,500 effects.
• Easy color correction.
• Professional stabilization of images.
• Burns DVDs and Blu-ray discs.
• Faster performance with the new Infusion video editing engine.
• Works with 8K Ultra HD video files.
• The Pro Plus version includes multi-cam editing.
• The Pro Premium version includes NewBlue Filter 5 Ultimate.

System Requirements
This software only works on PCs running Windows OS.

• Operating System: Microsoft® Windows® 8/10, 64-bit only
• Processor: Quad-core with 2.4 GHz or better (2.8 GHZ required for 8K HD editing).
• RAM: 4 GB or better.
• Graphics Card: 512 MB VRAM with DirectX 11 support
• Display: 1280×1024.
• Hard Drive: 2 GB for program installation.

User Feedback
“I used this video editing software for many years and love it. It works with 8K HD files that other software cannot handle.”
P. Greebe

This video produced by MAGIX is an introductory tutorial.

Watch the video to learn how to create a new project, import videos, and play them using different methods. Then, you will learn how to do the most important edits. Finally, the video shows how to export video files and burn them to a DVD.

Final Thoughts

If recording video is new to you, there are a lot of great resources to help you get started. If you frequently use Google Slides, you might consider making those presentations into videos. Check out this article to learn all about recording over Google Slides. If you want to make your videos even more polished and professional, this article can help you edit out those distracting breathing noises. Now get out there and start creating!

I updated this article in June 2021 to add five more software choices for you to consider. My favorite of the new ones is the MAGIX editor because it works with the 8K HD files. The 8K high-definition video format is stunningly beautiful.

The post 14 Ways to Sync Audio and Video Recorded Separately appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As a longtime instructional designer and eLearning professional, I can tell you that transcription software in education and eLearning offers a range of applications that enhance the learning experience. It can be used to transcribe lectures and educational videos, to create searchable text databases of lectures and resources, and to generate subtitles for video content, further enhancing accessibility and comprehension.

Of course, there’s no shortage of transcription software and services available today. Each option has its own advantages and drawbacks, so you need to do your research to find the best choice for your needs. That’s why I’ve reviewed and ranked the best transcription software platforms and services available based on a variety of key factors, including accuracy, turnaround times, cost, capabilities, and feedback from real customers (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for these reviews).

What are the Best Transcription Software Programs?

Here are my picks for the top audio and video transcription programs available today:

• Trint
• Otter
• EaseText
• EaseUS
• Notta
• Rev.com
• Sonix
• Audext
• Transcribe by Wreally
• Express Scribe
• Descript
• Inqscribe
• Maestra
• oTranscribe
• Happyscribe

1. Editor’s Choice: Trint

Best Overall

Trint | Audio Transcription Software

With Trint, you can quickly and easily turn audio and video into searchable, editable, and shareable content in more than 40 languages.

Start Your Trial

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Trint is an AI-based audio and video transcription software that uses sophisticated technologies to understand human speech and then convert it into text in more than 30 languages

Trint’s mobile app for iOS and Android also allows you to record audio anywhere and transcribe it live, sharing every word with colleagues in real time. The mobile app also seamlessly syncs with the web app so you can review transcripts and collaborate on the go.

Trint can efficiently transcribe audio and video files, interviews, archives, and recorded phone calls. While AI-based transcription is not perfectly accurate, Trint has a very high accuracy rate of up to 99%.

Moreover, Trint also offers the ability to edit and search through the transcripts, and turn key moments into new content with its Story Builder feature.

Top Features & Benefits

• Compatible with Windows, MacOS, and iOS
• Supports more than 30 languages
• Live transcription from mobile or desktop in up to 3 seconds
• Collaborate seamlessly with teams across all plans
• High accuracy – up to 99%
• Built-in Text Editor, Story Builder, and Caption Editor
• No software download required
• Supports most audio and video file formats (.mp3, .mp4, .m4a, .aac, .wma, .avi, .wav, .mov)
• Transcripts can be exported in several formats (.docx, .srt, .vtt, .txt, .stl, .edl, .html, .xml, .csv)
• Custom dictionary – add jargon, people names, brand names, and non-standard spellings
• Comments and Shared Drives for efficient collaboration
• Highlight and Mark text for emphasis
• ISO 27001 certified to ensure your transcripts and sources are never accessed without your permission

Cost

Trint pricing includes options to be billed annually (20% discount) and monthly.

• Starter: small scale transcriptions (up to 7 transcriptions/ month) $48 per month
• Advanced: Unlimited transcriptions, $60 per month
• Enterprise: Ultimate transcription solution for organizations, custom pricing

Click here to check out Trint.

2. Best for Transcribing Meetings: Otter.ai

Best for Transcribing Conversations

Otter

Otter.ai is great for transcribing notes from meetings, lectures, interviews, and other talks. Enjoy automatic transcription with Microsoft Teams, Google Meet, and Cisco Webex.

Buy Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Otter is a renowned automatic transcription service that uses artificial intelligence technology to transcribe audio to text in real-time.

In addition to a desktop app, it also has its application available to use on iOS and Android which means now you can efficiently transcribe audio with your smart devices and export them.

With Otter, you have the option to either record and transcribe audio in real-time or integrate it with several virtual communication apps such as Microsoft Teams, Google Meet, Cisco Webex, and Zoom to import recordings. It is a highly efficient tool both in terms of time and cost.

After your audio has been transcribed in real-time, you can search the document for specific keywords, adjust the playback speed and skip silences to get the gist of a tedious recording.

Powered by Ambient Voice Intelligence, Otter gets smarter with every recording. It lets you train the software to recognize voices and learn context-based language.

They even offer a Basic plan with free transcription software for up to 600 minutes of transcribing per month.

Click here to check out Otter.ai.

Top Features & Benefits

• Real-time transcription from Microsoft Teams, Google Meet, Cisco Webex, and Zoom
• Accessible on-the-go, iOS, and Android apps
• Speaker Recognition
• Flexible pricing options
• Efficient Collaboration features
• Ability to feed names and terminology
• Various playback speeds
• Multiple export formats (mp3, txt, pdf, docx, srt)
• Secure (TLS encryption)

Cost

Otter.ai pricing is as follows:

• Individuals
  • Basic: Free, up to 300 minutes per month, and other limited features
  • Pro: $10 per month billed annually or $16.99 monthly, more extensive providing its customers with up to 1200 minutes per month
• Organizations
  • Business: $20 per month billed annually or $40 monthly, allows you to add a greater number of names of team members and other terms
  • Enterprise: suited for large organizations, contact the Sales department for costs

Click here to check out Otter.ai free today.

3. Best Offline Transcription Tool: EaseText

EaseText - Audio to Text Converter

EaseText is an AI-based audio-to-text tool that delivers fast, accurate transcriptions for a range of applications.

Try It Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

EaseText offers automatic transcription that makes it fast and easy to accurately convert audio and video into text.

This AI-based tool offers real-time transcription and supports a range of audio formats, including MP3 and WAV.

Not only is EaseText incredibly fast, getting you your transcriptions in just seconds, but it’s also very accurate, so you can trust that you’re getting the best final product possible.

Top Features & Benefits

• Real-time transcription of your audio files
• Quickly and easily convert audio into text files and save the transcript file as TXT, DOC, HTML, PDF, etc.
• Supports multiple languages (English, Spanish, Italian, Chinese, and more)
• Offline usage lets you keep your data protected and secure
• Excellent accuracy

Cost

EaseText pricing is very affordable with a few plans to choose from:

• Personal ($2.95/month)–Annual plan for use on 1 PC, no transcription time limit, 24/7 customer support, and free updates for life
• Family ($4.95/month)–Annual plan for use on 3 PCs, no transcription time limit, 24/7 customer support, and free updates for life
• Business ($9.95/month)–Annual plan for use on 10 PCs, no transcription time limit, 24/7 customer support, and free updates for life

Click here to try EaseText free!

4. EaseUS

EaseUS Video Editor

EaseUS offers a full suite of video editing tools that make it easy for you to bring your creative vision to life. Plus, you can easily transcribe video to text with its built-in transcription feature.

Try It Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

EaseUS Video Editor is a game-changing software that combines powerful video editing capabilities with efficient transcription functionality. This all-in-one tool revolutionizes the process of transcribing videos or audio recordings into text, making it an essential companion for professionals and enthusiasts alike.

With EaseUS Video Editor, creating captivating videos becomes effortless. Its comprehensive AI-powered video editing features allow users to seamlessly merge, cut, trim, and enhance video clips.

What sets EaseUS Video Editor apart from other programs of its kind is its unparalleled transcription feature. Leveraging advanced speech recognition algorithms, this software accurately transcribes spoken content from videos or audio recordings into highly accurate and readable text. Save valuable time and effort by letting the software handle the tedious task of transcribing lengthy content with remarkable precision.

Top Features & Benefits

• Accurate video-to-text transcription
• Full suite of video editing features
• No video length limit
• Supports all video and audio formats

Cost

EaseUS offers a free trial version of its software with limited features, but the full paid version with all features is regularly only $29.95.

Click here to try EaseUS for free!

5. Best Cost-Effective Online Transcription Software: Notta

Notta | AI Transcription Software

With Notta, you can accurately and quickly convert audios, videos, and meeting recordings to text in 104 languages. Summarize your content effortlessly with Notta's cutting-edge AI, and share transcriptions with your team for seamless collaboration.

Start Your Free Trial!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Notta is an AI-powered voice-to-text transcription software with a remarkable accuracy of 98.86%. It can efficiently transcribe audio or video files, interviews, podcasts, online meetings, and on-the-go phone call recordings. Turn your audio into a written transcript instantly, streamlining the process for easy editing and reviewing.

Furthermore, Notta offers team alignment capabilities, enabling you to schedule and transcribe Zoom, Google Meet, and Teams meetings with speaker identification and timestamps.

Notta’s mobile app, compatible with iOS, Android, and iPad, empowers you to record and dictate your voice anytime, anywhere. The Notta Chrome Extension facilitates effortless voice recording of on-screen content. Transcriptions seamlessly sync with the Web App, providing you the convenience to review them on the move.

Moreover, Notta goes beyond conventional transcription by effectively summarizing meetings, call recordings, and videos, using its advanced AI summarizer. Shorten your extensive video content into a concise text summary using Notta. Skip the hassle of sifting through hours to locate crucial information.

Top Features & Benefits

• Supports 104 transcription languages
• Supports most audio and video file formats (WAV, MP3, M4A, CAF, AIFF, AVI, RMVB, FLV, MP4, MOV, WMV and WMA)
• Real-time audio recording and transcription for note-taking
• Connect with your Google Calendar and Outlook Calendar to auto-transcribe your events (Notta Bot)
• Real-time transcribe your Zoom/ Google Meet/ Microsoft Teams/ Webex meetings
• Chrome Extension for recording any audio playing on the current tab
• Real-time screen, voice, and webcam recording, followed by instant transcription
• Notta AI Summarizer shortens videos and audio into key points for a quick grasp of content
• Translation capability into 42 languages
• Sync transcription across MacOS, Windows, iPad, iPhone, Android tablets
• Cloud-based application, no download required
• One-click seamless transcription sharing by link
• Export Transcripts to Notion, Salesforce, and various formats: including Text, Word, PDF, Excel, and Subtitle file
• [ISO 27001] [SOC 2] [CCPA] [GDPR] [SSL] [APPI] security compliance to guarantee that your transcripts and sources remain inaccessible without your explicit permission
• Permission management for transcription

Cost

Notta pricing begins with a Free option and provides choices to be billed annually (up to 40% off) and monthly.

• Pro: up to 1,800 minutes per month, $8.25 per month billed annually or $13.99 monthly
• Business: 2 seats (up to 2,400 minutes per month), $44 per month billed annually or $59 monthly, upgradeable to a maximum of 20 seats
• Enterprise: Unlimited usage and starting from 21 seats for organizations, custom pricing

Click here to check out Notta.

6. Easy to Use: Rev.com

Great All-Around Service

Rev.com

Rev.com is a popular audio and video-to-text transcription service that combines human transcriptionists with AI technology.

Try It Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Rev provides multiple audio to text conversion services to fit your needs, including both human and automated AI-generated transcriptions.

Whether you want your file to be handled by professional transcribers with 99% accuracy, English or foreign subtitles and captions, or live captions for Zoom meetings Rev has you covered!

Rev provides automatic audio transcription and live captions for your Zoom meetings, virtual conferences, video presentations, and webinars with both English and Foreign Subtitles (15+ languages).

Professional transcriptionists at Rev can transcribe audio and video files and provide 99% accuracy and are available 24/7.

By adding captions and subtitles to your videos, you enhance the viewer’s experience. They not only convert the audio to text but also add note-worthy non-vocal elements.

Furthermore, using foreign subtitles for your videos increases your potential to be reached out by a global audience.

Live captions for Zoom enable the deaf community and the hard hearing to be involved and are a great way to act as a socially responsible organization.

The Rev app on iOS and Android comes with a voice recording feature as well so you have one application for all your transcription needs.

Click here to visit Rev.com and to try it yourself.

Top Features & Benefits

• Both manual and automatic transcription services
• Foreign subtitles for 88+ languages
• Live captions for Zoom
• English captions and subtitles
• Upfront and simple pricing
• Audio and text is highly secured
• Quick delivery – manual transcription within 12 hours for audios less than 30 mins, automatic transcription in 5 mins
• 24/7 available customer support from professional transcriptionists and experts
• All captions compliant with FCC and ADA

Cost

• Manual Transcription – $1.50 per minute
• Automated Transcription – 25 cents per minute
• English Captions and Subtitles – $1.50 per minute
• Foreign Subtitles – $5-$12 per minute
• Automatic Live Captions for Zoom – $20 per host
• See our full Rev pricing guide for more info

Click here to learn more about Rev.com.

7. Best for Accurate Automated Transcription: Sonix

Also Great

Sonix

Sonix offers an easy-to-use transcription application that's accurate, quick, and fits your budget.

Try It Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Trusted by companies like WarnerBros, Adobe, and Uber and used by over 40 million customers worldwide, Sonix is an ultimate solution to your transcription needs.

It comes with all the features which would be desired by anyone looking to transcribe audio and video files: one of them is automated translation both in text and subtitles.

Moreover, it has a user-friendly interface which makes it convenient even for those who do not call themselves tech-savvy to transcribe audio or video file recordings.

What’s even better is that you can watch the satisfying process of the file being transcribed in real-time!

The built-in editor allows you to tweak transcribed and subtitle copy to gain perfection.

Click here to try Sonix today.

Top Features & Benefits

• Incredibly fast transcription, whether an audio or video file, ready within 5 minutes
• Provides automated translation for 30+ languages, helping in expanding reach to a global audience
• Automated and customizable subtitles for greater accessibility
• Convenient publishing and collaborating features with flexible permissions
• Timestamp provided with each word for easier referencing
• Allows you to comment and make notes in your transcript
• Export transcript in various file formats (Microsoft Word, TXT, or PDFs)
• Download subtitles in commonly used formats (SRT and VTT)

Cost

Sonix pricing is as follows:

• Standard (pay as much as you use): $10 per hour (ideal for short tasks)
• Premium: $5 per hour, plus $22 per user/ month. If billed annually, you can save up to 25%

Sonix offers a free trial with 30 minutes of free transcription.

8. Best for Flexible Pricing Plans: Audext

Also Great

Audext

Audext transcription software offers flexible pricing plans for different applications to fit your budget.

Try It Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Whether you’re looking for a one-off transcription service or multiple ones, Audext has efficient pricing plans tailored to your needs.

Through its Professional and Automatic audio transcription services, it provides potential customers a varied choice, with one being 99% accurate and the other 80%.

Furthermore, it comes with an inbuilt text editor where you can perfect your transcription using the time stamps for each second.

Click here to try Audext today.

Top Features & Benefits

• Quick transcription service – an hour of audio files transcribed in just 10 minutes
• Timestamping for later reference
• Speaker identification
• Two transcription methods: Automatic Transcription and Professional Transaction
• In-built text editor: find and replace words
• Compatible with various audio file formats MP3, M4A, WAV to name a few
• Quick transcription service: takes 7 minutes on average to convert an hour-long audio file into text
• User-friendly interface
• Various payment methods

Cost

Audext pricing is as follows:

• Professional: to get your audio transcribed by professional transcribers with 99% accuracy, Audext charges $1.20 per minute and an additional $0.50 for additional parameters such as verbatim and noisy audio. Timestamps, speaker, and accent identification features are provided free of cost.

• Automatic
  • Classic one-time purchase: $12 an hour
  • Subscription-based $30 per month – 2 hours worth of transcription, $5 for every additional hour. As the number of hours increases, the fee per hour decreases.
  • Enterprise for businesses – custom pricing option
  • Discounts are provided for 10 and 20 hours long audios.

You can get 30 minutes of Audext transcription service free to check it out with no risk.

9. Best for Secure Transcriptions: Transcribe by Wreally

Transcribe by Wreally is a transcription service that offers multiple methods for converting audio and videos to text, including automatic transcription.

The service prioritizes customers’ security and privacy through its stringent policies. This allows its customers to transcribe audio and video file recordings with highly confidential data in over 60+ languages.

Transcribe provides flexibility in the way it transcribes by allowing customers to choose from three methods. The first one is the Magical Automatic Transcription which typically transcribes in less than an hour.

The other two methods: Voice Type with Dictation and Self Transcription involves human intervention.

The former allows users to dictate their audio or video into text in real-time. This can be really useful when the audio is not clear. The last thing you would want to do is transcribe your file manually.

To make it much less of a hassle, Transcribe lets you use a foot pedal and define acronyms which it later expands using the Text Expander technology for efficient typing.

Click here to learn more.

Top Features & Benefits

• Transcriptions tools work with foot pedal to control audio playback allowing you to free your hands
• Supports 60+ languages
• 3 Transcription modes: Magical Automatic Transcription, Voice Type with Dictation, and Self Transcription
• Auto Loop: Enables your audio to pause and resume on its own while you edit your transcript
• Text Expander: Preset acronyms to let Scribe automatically expand them as you type
• Works Offline
• Automatic Subtitle creation
• Transcript files can be exported in Doc and TXT format
• High profile data protection policies

Cost

Transcribe by Wreally pricing is as follows:

• Self Transcription (Voice Type with Dictation and Self Transcription) :$20 a year
• Automatic Transcription: $20 a year + $6 per hour

Click here to learn more about Transcribe.

10. Best for Fast Transcription: Express Scribe (NCH Software)

Who knew automatic audio transcription could also be done for free? If you work with common audio file formats such as WAV, MP3, WMA, and DCT, you can use the free transcription software version which comes with just enough features to get the job done.

Express Scribe allows users to convert their audio to text effortlessly through various convenient features. It can transcribe audio files from both analog and digital voice recorders.

Moreover, to make the whole process even more efficient, you can also set up file automation to send completed transcripts to your client without needing to do any extra work.

It also offers plugins such as the FastFox Text Expander and Express Invoice Invoicing to speed up the process.

Click here to check out Express Scribe.

Top Features & Benefits

• Available in both Free and Pro versions
• Can be integrated with other word processing software with utmost ease, including Microsoft Word, Corel Wordperfect, Lotus Word Pro, etc.
• Variable Speed Playback
• Variety of formats compatible in both free and pro version
• Hot-keys enabling a mouse-free experience and faster turnaround time
• Set up automation to allow transcripts to be effortlessly sent to your clients
• Can load files through the internet (FTP), email, and local computer network
• Compatible with both analog and digital voice recorders
• Low system requirements
• Supports USB Transcribing Pedals

Cost

Express Scribe pricing is as follows:

• Free Version
• Paid
  • Express Scribe Basic $49.99/year
  • Express Scribe Professional $59.95/year

Click here to try Express Scribe.

11. Best For Team Players: Descript

Descript is an audio transcription program and a whole lot more.

It includes a full-fledged podcast editor, a screen recorder, and a video editor along with transcription (automatic and human done by professional transcriptionists). It incorporates powerful collaboration features which make sharing data with other teammates a breeze. As soon as you complete a project, you can share it via a web link.

Additionally, it comes with a super useful Speaker Identification feature which allows you to add speaker labels in a jiffy. You can rest assured that your data is always secure as Descript employs strict data protection policies.

For more convenience, it allows you to sync your projects in the cloud making them accessible anytime, anywhere by any of the collaborators. An option to stitch an already transcribed audio is also available.

Top Features & Benefits

• White Glove service – 100% accurate audio transcriptions by professional humans
• Multiple solutions through one platform (transcription, podcast editor, screen recorder, and a video editor)
• Export transcripts in various formats (.doc, .rtf, .srt, .vtt)
• Overdubbing (create text to speech model of your voice)
• Remove filler words with a single click
• Save your files in different cloud storage platforms (Google, Dropbox, OneDrive, and Box) through Zapier
• High confidentiality of data

Cost

• Free – up to 1 hour of transcription per month
• Creator $12/editor/month (billed annually)  – up to 10 hours of transcription per month
• Pro $24 /editor/month (billed annually)  – up to 30 hours of transcription per month
• Enterprise – custom pricing

Click here to check out the Descript service.

12.  Best for User-Friendly Interface: Inqscribe

Inqscribe is a digital media transcription software that facilitates manual self-transcription of audio and video.

Its simple interface shows the video and the text editor both in one window which makes it easy for users to make notes and/or transcribe.

You can also insert timecodes as frequently as you wish using simple instructions.

Despite Inqscribe’s easy-to-use interface, it has video tutorials, screenshots, and a knowledge base which makes it extremely easy for beginners to meet their video and audio transcription needs.

Top Features & Benefits

• Compatible with commonly used audio and video formats
• Mouse-free control
• Compatible with foot pedal
• Supports various export formats (plain text, XML, HTML, Final Cut Pro XML etc)
• Unicode Supported
• Low configuration requirements

Cost

• Free – limited features
• Paid- $99 per individual license, discounts available for students and on multiple licenses

Click here to check out this transcription software.

13. Best for Voice Over: Maestra

Maestra is a downloadable text-to-speech software with a built-in sophisticated text editor.

Along with quick automatic audio transcription, it also lets its users generate subtitles and captions in over 50 languages and instantly voice over videos in 20+ foreign languages using computer-generated voice.

Maestra allows its potential customers to test out the automatic transcription software for free for 15 minutes before actually purchasing it. It also offers a cloud storage facility named MaestraCloud.

To enhance the collaborative experience, you can create team-based channels and set permissions to edit and view transcripts for your entire team.

Maestra accounts can be shared and used on multiple devices.

Top Features & Benefits

• Transcription and subtitles and captions generation in 50+ languages
• Automatic voiceover in over 20 languages
• Inbuilt interactive text and subtitle editor
• Export subtitles in  WebVTT (.vtt), Cheetah (.cap), Avid DS (.txt), PDF, TXT, SubRip (.srt),
• Utilizes high data encryption technologies

Cost

• $10/hour (pay as you go)
• $5/hour (Premium subscription, $29/month)

You can learn more about Maestra at this link.

14. Best for Free Transcription: oTranscribe

oTranscribe is an open-source web app that facilitates manual self-transcription.

With oTranscibe transcription tools, you can have full control of the application and perform functions such as pause, rewind, and fast forward with just the keyboard. It has the feature of interactive timestamps which makes it easier to navigate through your transcript.

What’s great about oTranscribe transcription tools is that even though it is a web-based app it can be used offline.

However, features such as YouTube support and Google Drive export will not work as they require a dedicated internet connection. To make it easy for beginners to transcribe mouse-free, the website has a couple of keyboard shortcuts.

Also, users can add their own shortcuts for an even more efficient transcription experience. The audio and video format compatibility depends entirely on the browser that you use to access oTranscribe.

To ensure the security of your audio, videos, and transcripts, all your data is stored locally using your computer’s storage instead of on a remote server or cloud. oTranscribe’s web app backs up your work progress every 5 minutes and recommends users export their work at the end of each day to prevent loss of data when transcribing audio.

Top Features & Benefits

• One window – both video and text editor
• Mouse-free navigation
• Interactive time stamps
• Automatically backups current transcript at set intervals
• Secure as data is only stored locally on your computer
• Export to Markdown, plain text, and Google Docs
• Can only import .OTR oTranscribe file format
• Can only export transcript in plain text (.txt) and Markdown (.md)
• Customer support available through Twitter and email

Cost

oTranscribe is a free transcription program.

Click here to check it out.

15. Best For Large Files: Happyscribe

Have large and lengthy audio or video files to transcribe? Look no further!

Happyscribe provides subtitle and transcription services for files of all sizes at competitive rates. It allows users interested in its services to try out a free trial before getting their feet wet.

It has both automatic and professional human transcription and subtitling services. After receiving your transcript you can use the user-friendly interactive text editor to correct and replace words as you please.

Like other top-of-the-line transcription services, Happyscribe’s technology also identifies speakers and has a timestamp feature. There are extensive subtitle format options that enable you to personalize them to suit your brand.

Pricing plans depend on whether you want an automatic service that is 85% accurate or a 99% accurate human-made service. With Happyscribe, you can be assured that you will get a high-quality transcript with proper punctuation.

Top Features & Benefits

• No uploading file size restriction
• Supports wide range of import and export formats
• Supports up to 62 languages including Japanese, Italian and Mandarin
• Interactive text editor
• One-click sharing
• Integrations with Zapier, YouTube and more
• All data is kept secure and confidential
• Easy collaboration
• Speaker Identification
• Timestamps

Cost

Paid plans range between $10-$49 a month depending on the package you choose and its duration.

Click here to learn more.

What is Transcription Software?

Transcription software assists in the conversion of human speech into readable text. With the development of speech recognition technology, the primary objective is to automatically convert any voice recording or video into text.

The best transcription software can turn everything from video lectures to podcasts to presentations into readable text.

All you need to do is upload the file onto the cloud for seamless, real-time transcription. Once completed, you can edit the transcribed version because there is always a probability of minor errors.

Are There Any Limitations to Using Transcription Programs?

Accent barriers

If some recordings consist of people speaking too fast or in a specific accent, it can be difficult for the transcription software to accurately churn out exact sentences. The result would be unclear, distorted information. Such recordings would have to be transcribed manually.

Lack of proper grammar and vocabulary

All machines require human intervention to some extent. Once the software completes its job, it is advisable to go through the text and correct any grammatical errors such as capitalization, commas, use of proper nouns, etc. In many instances, soft wares are not able to catch specialized terms or even company names so you have to input them manually.

Final Thoughts

With so many different transcription programs out there, you have plenty of great options to try out.

Remember, a lot of this will come down to your specific needs. One of the most common mistakes to avoid when choosing a transcription software program is failing to consider the specific needs of your transcription tasks. It’s crucial to assess your requirements accurately and choose automatic transcription tools that align with those needs.

For example, some transcription software is designed for general use and may not handle specialized industry-specific terminology or accents well. If you’re transcribing medical or legal content, you’ll want software that supports the relevant terminology and meets industry standards to provide you with accurate transcription services.

Additionally, if you require real-time transcription for live events or meetings, make sure the software you choose offers that capability.

Choosing a solution without considering your specific demands can lead to frustration, inefficiency, and potentially inaccurate transcriptions. So, take the time to evaluate your requirements and select software that caters to them effectively.

Try out some of my top picks, like Trint, to find the best transcription program for your specific needs.

The post 15 Best Transcription Software & Services for Audio & Video to Text (2023 Rankings) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

During my past two decades as an eLearning creator, I’ve learned one of the best ways to make sure students are learning is by quizzing them throughout the course.

But what type of quiz should you use to assess your students? Which quiz format is best? There are lots of different types of quizzes that instructors use, and what you choose will depend on what type of questions your students should be answering. Each of these types of quizzes has a specific purpose and scenario where it would be the most beneficial.

In the guide below, I’ll look at 7 common quiz types and provide insights based on my experience into when each type should be used.

What are the Different Types of Quizzes?

By understanding the different kinds of quizzes and their uses, you can better determine what type of quiz format you should use when creating your online course.

1. Multiple Choice

Multiple choice quizzes are one of the most popular quiz types and can be used in a variety of ways. They are simple to create and can assess a wide range of knowledge.

Multiple choice quizzes are also very versatile and act as a fairly reliable way of measuring learning outcomes.

They are best used when you want to test students on what they know and how well they can apply that information. They can also be used to review material before a test.

When creating multiple choice quiz questions, you should make them challenging by including choices that seem reasonable and plausible so you can really test if your students actually know the information. A good multiple choice question is one that encourages students to think critically and select the correct choice from a few plausible answer options.

2. Matching

Matching quizzes typically involve two separate columns of words, phrases, or images that pair with one another in some way.

Matching quizzes are good when you want to test how well your students can recall what they’ve seen in a course.

This is a great quiz type if you have taught vocabulary, definitions of concepts, or even just names and faces.

3. Fill in the blank

A fill in the blank quiz is what you get when you finish a word with what’s missing, like what comes after “Barack Obama” in the sentence “Barack Obama was a ____ in the United States.”

You would use this kind of quiz to find out what your students know and remember.

Fill in the blank quizzes require students to actually recall information rather than just being able to recognize the answer on the page or screen as they can with multiple choice questions.

With fill in the blank quizzes, it’s much harder for students to guess or get lucky and choose the right answer because they have to actually recall what they’ve been learning. These quiz questions truly test their knowledge. However, fill in the blank quizzes can sometimes be a bit more tedious to grade as it’s possible there might be multiple correct answers for a question if you didn’t phrase it carefully.

4. Yes or No

Yes or no quizzes are a great way to test what your students know and don’t know, what they can or can’t do.

These types of quiz questions typically have only two possible answers, one being yes and the other being no.

They’re simple to create and easy for students to understand what’s being asked of them.

Use this type of quiz when you want a clear understanding of what your student knows about a subject or if a certain task has been completed correctly or not.

For example, what was the correct answer on a math quiz? Or an online quiz that determines which task has been completed properly?

These types of questions are good for formative assessment.

5. True or False

True or false quizzes are one of the simplest kinds of quizzes available because there are only two possible answer choices. They’re also one of the most common type of quizzes for teachers to create because they’re fairly simple to grade and can be used in a variety of ways.

For example, True or False quizzes could be used to test knowledge on a certain subject or as an assessment of understanding after reading a text. They can also be used to assess comprehension skills or to see if students have completed tasks correctly.

This type of quiz format is best used when you want to test students’ understanding, what they know, or what they have learned.

As with other types of quizzes, you should create the questions so that it’s difficult for your students to guess what the correct answer is, requiring them to actually know what they’ve been learning.

6. Short Answer

Short answer quizzes are what you get when you supply your student with a sentence or two that they need to complete.

For example, you might ask “What are the 3 branches of government?”

These types of quizzes are good for testing what students have been learning from your course as well as keeping them engaged.

Like fill in the blank questions, short answer quizzes require students to really rely on their memory as they can’t just pick from several choices presented to them.

This is best used when you have key information or principles that learners have to be able to recall well into the future.

7. Essay

Including essay questions on your quiz can help you gain more insight into what your students really understand about in-depth concepts and gives you an understanding of their unique perspectives on the material.

These types of quiz questions can be tricky because not all quizzing software allows essay length responses. This is especially true for those that are automatically graded as is the case with most online quizzes.

The biggest drawback with using essay questions in your course is that there’s some grey area involved in grading them. There’s not always a 100% right or wrong answer. In fact, there can be multiple correct answers when it comes to essay questions.

It can also be a bit time-consuming to grade these types of questions because you have to read everything thoroughly in order to get a clear understanding what your students really know and what they don’t.

Having said that, essay questions make for very engaging, interactive quizzes and they can be a great way to assess more complex concepts. Plus, they give you a better insight into your students’ thought processes, which can help when assessing their overall knowledge on the subject matter.

We recommend having a clear and specific set of instructions for what should be included in an essay-type response so that all students are working within the same parameters.

Tips for Making Your Quizzes

No matter what type of quiz format you choose to include in your eLearning materials, there are a few tips that will help you when creating your assessments.

• Use a quiz software to help — There are lots of great tools out there for creating quizzes of all types. Quiz makers like Fyrebox, iSpring, and ProProfs — to name a few — make it super easy to create high quality assessments for your online courses.
• Keep questions simple but challenging — Clarity is always important when creating quizzes. This will help to ensure you get consistent, accurate results from your student responses.
• Ask students for feedback — After delivering a quiz, reach out to your students and ask what they thought about it. You might be surprised what you hear back.
• Have fun! — Yes, quizzes are an important part of what you do as an instructor, but don’t forget that they can also be fun for your students.

Final Thoughts

As an experienced instructional designer who has built numerous online courses, I can tell you that selecting the right type of quiz for your course is a nuanced decision. The answer truly depends on various factors, each playing a crucial role in determining the most effective quiz format.

I encourage you to really think about the purpose of your quizzes. Are they meant to reinforce learning, assess comprehension, or provide feedback? Different formats serve different purposes. For instance, multiple-choice quizzes are great for testing recall and understanding, while essay-type questions are better suited for assessing deeper comprehension and critical thinking.

Your course goals are also paramount and have to be considered. If your course is designed to impart foundational knowledge, quizzes that focus on recall and understanding might be more appropriate. However, for advanced courses, you might want quizzes that challenge students to apply concepts in new contexts.

The nature of the material also dictates the quiz format. Some subjects lend themselves well to certain types of questions. For example, STEM subjects might benefit from quizzes that include problem-solving or calculation-based questions, whereas humanities might be better assessed through short answer or essay questions.

Most importantly, think about what your students need to learn to meet their learning objectives, and equally, what they don’t know. Diagnostic quizzes can be effective at the beginning of a course to gauge prior knowledge and identify gaps. Formative quizzes throughout the course can help track progress and adjust teaching strategies accordingly.

I’ve learned there’s no one-size-fits-all answer when it comes to choosing quiz types for an online course. It requires a thoughtful consideration of your course objectives, content, delivery environment, and learners’ needs. The best choice will align with these factors, ensuring that the quizzes are not just assessments, but powerful tools for learning and engagement.

Have a question about what type of quiz format you should use in your eLearning? Comment below and we’ll help you out.

The post What Quiz Format Should You Use in Your Online Course? 7 Different Types appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

However, with this growing demand, there is also a lot of competition. In reality, there are thousands of online courses out there, from Udemy to Skillshare. The question is, “what niches will make the most profit in the education market”?

In this article, I’ve put together a list of the 15 best online course ideas for 2024. As a longtime eLearning professional, I’ve done in-depth research on current trends in online education and including ideas that can generate a healthy return on investment.

Top 15 Profitable Online Course Ideas for 2024

1. Blockchain and Crypto-Assets

Since the launch of Bitcoin in 2009, the world of cryptocurrency has exploded. In the last few years, we’ve seen the rise of Ethereum, Litecoin, Bitcoin Cash, and a host of other altcoins.

Countries like the central African republic have adopted cryptocurrency as their national currency. We’ve also seen the recent peak of crypto investors in the US stock market.

With the rise of cryptocurrency, there’s also been a corresponding rise in interest in blockchain technology.

Blockchain is the underlying technology that powers Bitcoin and other cryptocurrencies. It’s a distributed ledger system that allows for secure, transparent, and decentralized transactions.

If you’re interested in this space, now is the time to get involved. Consider creating a course that covers topics like the basics of cryptocurrency investing, how to buy and sell crypto-assets, or even how to develop your blockchain-based applications.

By creating a course on this subject, you can tap into a growing market and help people learn about this exciting new technology.

2. NFT – Non-Fungible Token

With the recent explosion in the popularity of NFTs, it’s no surprise that this is one of the top online course ideas for 2024.

NFTs are digital assets that are stored on a blockchain. They’re unique, immutable, and can’t be replicated: thus making them perfect for collectibles, art, and other digital content.

If you’re a creative interested in digital art or collectibles, consider creating an NFT course. In this course, you can teach people how to create their own NFTs, buy and sell them, and even use them creatively.

3. Data Science and Analytics

With the ever-growing importance of data in today’s business landscape, it’s no surprise that data science courses are becoming more popular.

Data science and analytics is one of the fastest-growing fields in the world. Companies are increasingly relying on data to make decisions about their businesses. Gone are the days of relying on opinions and gut instinct alone.

From social media analytics to customer data analysis, there are countless ways to use data to improve business outcomes.

If you’re looking to get ahead of the curve, consider creating a course on this topic.

This could cover everything from data mining and modeling to statistics and machine learning. Regardless of your focus, your course should aim to give students the skills and knowledge they need to make sense of data and put it to use in their businesses.

4. Online Marketing

The world is increasingly moving online, and so too does marketing. What do you see when scrolling through your Facebook or Instagram feed? More and more ads, right?

As more businesses are moving online; they need to adapt their marketing strategies to this new landscape.

This is where you come in.

If you have experience in digital marketing, consider creating a course that covers topics like:

• SEO
• Affiliate Marketing.
• Content Marketing.
• Mobile Marketing
• Email Marketing.
• Social media marketing
• Digital marketing mistakes to avoid

By teaching others about online marketing, you can help them reach a wider audience and grow their businesses.

5. Business and Entrepreneurship

In recent years, we’ve seen the rise of entrepreneurship and the gig economy. More people prefer to start their own businesses or become freelancers.

Still, during the mid-quarters of the covid-19 pandemic, Better.com Ceo fired 900 employees over Zoom.

This highlights a significant trend: Start your own business or be at the mercy of someone else’s.

That said, the demand for business courses and entrepreneurship courses has been on the rise. In particular, courses that teach practical skills like time management, marketing, and financial planning are in high demand.

If you have experience in business or entrepreneurship, you can create online courses that can help people start and grow their businesses.

6. Dog Training

Dog training is a popular online course idea for a few reasons:

1. It’s a skill set that people are always in need of.
2. It’s a relatively easy course to create.
3. It’s a great way to help people bond with their pets.

Many dog owners out there would love to have a well-trained pet. In your course, you could cover topics such as obedience training, potty training, and how to socialize a dog.

7. Language Learning

Every day, the global economy is becoming more interconnected. Countries are increasingly doing business with one another. As a result, there’s a rising need for people who can speak multiple languages.

If you’re bilingual or multilingual, consider creating a course that teaches others your language.

In particular, courses that teach English as a second language (ESL) are highly demanded.

If you’re bilingual or have experience teaching languages, creating an online course could be great to share your skills with others. You could focus on teaching a particular language or creating a course covering multiple languages.

8. Photography/Videography

At first glance, creating an online photography or videography course might seem like a daunting prospect. After all, crafting compelling images and developing your unique style requires time, practice, and plenty of trial and error.

Nonetheless, there are a few simple ways to become a successful photographer or videographer. One way is to carefully study the work of other photographers and videographers whose style you admire.

Consider adopting specific techniques or even trying out some of their ideas in your work.

Additionally, it’s important to practice often and always be willing to experiment with different approaches and techniques. By staying dedicated and committed to your craft, you will gradually hone your skills and begin developing a unique voice as a photographer.

9. Python Programming

When it comes to programming languages, there are a plethora of alternatives. From Java to JavaScript, there’s a programming language for everyone. However, one language that continues to rise in popularity is Python.

At its core, Python is a versatile and powerful programming language that is easy to read and write. Additionally, Python can be used for various applications, ranging from web development to scientific computing.

And because it’s relatively easy to learn, Python is an ideal choice for beginners who want to explore programming without getting overwhelmed by complicated syntax or obscure terminology.

All of this makes creating an online Python course a great idea.

Your course outline should be designed to give students a strong foundation in Python programming basics. You can then expand futher by covering more advanced topics, such as object-oriented programming or working with databases.

10. Health and Wellness

Following the COVID-19 pandemic, there has been a renewed focus on health and wellness. People are getting more interested in learning about how to live a healthy lifestyle.

When it comes to living a healthy life, our mental health is just as important as our physical health. In your course, you could cover topics such as stress management, anxiety reduction, and how to deal with depression.

Additionally, you could teach people about exercise and proper nutrition. You could even provide tips on how to create a healthy home environment.

11. Personal Development

Personal development courses can cover many topics, from goal setting to time management. If you’re passionate about self-improvement, consider creating a course covering some of the most popular and effective personal development strategies.

In your course, you could teach people how to set and achieve their goals. You could also cover time management techniques to help people make the most of their day. Additionally, you could teach people about the importance of positive thinking and how to overcome negative thinking patterns.

12. Cybersecurity

Every year, there are new stories about data breaches and cyber-attacks. New and more sophisticated ransomware threats are constantly emerging. In 2017, the WannaCry ransomware attack affected over 200,000 people in 150 countries. And just last year, Colonial Pipeline was forced to pay a $5 million ransom after a cyber-attack.

Things even get messier when looking at the war between Ukraine and Russia, which has spilled over into cybersecurity.

All of this is to say that cybersecurity is more important than ever. And if you have experience in this field, you could create a course teaching people about the basics of cybersecurity.

In your course, you could cover password security, firewalls, and antivirus software. You could also teach people about the importance of online privacy and how to protect their personal information.

13. Professional Skills

In today’s competitive job market, it’s not enough to have a college degree. Employers are looking for candidates with a well-rounded skillset.

If you have a skill that you know is in high demand, consider creating a course that can help people develop that skill. For example, if you’re a graphic designer, you could create a course teaching people graphic design basics.

Or even out of the shores of computers, if you’re good at fashion, you could make a course on the basics of sewing. If you know how to play musical instruments, you could make a course teaching people the basics of that instrument. The list goes on and on.

14. Life Coaching

Don’t be surprised; many people search for guidance and inspiration, especially during tough times.

Coaching is a way that helps people achieve their personal or professional goals. This could be anything from relationship coaching to career coaching. As an online coach, you’ll provide support and guidance to help clients overcome challenges and make progress.

If you consider yourself a good listener with great advice, becoming a life coach might be the perfect side hustle for you. You can start by offering your services for free and then gradually start charging for your time.

15. Hobbies and Interests

People are always looking for new hobbies and interests to explore. If you have a hobby or interest that you’re passionate about, consider creating a course teaching others about it.

For example, if you enjoy cooking, you could create a course teaching people how to cook healthy meals. Or, if you’re interested in gardening, you could create a course teaching people how to start their garden.

You could also create a course teaching people how to pursue their hobbies and interests more efficiently. For example, you could teach people how to save money on their hobby expenses or find more time to pursue their hobbies.

Tips for Choosing the Right Online Course Idea

When choosing an online course idea, it’s important to consider the following factors:

1. The Demand for the Course

Is there a market for your course? Will people want to buy and learn from it?

There’s no point in creating a course that no one wants to buy.

Even if you’re the best teacher in the world, if there’s no demand for your class, it probably won’t sell no matter how much your market your online course.

Conduct market research and determine what courses are popular among your target audience at the beginning of the online course creation process.

2. Your Target Audience

Who is your target audience?

When creating an online course, it’s crucial to think about who you’re making the course for. Don’t just create a course for the sake of it. Instead, create a course that will appeal to a specific group of people.

This could be based on age, location, or even interests.

For example, if your target audience is stay-at-home moms, you’ll want to create a convenient course for them to take. That might mean creating a self-paced course that can be taken in short, digestible bites.

On the other hand, if your target audience is busy professionals, then you’ll want to create a course that is concise and to the point.

Your target audience will determine the type of course you create and how you market it.

3. The Needs and Wants of Your Target Audience

Once you’ve identified your target audience, it’s important to consider their needs and wants.

What are they seeking in an online course? What type of content do they want to see? What format would they prefer? How long should an online course be for them to stay engaged?

Your audience is the most critical factor when choosing an online course idea. It is helpful to get to know the beliefs, goals, and interests of your potential students.

All these factors will influence the design and structure of your course.

4. Your Expertise and Experience

What can you teach others that would be valuable to them? Are you an expert in a particular field or subject matter? Do you have any experience or unique skills that others would benefit from learning?

Your course should be based on your expertise and experience. This will make it easier for you to create engaging and informative content.

5. The Level of Competition

How many other courses are already out there on your chosen topic? If there are tons of popular online courses on the same subject, then it might be harder to make yours stand out.

In general, it’s easier to create a profitable online course if there are fewer courses in the same niche. There’s less competition, and it’s easier to get your course in front of potential students.

Of course, this doesn’t mean that you should avoid creating a course on a popular topic.

You just need to be aware that you’ll have to put in more effort to make your course stand out from the rest.